PG9000™
Piston Gauge
Operation and Maintenance Manual© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration Warning
To prevent possible electrical shock, fire, or personal injury:Read all safety Information before you use the product.

Use the product only as specified, or the protection supplied by the
product can be compromised.

High-pressure liquids and gases are potentially hazardous. Energy stored
in these liquids and gases can be released unexpectedly and with extreme
force. High-pressure systems should be assembled and operated only by
personnel who have been instructed in proper safety practices.



Use only the main power cord and connector approved for the voltage andplug configuration in your country and rated for the product.

Make sure the ground conductor in the main power cord is connected to aprotective earth ground. Disruption of the protective earth could put
voltage on the chassis that could cause death.

Replace the main power cord if the insulation is damaged or if theinsulation shows signs of wear.



Do not put the product where access to the main power cord is blocked.

Do not use and disable the product if it is damaged.



Use this product indoors only.

© 1998 - 2010 Fluke Calibration All rights reserved.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any
form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without the express written permission of Fluke Calibration, 4765
East Beautiful Lane, Phoenix, Arizona 85044-5318 USA.
Fluke Calibration makes sincere efforts to ensure the accuracy and quality of its published materials; however, no warranty,
expressed or implied, is provided. Fluke Calibration disclaims any responsibility or liability for any direct or indirect damages
resulting from the use of the information in this manual or products described in it. Mention of any product or brand does notconstitute an endorsement by Fluke Calibration of that product or brand. This manual was originally composed in English and was
subsequently translated into other languages. The fidelity of the translation cannot be guaranteed. In case of conflict between the
English version and other language versions, the English version predominates.
Fluke Calibration, DH, DHI, PG9000, PG9607, CalTool and COMPASS are trademarks, registered and otherwise, of Fluke
Corporation.
Swagelok is a registered trademark of the Swagelok Company.
Krytox is a registered trademark of the Dupont de Nemours Company.

Products described in this manual are manufactured under international patents and one or more of the following
U.S. patents: 6,701,791, 5,142,483, 5,257,640, 5,331,838, 5,445,035. Other U.S. and international patents pending.
Document No. 3782240
100820Printed in the USA© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Table of Contents
Table of Contents ................................................................. III
Tables .................................................................................. V
Figures ................................................................................ VI
About This Manual ............................................................... VII
1.

Introduction ..................................................................... 1
1.1
1.2

Product Overview ................................................................................................................................... 1
Specifications ......................................................................................................................................... 2
1.2.1
1.2.1.1
1.2.1.2
1.2.1.3
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4

1.3

Front and Rear Panels ........................................................................................................................... 6
1.3.1
1.3.1.1
1.3.1.2
1.3.2
1.3.3

2.

General Specifications............................................................................................................................. 2
AMH Automated Mass Handler (Optional) .............................................................................................. 3
Embedded Features ............................................................................................................................... 3
Ambient and Instrument Condition Measurements ................................................................................. 4
Piston-Cylinder Assembly (PC-9607-5) ................................................................................................... 5
Mass Sets ................................................................................................................................................. 5
Pressure Measurements (PG9607) .......................................................................................................... 5
Terminal Front and Rear Panels.............................................................................................................. 6
PG Terminal Front Panel ........................................................................................................................ 6
PG Terminal Rear Panel ........................................................................................................................ 6
Remote Electronics Module Rear Panel ................................................................................................. 7
Base Rear Panel ....................................................................................................................................... 8

Installation ....................................................................... 9
2.1

Unpacking And Inspection .................................................................................................................... 9
2.1.1
2.1.1.1
2.1.1.2
2.1.1.3
2.1.1.4
2.1.1.5
2.1.1.6
2.1.2
2.1.2.1
2.1.2.2
2.1.2.3
2.1.2.4
2.1.2.5

2.2
2.3

Site Requirements ................................................................................................................................ 15
Setup ..................................................................................................................................................... 17
2.3.1
2.3.1.1
2.3.1.2
2.3.1.3
2.3.1.4
2.3.1.5
2.3.1.6
2.3.2

2.4

Removing From Packaging ..................................................................................................................... 9
Platform ................................................................................................................................................. 9
Manual Mass Set ................................................................................................................................... 9
Piston-Cylinder Assembly (PG9607) .................................................................................................... 10
Vacuum Reference Hardware (Optional) .............................................................................................. 10
AMH Automated Mass Handler (Optional) ............................................................................................ 10
AMH Mass Set (Optional) ..................................................................................................................... 10
Inspecting Contents ............................................................................................................................... 11
Platform ............................................................................................................................................... 11
Mass Set .............................................................................................................................................. 12
Piston-cylinder Assembly ..................................................................................................................... 13
Vacuum Reference (Optional) .............................................................................................................. 14
Automated Mass Handler (Optional)..................................................................................................... 15

Preparing for Operation ......................................................................................................................... 17
Setting Up the Platform ........................................................................................................................ 17
System Pressure Interconnections ....................................................................................................... 17
Setting Up A Manual Mass Set ............................................................................................................. 18
Setting Up An AMH Automated Mass Handler (Optional) ..................................................................... 19
Setting Up an AMH Mass Set ............................................................................................................... 20
Setting Up Vacuum Reference Hardware (Optional)............................................................................. 22
Installing and Removing a PG9607 Piston-Cylinder Assembly........................................................... 23

Power Up And Verification .................................................................................................................. 26
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.4.4
2.4.5
2.4.6
2.4.7

Power Up ................................................................................................................................................ 26
Check That On-board Piston-Cylinder Module And Mass Set Information Are Correct .................... 26
Set Local Gravity Value ......................................................................................................................... 26
Setup Pressure Equation Variable Input Sources ................................................................................ 26
Check Proper Operation Of Ambient Condition Measurements ......................................................... 27
Apply Pressure To The Piston-Cylinder Module .................................................................................. 27
Check Proper Behavior Of Motorized Piston Rotation ........................................................................ 28
Page III© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

TABLE OF CONTENTS

2.4.8
2.4.9
2.4.102.4.11
2.4.122.4.132.5

3.

Check Proper Operation Of Piston Behavior Measurements .............................................................. 28
Verify Vacuum Reference ...................................................................................................................... 28
AMH Start Up/Verification ...................................................................................................................... 29
Check Automated Pressure Generation (If Present) ............................................................................ 30
Check/Set Security Level ....................................................................................................................... 30
Additional Precautions to Take Before Making Pressure Measurements .......................................... 31

Short Term Storage .............................................................................................................................. 31

General Operation ........................................................... 33
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4

Fundamental Operating Principles ..................................................................................................... 33
Keypad Layout And Protocol .............................................................................................................. 34
Sounds .................................................................................................................................................. 35
Pressure Ready/Not Ready Indication ................................................................................................ 35
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3

3.5
3.6
3.7

Piston Position ..................................................................................................................................... 37
Manual Mass Loading .......................................................................................................................... 38
AMH Mass Loading .............................................................................................................................. 40
3.7.1
3.7.2
3.7.2.1
3.7.2.2
3.7.2.3
3.7.2.4
3.7.2.5
3.7.2.6
3.7.2.7
3.7.2.8

3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11

Piston Position Ready/Not Ready ......................................................................................................... 36
Piston Rotation Ready/Not Ready ......................................................................................................... 36
Vacuum Reference Ready/Not Ready ................................................................................................... 37

Operating Principals .............................................................................................................................. 40
AMH Operation ....................................................................................................................................... 42
Installing an AMH Mass Handler on the PG9000 Platform .................................................................... 43
Removing a Mass Handler from the PG9000 Platform ......................................................................... 45
AMH Mass to Pressure or Pressure to Mass Operation ............................................................................ 45
Direct Control of AMH Functions .......................................................................................................... 46
Making and Breaking Reference Vacuum with AMH............................................................................. 46
Accessing the PG9000 Piston-Cylinder Module with AMH.................................................................... 46
AMH Indicator LED .............................................................................................................................. 47
AMH Error Messages ........................................................................................................................... 47

Controlled Clearance Pressure (PG9607)........................................................................................... 49
Main Run Screen .................................................................................................................................. 50
General Function/Menu Flow Chart .................................................................................................... 51
Direct Function Keys............................................................................................................................ 51
3.11.1
Direct Function Keys Summary ............................................................................................................ 51
3.11.2[P-C] ........................................................................................................................................................ 52
3.11.3[UNIT] ...................................................................................................................................................... 53
3.11.3.1
Customizing Pressure Units Available Under the UNIT Function .......................................................... 54
3.11.4[MODE].................................................................................................................................................... 55
3.11.4.1
Differential Measurement Mode............................................................................................................ 56
3.11.5[SYSTEM] ................................................................................................................................................ 63
3.11.5.1
First System Run Screen...................................................................................................................... 64
3.11.5.2
Second System Run Screen ................................................................................................................ 64
3.11.5.3
Third System Run Screen .................................................................................................................... 65
3.11.6[AMBIENT] .............................................................................................................................................. 66
3.11.7[HEAD] .................................................................................................................................................... 67
3.11.8[ROTATE] ................................................................................................................................................ 69
3.11.8.1<2Pre-Decel> ....................................................................................................................................... 70
3.11.9[GEN] (Optional) ..................................................................................................................................... 71
3.11.9.1<2target>.............................................................................................................................................. 73
3.11.9.2<3raise> ............................................................................................................................................... 73
3.11.9.3<4UL> .................................................................................................................................................. 73
3.11.9.4<5tol> ................................................................................................................................................... 73
3.11.9.5<6refloat> ............................................................................................................................................. 74
3.11.10 [RES] ....................................................................................................................................................... 74
3.11.11 [ENTER/SET P] From Run Screen ......................................................................................................... 76
3.11.11.1 [ENTER/SET P] In Pressure To Mass Mode ........................................................................................ 77
3.11.11.2 [ENTER/SET P] In Mass To Pressure Mode ........................................................................................ 78
3.11.11.3 Commands for zero pressure, ending a test ......................................................................................... 79
3.11.12 [P OR M]................................................................................................................................................... 79
3.11.13 [ ] and [ ], [←] .................................................................................................................................. 80

3.12[SETUP] Menu....................................................................................................................................... 81
3.12.1
3.12.2
3.12.3

3.13<1select> ................................................................................................................................................ 82<2view> ................................................................................................................................................... 83<3edit> .................................................................................................................................................... 84[SPECIAL] Menu ................................................................................................................................... 86
3.13.1<1PC/MS> ............................................................................................................................................... 87
3.13.1.1
Create a Piston-Cylinder Module .......................................................................................................... 88© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page IVTABLE OF CONTENTS

3.13.1.2
Edit a Piston-Cylinder Module .............................................................................................................. 90
3.13.1.3
View a Piston-Cylinder Module ............................................................................................................. 90
3.13.1.4
Delete a Piston-Cylinder Module .......................................................................................................... 91
3.13.1.5
Select The Active Piston-Cylinder Module ............................................................................................ 91
3.13.1.6
Add a Mass Set .................................................................................................................................... 92
3.13.1.7
Edit a Mass Set .................................................................................................................................... 96
3.13.1.8
View a Mass Set .................................................................................................................................. 96
3.13.1.9
Delete a Mass Set ................................................................................................................................ 96
3.13.1.10 Select Mass Set ................................................................................................................................... 96
3.13.1.11 Add a Mass Loading Bell ...................................................................................................................... 97
3.13.1.12 Edit a Mass Loading Bell ...................................................................................................................... 98
3.13.1.13 View a Mass Loading Bell .................................................................................................................... 98
3.13.1.14 Delete A Mass Loading Bell ................................................................................................................. 99
3.13.1.15 Select A Mass Loading Bell .................................................................................................................. 99
3.13.2<2presU> ................................................................................................................................................ 99
3.13.3<3head> .................................................................................................................................................. 99
3.13.3.1<3head>, <1fluid> ...............................................................................................................................100
3.13.3.2<3head>, <2unit> ................................................................................................................................101
3.13.3.3<3head>, <3atm> ................................................................................................................................101
3.13.3.4<3head>, <4piston> ............................................................................................................................101
3.13.4<4prefs> .................................................................................................................................................102
3.13.4.1<4prefs>, <1ScrSvr> ...........................................................................................................................102
3.13.4.2<4prefs>, <2sound> ............................................................................................................................102
3.13.4.3<4prefs>, <3time> ...............................................................................................................................103
3.13.4.4<4prefs>, <4ID> ..................................................................................................................................103
3.13.4.5<4prefs>, <5level> ..............................................................................................................................104
3.13.5<5remote> ..............................................................................................................................................106
3.13.5.1
COM1, COM2, COM3 and COM4 (RS232) .........................................................................................107
3.13.5.2
IEEE-488.............................................................................................................................................107
3.13.5.3
RS232 Self Test ..................................................................................................................................108
3.13.5.4
External Barometer (RPM) Communications (COM2) ..........................................................................108
3.13.5.5
External Vacuum Gauge Communications (COM2) .............................................................................110
3.13.6<6gl> ......................................................................................................................................................112
3.13.7<7cal>.....................................................................................................................................................113
3.13.8<8AMH> .................................................................................................................................................113
3.13.8.1<2control>, <1up/down> ......................................................................................................................114
3.13.8.2<2control>, <2discreet>.......................................................................................................................114
3.13.8.3<2control>, <3loadall> .........................................................................................................................114
3.13.8.4<2control>, <4unloadall> .....................................................................................................................115
3.13.9<9reset> .................................................................................................................................................115
3.13.9.1<9reset>, <1sets> ...............................................................................................................................115
3.13.9.2<9reset>, <2units> ..............................................................................................................................116
3.13.9.3<9reset>, <3com> ...............................................................................................................................116
3.13.9.4<9reset>, <4cal> .................................................................................................................................116
3.13.9.5<9reset>, <5setups> ...........................................................................................................................117
3.13.9.6<9reset>, <6all> ..................................................................................................................................117

4.

Remote Operation ......................................................... 119
4.1
4.2

Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 119
Interfacing ........................................................................................................................................... 119
4.2.1
4.2.1.1
4.2.1.2
4.2.2

4.3

Commands .......................................................................................................................................... 121
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.3.3
4.3.3.1
4.3.4
4.3.4.1
4.3.4.2

4.4

RS232 interface .....................................................................................................................................119
COM1 .................................................................................................................................................119
COM2, COM3 and COM4 ...................................................................................................................120
IEEE-488 (GPIB).....................................................................................................................................120
Command Syntax ..................................................................................................................................121
Command Summary .............................................................................................................................121
Error Messages .....................................................................................................................................123
AMH Errors .........................................................................................................................................124
Command descriptions ........................................................................................................................124
IEEE Std. 488.2 Common And Status Commands ..............................................................................124
PG9000 Commands ............................................................................................................................126

Status System ..................................................................................................................................... 151
4.4.1
4.4.1.1
4.4.1.2

Status Reporting System ......................................................................................................................151
Status Byte Register............................................................................................................................151
Standard Event Register .....................................................................................................................153

Page III© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

TABLE OF CONTENTS

5.

M a i n t e n a n c e , Ad j u s t m e n t s An d C a l i b r a t i o n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 5 5
5.1
5.2

Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 155
Platform ............................................................................................................................................... 156
5.2.1
5.2.1.1
5.2.1.2
5.2.1.3
5.2.1.4
5.2.1.5
5.2.1.6
5.2.2
5.2.3

5.3

Piston-Cylinder Disassembly, Cleaning And Maintenance ............................................................ 162
5.3.1
5.3.1.1
5.3.1.2
5.3.2
5.3.3
5.3.4
5.3.4.1

5.4

Platform .................................................................................................................................................168
Terminal .................................................................................................................................................168
AMH Automated Mass Handler Removal .............................................................................................168

Troubleshooting............................................................ 169
6.1

7.

Cleaning.................................................................................................................................................167
Recalibration .........................................................................................................................................167

Reloading Embedded Software Into PG9000 Flash Memory .......................................................... 167
Disassembly And Reassembly Of PG9000....................................................................................... 168
5.6.1
5.6.2
5.6.3

6.

Disassembly Of The PG9607 Piston Retaining Assembly ..................................................................163
Disassembly Procedure ......................................................................................................................163
Reassembly Procedure .......................................................................................................................164
Cleaning (Other Than PG9607) .............................................................................................................165
Cleaning (PG9607) ................................................................................................................................166
Recalibration .........................................................................................................................................167
Updating Piston-Cylinder Module Files ................................................................................................167

Mass Sets ............................................................................................................................................ 167
5.4.1
5.4.2

5.5
5.6

Calibration/Adjustment Of On-board Measurement Functions ..........................................................156
Principles ............................................................................................................................................156
Barometric Pressure Sensor ...............................................................................................................156
Ambient Temperature sensor ..............................................................................................................157
Relative Humidity Sensor ....................................................................................................................158
Piston-Cylinder Module Temperature Sensors ....................................................................................158
Reference Vacuum Sensor (Optional) .................................................................................................160
Piston Position Detection Adjustment .................................................................................................160
Drive Belt Replacement ........................................................................................................................161

Overview ............................................................................................................................................. 169

Appendix ...................................................................... 173
7.1

Conversion Of Numerical Values ...................................................................................................... 173
7.1.1

7.2

7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.2.1
7.2.2.2

7.3
7.4

Pressure ................................................................................................................................................173

Defined Pressure Calculations .......................................................................................................... 173
Calculations...........................................................................................................................................175
Fluid Heads............................................................................................................................................176
Fluid Head Components ......................................................................................................................176
Overall Fluid Head Correction .............................................................................................................177

Glossary .............................................................................................................................................. 178
Limited Warranty And Limitation Of Liability................................................................................... 180© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page IV

Tables
Table 1. PG9607 Parts List ........................................................................................................................ 11
Table 2. Manual Mass Set Parts List (excluding 80 and 100 kg)............................................................... 12
Table 3. Manual Mass Set Parts List (80 and 100 kg) ............................................................................... 12
Table 4. AMH-100 Mass Set Parts List ...................................................................................................... 12
Table 5. Mass Set Compositions ............................................................................................................... 13
Table 6. 50 mm Gas Piston-Cylinder Assembly Parts List ........................................................................ 13
Table 7. PG9000 Vacuum Reference Hardware ....................................................................................... 14
Table 8. AHM-100-VAC Parts List ............................................................................................................. 15
Table 9. Drive Air Pressure Requirement by Mass Set ............................................................................. 16
Table 10. AMH Errors ................................................................................................................................ 48
Table 11. Summary of PG9000 Direct Function Key Operations .............................................................. 52
Table 12. Pressure Units of Measure Available ......................................................................................... 55
Table 13. Valve Settings for Setting Differential Mode Static Pressure ..................................................... 59
Table 14. Valve Settings to Apply PG9000 Pressure to the RPM for Differential Mode Offsetting ........... 60
Table 15. Valve Settings for Operating in Differential Mode ...................................................................... 62
Table 16. SETUP File Choices, Factory Preferred Choice and Normal Value .......................................... 82
Table 17. Security Levels - Functions NOT Executed Per Function/Level .............................................. 105
Table 18. COM1, COM2, COM3 and COM4 Available Settings.............................................................. 107
Table 19. COM1 DB-9F Pin Designation ................................................................................................. 120
Table 20. COM2, COM3 and COM4 DB-9M Pin Designation ................................................................. 120
Table 21. Command Summary ................................................................................................................ 121
Table 22. Error Messages ........................................................................................................................ 123
Table 23. Status Byte Register ................................................................................................................ 151
Table 24. Standard Event Register .......................................................................................................... 153
Table 25. PG9000 Troubleshooting Checklist ......................................................................................... 169
Table 26. Pressure Unit of Measure Conversions ................................................................................... 173
Table 27. PG9000 Defined Pressure Calculation Variables .................................................................... 174
Table 28. Fluke Calibration Authorized Service Providers ...................................................................... 181

Page V© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

FiguresFigure 1. PG Terminal Front Panel .............................................................................................................. 6
Figure 2. PG Terminal Rear Panel ............................................................................................................... 7
Figure 3. PG9000 Remote Electronics Module Rear Panel ....................................................................... 7
Figure 4. PG9000 Base Rear Panel (PG9607 shown) ................................................................................ 8
Figure 5. AMH Mass Set ............................................................................................................................ 21
Figure 6. PG9607 Piston-Cylinder Installation ........................................................................................... 25
Figure 7. Piston Gauge Operating Principle .............................................................................................. 33
Figure 8. PG9000 Keypad Layout .............................................................................................................. 34
Figure 9. Piston Stroke and Zones ............................................................................................................ 38
Figure 10. AMH Schematic/Operating Principle ........................................................................................ 42
Figure 11. AMH Installation on PG9000 Platform ...................................................................................... 43
Figure 12. AMH Indicator location .............................................................................................................. 47
Figure 13. Run Screen Flow Chart ............................................................................................................ 51
Figure 14. Differential Mode Controller Schematic .................................................................................... 58
Figure 15. PG9000 Platform Reference Level Location ............................................................................. 68
Figure 16. Status Byte Register ............................................................................................................... 151
Figure 17. Piston Retainer Assembly....................................................................................................... 164
Figure 18. Gas Operated, Gas Lubricated Piston-Cylinder Module Lubrication Chart ............................. 165© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page VI

About This ManualThis manual provides the user with the information necessary to operate the PG9000 Piston Gauge. It
also includes a great deal of additional information provided to help optimize PG9000 use and take fulladvantage of its many features and functions.
Before using the manual, take a moment to become familiar with the Table of Contents structure. All firsttime PG9000 users should read Sections 1 and 2. Section 3 provides a comprehensive description ofgeneral PG9000 operating principles. Section 4 covers remote communication with an external
computer. Section 5 provides maintenance and calibration information. Section 6 is a quick
troubleshooting guide. Use the information in Section 6 to troubleshoot unexpected PG9000 behavior
based on the symptoms of that behavior.
Certain words and expressions have specific meaning as they pertain to PG9000s. The Glossary(see Section 7) is useful as a quick reference for the definition of specific words and expressions as they
are used in this manual.

Note
For those who “DON’T READ MANUALS”, go directly to section 2.3 to set up
the PG9000. Then go to section 2.4. This will get you running quickly with minimalrisk of causing damage to yourself or your PG9000. Then… when you havequestions or start to wonder about all the great features you might be missing, getinto the manual!

Manual Conventions
 Caution“Caution” is used in throughout the manual to identify conditions or actions that
could cause harm to the PG9000 or to the devices that are connected to the
PG9000.

 Warning“Warning” is used in throughout the manual to identify actions that could pose ahazard to the user of the PG9000.

Note“Note” is used throughout the manual to identify operating and applications advice
and additional explanations.

[ ] indicates direct function keys (e.g., [RANGE]).
< > indicates PG9607 screen displays (e.g., <1yes>)

Page VII© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Notes© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page VIII

1.

Introduction

1.1

Product Overview

PG9000 Piston Gauges are reference level pressure standards that operate on the pistongauge principle. Pressure is defined by balancing it against the force exerted by a known massaccelerated by gravity on the effective area of a piston-cylinder.
A PG9000 piston gauge consists of the PG9000 Platform, a piston-cylinder module and a mass set.
Optional hardware for vacuum reference operation is available. An optional automated mass handlingsystem is available as well. A PG9000 system typically also includes the means to generate and adjustpressures and to interconnect the system components and a device being calibrated or tested. The®
pressure generation component can be manual or automated. COMPASS for Pressure software may
also be included to assist in executing test sequences, acquiring test data and producing test reports.
The PG9000 Platform consists of the PG9000 Base, Terminal and Remote Electronics Module. Local
user interface is through the keypad and display on the terminal. Remote communications and all on
board (built in) sensors are located inside or are connected to the Remote Electronics Module.
PG9000 is a family of piston gauges with common presentation and features. The first production modelof the PG9000 family is the PG9607.
PG9607 operates up to a maximum pressure of 500 kPa and supports definition of pressure against
either atmosphere or vacuum reference using a gas operated, gas lubricated piston-cylinder module(PC-9607-5).
PG9607 was designed to exploit a unique 50 mm diameter piston-cylinder. With this piston-cylinder,
the piston is mounted in a fixed position in the mounting post and the cylinder floats and is rotated. A
controlled clearance pressure can be introduced into the mounting post allowing the piston diameterand thus the gap between the piston and cylinder to be varied.
PG9607 is available on a limited basis and, generally, is only offered for use in national measurement
institutes or other laboratories performing fundamental research in pressure metrology.
PG9000 platform, piston-cylinder module, mass set and optional automated mass handling system aredesigned to maximize metrological performance and ease of operation. They include many features thatenhance the fundamental precision and stability of pressure measurements as well as simplifying use andreducing operator influence on the measurements. Extensive monitoring and controlling capability andadvanced local and remote user interfaces are integrated into the PG9000 Platform.
Operator interaction with PG9000 and its extensive capabilities and peripherals is accomplished througha single display and keypad on the PG Terminal or from a computer via a single standard RS232 orIEEE-488 interface.

Page 1© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1.2

Specifications
1.2.1

General Specifications

Power Requirements

50/60 Hz, 60 VA max. consumption.
100 to 240 VAC, operating altitude: <2000m
100 to 150 VAC, operating altitude: <5000m

Operating Temperature Range

15 to 35 °C

Operating Humidity Range

5 to 95% R.H., non-condensing

WeightInstrument platform with no mass or
piston-cylinder loaded.
PG9607 (without vacuum hardware)

34 kg (74 lb)

Remote Electronics Module

1.9 kg (4 lb)

PG Terminal

1.4 kg (3 lb)

Optional Vacuum Reference Hardware

16 kg (36 lb)

Dimensions
PG9607 Base (without vacuum hardware)

34.1 cm H x 54.3 cm W x 52.3 cm D (13.4 in x 21.4 in x 20.6 in)(Height: top of piston-cylinder assembly)

PG9607 Base (with optional vacuum bell
jar and vacuum gauge connected)

56 cm H x 54.3 cm W x 52.3 cm D (22 in x 21.4 in x 20.6 in)(Height: Top of bell jar)Remote Electronics Module
PG Terminal

10.2 cm H x 35.1 cm W x 19.6 cm D (4 in. 13.8 in. x 7.7 in.)12 cm H x 15 cm W x 20 cm D (4.7 in. H x 5.9 in. W x 7.9 in. D)

Microprocessors
Instrument Platform
PG Terminal

Motorola 68302
Hitachi 64180

Communication Ports
RS232

IEEE-488
Fuses
Overall Pressure Range

Operating Media
Maximum Mass Load

COM1: Host computer
COM2: Residual vacuum sensor (external)
COM3: Automated pressure generator/controller
COM4: Unused/spare or pass throughHost computer
PEM Fuse: 1A, 250V, 5x20mm, Slow blow
Internal power supply Fuse: 3.15A, 250V
Gauge:
Absolute:

10.5 kPa to 500 kPa (1.5 to 72.5 psi)
10.5 kPa to 500 kPa (1.5 to 72.5 psi)

Differential:- 89.5 to 400 kPa (-13 to 58 psi) at
10.5 to 110 kPaa (1.5 to 16 psia) static pressure

Gas:nitrogen, helium, dry air (dewpoint ≤ -40 °C)

100 kg1
1

MS-AMH-100 mass set contains approximately 104.5 kg of mass.
Combined with the piston or cylinder and bell assembly, total massloads may be up to 106 kg resulting in pressures of up to 530 kPa.
(76.9 psi)

Page 2© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

1. INTRODUCTION

Pressure Connections
PG 9607 BaseAMH Drive
AMH Vent

Test port: : DH200
Controlled Clearance Pressure: DH200
Quick connector equivalent to Swagelok QM Series (QM2-B-200),
Use with DESO (double end shut off) type stem
Quick connector equivalent to Swagelok QM Series (QM2-B-200),
Use with SESO (single end shut off) type stem only.

Note
DH200 and DH500 are gland and collar type fittings for
1/4 in. (6.35 mm) coned and left hand threaded tubes.
DH200 is equivalent to AE SF250C, HIP LF4, etc.
DH500 is equivalent to AE F250C, HIP HF4, etc.
Remote Electronics Module
Vacuum Bell Jar
CE Conformance

ATM port:
10-32 UNF
3x KF40, 1x KF50 (top)All PG9000 models conform to CE requirements and are CE
marked.

1.2.1.1

AMH Automated Mass Handler (Optional)

Power Requirements:
Operating Temperature:
Dimensions:

15 VDC @ 2 A, 30 W max. consumption
15 to 35 ºC
41 cm H x 41 cm W x 36 cm D (16.3 in. x 16.1 in. x 14.1 in.)

Weight:Power/Communications:

12 kg (25 lbs)
Custom 8 pin connector

AMH Drive Air Supply:

550 kPa (80 psi), ± 10%, minimal flow

AMH Vacuum Supply:
Pressure Connections:
CE conformance:

1.2.1.2

At least 50 kPa (7.5 pi) under atmosphere, minimal flow
Pressure:
Vacuum:Quick connector DESO (double end shut off) type stem
Quick connector SESO (single end shut off) type stem
Available, must be specified

Embedded Features•

Local control with 2 x 20 vacuum fluorescent display and 4 x 4 function
driven keypad.

•

Real time (1 second update rate) display and measurement of ambient(pressure, temperature, humidity) and instrument (piston-cylinder
temperature, piston position, piston drop rate, piston rotation rate, piston
rotation decay rate, reference vacuum) conditions.

•

Real time (1 second update rate) mass-to-pressure and pressure-tomass calculations taking into consideration all environmental andoperational variables.

•

Full gas and liquid fluid head corrections including DUT head correction
and piston position head correction. Barometer head correction included
for atmosphere reference operation (gauge mode).

•

Adjustable mass loading resolution (0.01 g to 0.1 kg).

•

Audible prompts of instrument status (piston movement, Ready/Not
Ready indication) with override capability.

•

Integrated automated mass handling option (AMH-100-VAC).

•

Interfacing and automatic exploitation of external barometer via RS232.

•

Interfacing and automatic exploitation of any external vacuum gauge via
RS232.

•

Automated differential mode to define low differential pressures atvarious static pressures between vacuum and two atmospheres.

•

Storage and one step activation of metrological data on up to 18 pistoncylinder modules, (3) mass sets and (3) mass loading bells.

Page 3© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL•

Continuous pressure Ready/Not Ready indication based on measured
conditions.

•

Motorized, intelligent piston drive system based measured rotation ratewith operator alert and manual override.

•

Integrated automated pressure control with standard Fluke Calibrationpressure controllers.

•

Full RS232 and IEEE-488 communications with multi-level commands to
set and read all instrument functions.

1.2.1.3

Ambient and Instrument Condition Measurements
Ambient1

Piston Cylinder Module

0 to 40 o C

0 to 40 oC

Resolution

o

0.1 C

0.01 o C

Measurement Uncertainty± 1 oC± 0.1 o C

Temperature
Range

Barometric Pressure
with Internal Sensor
Range
Resolution
Measurement Uncertainty

70 to 110 kPa
10 Pa± 140 Pa
Barometric pressure can also be read automatically with any
RS232 device such as a DH Intruments RPM.

Relative Humidity1
Range
Resolution
Measurement Uncertainty

5 to 95 % RH
1 % RH± 10 % RH

Piston Position
Range
Resolution
Measurement Uncertainty± 4.5 mm
0.1 mm± 0.2 mm

Piston Rotation(Rate and deceleration)
Range
Resolution

2 to 99 rpm
1 rpm

Vacuum (Optional)
Range
Resolution
Measurement Uncertainty

0 to 13 Pa
0.01 Pa± 0.05 Pa + 0.5 % of reading

1

PG9000 uses a Fluke Hart Scientific 2626-S temperature and humidity probe specified and factory
calibrated to deliver ±0.25 ˚ C uncertainty on temperature and ±3% on relative humidity. PG9000
performance requirements and factory calibration services require only the specifications listed above
to meet stated product uncertainties.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 4

1. INTRODUCTION

1.2.2

Piston-Cylinder Assembly (PC-9607-5)

The piston is mounted in a fixed position on the mounting post. The cylinder floats andis rotated.
Piston Material:

Tungsten carbide

Cylinder Material:

Tungsten carbide

Nominal Diameter:

50 mm

Nominal Area:

1.2.3

2 000 mm2

Mounting System:

Free deformation with controlled clearance pressure (CCP) available on
inside of piston.

Typical Drop Rate:< 0.25 mm/min at 500 kPa (Full mass load)

Mass Sets

All masses are delivered in molded, reusable, transit cases with custom inserts.
Masses > 50g
Material
FinishAdjustment Tolerance

Uncertainty of Measured Values
Masses < 50g

1.2.4

304L non-magnetic stainless steel
Electropolished± 20 ppm of nominal value (manual mass sets, AMH
automated mass handler mass sets do not have fixedadjustment tolerances)± 5 ppm or 1 mg, whichever is greater± 1 mgPressure Measurements (PG9607)
Note
For uncertainty in piston-cylinder effective area and typical measurement
uncertainty in pressure defined by the piston gauge, see the pistoncylinder calibration report and current revision of Fluke Calibration
Technical Note 0180TN12.

The piston is mounted in a fixed position on the mounting post. The cylinder floats andis rotated.
Sensitivity1:
2

Reproducibility :0.005 Pa + 0.5 ppm± 2 ppm + 0.05 Pa

1

Sensitivity: The smallest variation in input detectable in output.
2
Reproducibility: The root sum square of the stability of effective area and stability of theAMH-100 mass set for 1 year. Refer to Fluke Calibration Technical Note 0180TN12.

Page 5© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1.3

Front and Rear Panels
1.3.1

Terminal Front and Rear Panels
1.3.1.1

PG Terminal Front Panel

The front panel assembly provides a 2 x 20 vacuum fluorescent display and a
4 x 4 membrane keypad for local user interface. The terminal front panel assemblyis the same for all PG9000 models.
 Fluorescent display
 KeypadFigure 1. PG Terminal Front Panel

1.3.1.2

PG Terminal Rear Panel

The rear panel assembly provides the communications connection to the
PG9000 Remote Electronics Module. The terminal rear panel assembly is thesame for all PG9000 models.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 6

1. INTRODUCTION Power switch
 Fuse Power receptacle

 Connector for 25 pin cable to PG
Remote Electronics Module Cooling fan

Figure 2. PG Terminal Rear Panel

1.3.2

Remote Electronics Module Rear Panel

The PG9000 Remote Electronics Module houses all working electronics (processor, sensor
and communications) for the PG9000 in addition to sensors for ambient conditions(temperature, pressure and humidity).

 COM 2 (RS232) – External
Barometer, External Vacuum
Gauge and Pass throughCommunication
 COM 3 (RS232) – AutomatedPressure Generation/Control
Component PG DRIVER – 15 pin Cable to
PG Base ATM Connection (Barometer) Mounting Post PRT Connector to
PG Remote Electronics Module TH Probe Connector
 COM 4 (RS232) – Pass Through COM 1 (RS232) – Remote Host
Communications
 IEEE-488 – Remote Host
Communications
 AMH Connection
 Connector for 25 pin Cable to PG
TERMINAL

Figure 3. PG9000 Remote Electronics Module Rear Panel

Page 7© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

1.3.3

Base Rear Panel

The PG9000 Platform rear panel provides the communications connection to the PG Remote
Electronics Module, test and controlled clearance pressure connections as well as (optional)
AMH Automated Mass Handler connections.

 PG Driver – to PG Remote
Electronics Module
 AMH Connection
 AMH Vent Port Controlled Clearance Pressure
Port – PG9607 Only
 TEST Pressure Port
 AMH Drive Pressure Port PRT Connector – to Remote
Electronics Module

Figure 4. PG9000 Base Rear Panel (PG9607 shown)© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 82.

Installation

2.1

Unpacking And Inspection
2.1.1

Removing From Packaging

A typical PG9000 system includes the PG9000 Platform (see Section 2.1.1.1), a mass set (seeSection 2.1.1.2), a piston-cylinder assembly (see Section 2.1.1.3) and other accessories such as
vacuum reference hardware (see Section 2.1.1.4), an AMH automated mass handler (seeSection 2.1.1.5) and/or pressure generation and control components (see the accessory
Operation and Maintenance Manual or Instruction Sheet).

2.1.1.1

Platform

The PG9000 Platform consists of the PG9000 Base, Remote Electronics Module,
Terminal and interconnect accessories. The Base is shipped in a custom wooden
crate. The Platform components are shipped in a reusable, molded shipping andstorage case. The cables and accessories are shipped in a corrugated container
with other PG9000 accessories including operating instructions and calibration
reports.
 Open the PG9000 Base shipping crate (71 cm x 71 cm x 56 cm).
 Carefully lift the PG9000 Base from its position in the lower packing insert.
Note the orientation so that the same orientation will be used when PG9000
is repacked.

 Warning
The PG9000 Base has a mass of 34 kg (74 lb).
It isrecommended to remove it from the packaging with two people
on opposite sides of the shipping container. Removing or
lifting with only one person may cause injury.
 Open the PG9000 molded, reusable recalibration transit case and theaccessories corrugated shipping container.
 Remove the PG Terminal, Remote Electronics Module and TemperatureHumidity Probe from the recalibration transit case and the Platform
accessories from the shipping container.
Inspect and inventory theaccessories (see Section 2.1.2.1).
 Reinstall the packing inserts into the shipping and storage cases and store ina safe place.

2.1.1.2

Manual Mass Set
 Caution

The stability over time of PG9000 pressure measurements is afunction of the stability of the masses loaded on the cylinder.
Precautions should be taken in handling the masses tominimize influences that may change their mass. This includes
always wearing protective gloves when handling the masses toavoid contaminating them with body oils and perspiration.
Protective gloves are provided in the accessory kits of PG9000
Platforms.

Page 9© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

The mass set accessories are shipped in a separate corrugated container.
Open the corrugated container and inspect and inventory the accessories.
The PG9000 masses are shipped in reusable, molded shipping andstorage cases. The PG9000 masses should be removed from their shippingcases and inventoried when setting up the PG9000 system (see Section 2.1.1.2
for mass set content detail).
The PG9000 manual mass bell ships in a separate corrugated container.

 Caution
The mass loading bell is a metrological element that is part ofthe mass set. Like all of the masses, it is preferable not tohandle it with bare hands. Protective gloves are provided in theaccessory kit of each PG9000 Platform.

2.1.1.3

Piston-Cylinder Assembly (PG9607)

The PG9607 piston-cylinder assembly is shipped in a molded plastic case withcustom polyethylene inserts that accommodates 2 Acetal bullet cases. The pistonand the cylinder are separate; each is packed in its own bullet case. Do not handle
either of these elements with bare hands. Use the gloves that are in the PG9000
accessory kit or use the lint free wipes. See Section 2.1.2.3 for details.

 Caution
Never handle the piston or cylinder with bare hands. Oil andacids from bare skin can damage the critical surfaces (polishedappearance).

2.1.1.4

Vacuum Reference Hardware (Optional)

The optional PG9000 Vacuum Reference Hardware includes the vacuum Bell
Jar, reference vacuum sensor with power supply and interconnect cables andfittings necessary for vacuum operation.
The PG9000 Bell Jar is packed in a large wooden crate (66 cm x 66cm x 71 cm).
The vacuum reference sensor, power supply and associated fittings and cables
are packed in a reusable molded Vacuum Measurement Kit transit case.
Remaining fittings and adaptors are shipped in the PG9000 accessories
corrugated container (see Section 2.1.2.4).

2.1.1.5

AMH Automated Mass Handler (Optional)

AMH-100-VAC is delivered in a corrugated container with foam cut outs to holditems in place. Accessories are bagged together and packaged in a separate
corrugated container with other PG9000 system accessories.
Remove all parts from the shipping boxes. See Section 2.1.2.5 for more detail.

2.1.1.6

AMH Mass Set (Optional)

PG9000 AMH masses are shipped in reusable, molded shipping and storage
cases. One of the cases contains the binary masses, binary mass carrier, mass
bell and lifting shaft/trim mass tray. The other cases contain the main masses of
10 kg (see Section 0 for mass set content detail). Each mass is packed in asealed plastic bag and then placed in a protective shipping insert. The PG9000
AMH masses should be removed from their shipping cases and inventoried whensetting up the PG9000 system (see Section 2.1.1.2 for mass set content detail).

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 10

2. INSTALLATION Caution
The stability over time of PG9000 pressure measurements is a function of
the stability of the masses loaded on the piston. Precautions should betaken in handling the masses to minimize influences that may change theirmass. This includes always wearing protective gloves when handling themasses to avoid contaminating them with body oils and perspiration.
Protective gloves are provided in the accessory kits of PG9000 Platforms.

2.1.2

Inspecting Contents

Inspect all parts for damage. If damage is noted, report it to your Shipping & Receiving
Department and the delivering carrier for appropriate action.
Inspect for any missing components or accessories referring to Tables 1-8. Should any items
be missing, contact Fluke Calibration or your local Fluke Calibration representative.
A parts list of items supplied is provided in Section 2.1.2.1 for PG9000 Platform, Section 2.1.2.2
for mass sets, Section 2.1.2.3 for Piston-Cylinder Assemblies, Section 2.1.2.4 for (optional)
vacuum reference hardware and Section 2.1.2.5 for (optional) Automated Mass Handler.

2.1.2.1

Platform

Each PG9000 Platform is delivered complete with accessories as listed by partnumber in Table 1.
Table 1. PG9607 Parts List
PG9607
PLATFORM
3821488
Base3789373

Terminal

3789710

Remote Electronics Module

3789425

Transit case for recalibration items

3841097

Accessory Kit

3841024

ADPT, DH200 M X 1/8 in. swage

3069062(2) NIP, SS, DH200, 2.75"

3068377(2) ADPT, SS, DH200 F X 1/8 in. NPT F

3068547

ADPT, SS, DH200 M X 1/4 in. swage

3069081

Tee, SS, 1/4 in. swage

3138683

Union, SS, 1/4 in. swage x 1/8 in. swage

3135076

ADPT, SS, 1/4 in. swage x 1/8 in. NPT F

3141914

ADPT, SS, 1/8 in. NPT M x 1/8 in swage

3068564

ADPT, 10-32UNF x 1/8 in. Swage

3141516

1/8” tubing, PFA, 2 m

3232357(2) 1/4 in. tubing, SS, 10 cm

3853024

1/4 in. tubing, SS, 20 cm

3853036

1/4 in. tubing, SS, 50 cm

3853049

1/8 in. tubing, SS, 30 cm

3852995

1/8 in. tubing, SS, 150 cm

3853008(2) O-ring, Viton, brown, 2-029

3144730

O-ring, Viton, brown, 2-019

3134945(2) O-ring, Buna, 2-242

3135041

Allen wrench, 2.5 mm

3136044

Allen wrench, 3 mm

3135703

Allen wrench, 5 mm

3136098

Page 11© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Krytox GPL205/6 0.5 oz

2493420

Gift kit with gloves

3123777

Terminal to Platform Cable (DB25M – DB25F)

3068724

PRT Cable, PG Platform

3778220

TH Probe Cable

3837033

Driver Cable, PG Platform

3068683

Power Cable – US

3133781

Power Cable – UK3153005

Documentation
Calibration Report (PG)
Technical Data
ManualDocumentation CD

3152121315213937822403139043

2.1.2.2

Mass Set

PG9000 mass sets are composed of different combinations of individual masses
and accessories depending on the specific mass set ordered (see Tables 2 - 5).
Table 2. Manual Mass Set Parts List (excluding 80 and 100 kg)
DESCRIPTION
Mass Set

PART NO.
Refer to Table 530689693068991

35 kg set

1 ea.

1 ea.

40 kg set

1 ea.

1 ea.

45 kg set

1 ea.

1 ea.

55 kg set

1 ea.

2 ea.

Reusable Molded Transit Case with Foam Inserts

Mass Set Storage Tray and Spindle

3147461 and 3148764

Dust Covers

3138017 and 3138130

Calibration Report

3152121

Table 3. Manual Mass Set Parts List (80 and 100 kg)
DESCRIPTION
Mass Set

PART NO.
Refer to Table 5

Reusable Molded Transit Case with Foam Inserts

30689693068984

80 kg set

1 ea.

2 ea.

100 kg set

1 ea.

3 ea.

Mass Set Storage Tray and Spindle

3147461 and 3148764

Dust Covers

3138017 and 3138127

Calibration Report

3152121

Table 4. AMH-100 Mass Set Parts List
DESCRIPTION
Mass Set

Refer to Table 531239903068984

40 kg set (MS-AMH-40)

1 ea.

1 ea.

60 kg set (MS-AMH-60)

1 ea.

2 ea.

80 kg set (MS-AMH-80)

1 ea.

2 ea.

100 kg set (MS-AMH-100)

1 ea.

Reusable Molded Transit Case with Foam Inserts

Calibration Report© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PART NO.

3 ea.
3152121

Page 12

2. INSTALLATION

Table 5. Mass Set Compositions
MASS SET COMPOSITIONDESIGNATIONPART #NOMINALTOTALMASS (kg)

kg

5
kg

2
kg

1
kg

0.5
kg

0.2
kg

0.1
kg

MAKE-UP
MASS
(kg)

10

MS-7002-35

3069861

35

-

5

2

1

1

2

1

1 (4)

-

MS-7002-40

3070021

40

-

6

2

1

1

2

1

1 (4)

-

MS-7002-45

3069980

45

-

7

2

1

1

2

1

1 (4)

-

MS-7002-55

3069877

55

-

9

2

1

1

2

1

1 (4)

-

MS-7002-80

3070000

80

6

1

2

1

1

2

1

1 (9)

-

8

1

2

1

1

2

1

1 (9)

-

MS-7002-100

3070017100

DESIGNATIONPART #NOMINALTOTALMASS (kg)MASS SET COMPOSITION
10
kg

6.4
kg

6.2
kg

3.2
kg

1.6
kg

0.8
kg

0.4
kg

0.2
kg

0.1
kg

BELL, SHAFT,BINARY MASSCARRIER(3 PARTS)

MS-AMH-40

3071528

40

3

1

-

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

MS-AMH-60

3071519

60

5

1

-

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

MS-AMH-80

3071504

80

7

1

-

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

MS-AMH-100

3071440

100

9

1

-

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

All mass sets also include a trim mass set of 50 g to 0.01 g (total 100 g)

Note
The mass loading bell and piston make up part of the total mass
load. The mass loading bell for loading manual mass sets isordered and shipped separately. The mass loading bell for AMH
mass sets is delivered with the mass set.

2.1.2.3

Piston-cylinder Assembly
Table 6. 50 mm Gas Piston-Cylinder Assembly Parts List
5 kPa/kg
PC-9607-5
Piston-cylinder kit

3782028

Piston-cylinder

3782004

Piston-cylinder case (w/ 2 bullet cases)

3781999

Accessory Kit

3118500(2) O-rings, brown, Viton (2-015)

3134923

Documentation
Calibration report

3152121 Caution
Never handle the piston or cylinder with bare hands. Oil andacids from bare skin can damage the critical surfaces (polishedappearance).

Page 13© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2.1.2.4

Vacuum Reference (Optional)
Table 7. PG9000 Vacuum Reference Hardware
PG9000 Vacuum
Reference Hardware
3821513

Vacuum Measurement Kit

3840203

CDG Power Supply

3142866

CDG Cable, 10 ft.

3142875

RS232 Cable, 10 ft.

3142882

KF40 Centering Rng with Viton O-ring

3140217

KF40 Clamp

3140221

KF40 to KF16 Reducer

3142990

KF16 Elbow

3836205

CDG with manual valve – assembled with centeringring and clamp

3841484(2) KF16 Centering Ring with Viton O-ring

3134540(2) KF16 Clamp

3138978

Transit Case for Vacuum Measurement Kit

3841085

Bell Jar

3478417

Bell Jar Gasket

3788743

Vacuum Vent Valve and Fittings

3841060(2) KF40 Clamp

3140221

KF40 Blank Off Cap

3140671

KF40 Centering Ring with SS Screen

3142830

KF40 Centering Ring with Viton O-ring

3140217

KF40 to KF16 Reducer

3142990

KF16 Clamp

3138978

Vent Valve, KF10

3139838

KF10/16 Centering Ring, Viton, with Viton O-ring

3133103

KF50 Blank Off Cap

3836143

KF50 Centering Ring

3836162

KF50 Clamp

3836170

 Caution
The vacuum sensor (CDG) is assembled to an isolation valve inorder to store and/or transport in an evacuated condition. In
order to assure performance within specifications, open thevalve only when the pressure in the attached vacuum chamber
is below 500 Pa and close the valve before increasing thechamber pressure from vacuum.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 14

2. INSTALLATION

2.1.2.5

Automated Mass Handler (Optional)
Table 8. AHM-100-VAC Parts List
DESCRIPTION

1 ea.

PART #

AHM-100-VAC Automated Mass Handler

3821508

Accessory kit including:

2.2

3841402

1 ea.

Power/Comm Cable

38437442m

1/8 in. PFA tubing

32323572m

1/4 in. PFA tubing

32323782m

3/8 in. PFA tubing

3232445

1 ea.

3/8 in. Tee3843090

1 ea.

Reducer, 1/4 in. Swage x 3/8 in. Swage

3843104

1 ea.

3/8 in. Port Connector

3843119

1 ea.

ADPT, 1/8 in. Swage x 1/4 in. NPTM

3135780

1 ea.

Quick Connector Stem, 1/8 in. Swage DESO (red band)

3123691

1 ea.

Quick Connector Assy, with valve, AMH VAC Port (blue band)

3121719

4 ea.

Cable Tie, Hook and Loop2008964

1 ea.

3 mm Hex Wrench

3141776

Site Requirements

The exact PG9000 system installation is affected by the elements other than the PG9000 Platform thatmake up the PG9000 system.
When selecting and preparing a site to set up the PG9000 system, the following should be considered:•

Ambient conditions: To achieve optimum metrological performance, ambient conditions should becontrolled and maintained within the following:♦

Temperature: 19 to 26 °C, minimize rate of change of temperature.

♦

Relative Humidity: 5 to 95 %RH (non-condensing).

♦

Ambient Pressure: Minimize external influences that will cause barometric instability.

♦

Air Currents: Do not install the PG9000 Platform under a source of vertical air currents such as an
overhead air conditioning duct. These can blow on the mass load and add unquantified forces.

♦

Vibration: Minimize local vibration. Excessive vibration will reduce the stability of the pressures
defined by PG9000 (vibration affects the floating piston). Excessive high frequency vibration, forexample from a vacuum pump on the same table as the PG9000, may affect piston sensitivity.

•

Bench stability: Up to 100 kg may be loaded and unloaded onto the PG9000 Platform. The bench
on which the PG9000 sits should not deflect significantly under the mass load changes. This can beverified by setting the PG9000 Platform on the bench, leveling it, loading and unloading the complete
mass set while observing whether the level setting changes.

•

Location of other components: Plan the space required and a convenient layout for the complete
PG9000 system including the PG Terminal, PG Remote Electronics Module, mass set, pressure
generation/control component(s), test instrument connection and computer (if present). If using a DH
Intruments PPC or MPC to generate/control pressure, see its Operation and Maintenance Manual
for information on installing it. If a DH Intruments interconnections kit is being used to interconnect
the components, see its instruction sheet.

•

Electrical and pressure supplies: Plan the supply of electrical power to the PG Terminal and to thepressure generation/control component(s), if needed. If using a DH Intruments PPC or MPC togenerate/control pressure, see its Operation and Maintenance Manual for information on the pressuressource(s) it needs and how to connect them. Gas supplied to a PC-9000 piston-cylinder module must be
clean and dry (instrument grade minimum, high purity preferred) to avoid contaminating the piston-cylinder
gap.

•

Reference vacuum supply: Plan for the vacuum connection to the optional bell jar and AMH
automated mass handler and the location of the reference vacuum pump.
Page 15© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL•

Bell jar (optional) placement: Plan a location for the bell jar when it is removed from the platform toload and unload masses. A shelf is often used for this purpose.

•

AMH automated mass handler (optional):o Location: If an AMH is being used, consider that the AMH mass handler will occasionally beremoved from the PG9000 Platform. A convenient place to put it down when it is removed
should be planned.
o Drive air supply: The drive air supply provides power to operate the mass lifter and thebinary mass selector pins (see Section 3.7.1).
Drive air requirements:
Flow rate: Very low, avoid restrictions or excessive length of connecting
tubingCleanliness: If air from a compressor is used it should be filtered and dried,
preferably with a filter regulator with a coalescing filter. The recommendation is for a
5-micron filter upstream of a 0.01-micron coalescing filter. The main concern is theelimination of humidity, which could corrode the AMH pneumatic controls.
Drive air pressures required (± 10%) for different mass sets are listed in Table 3:
Table 9. Drive Air Pressure Requirement by Mass Set
MASS SETDRIVE AIR
[kPa (psi)]

MS-AMH-40

275 (40)

MS-AMH-60

380 (55)

MS-AMH-80

450 (65)

MS-AMH-100

550 (80)

 Caution
Do not operate AMH with drive pressure lower than 275 kPa (40 psi).
Damage to the AMH could result.
oVacuum supply: The vacuum supply is necessary for AMH operation when there is vacuumin the vacuum chamber (absolute by vacuum mode PG9000 operation). The vacuum supply
assures that the binary mass selection pins remain in the correct position and evacuatesinternal AMH volumes to minimize the likelihood of leaks into the reference vacuum.
The vacuum pump or vacuum supply for the pressure controller of the PG9000 system canbe used for the AMH vacuum supply
Vacuum drive requirements:
Flow rate: Very low, avoid restrictions or excessive length of connecting tubing
Vacuum pressure: At least 50 kPa (7.5 psi) under atmosphere Caution
Do not operate AMH when using a PG9000 in “absolute by vacuum” mode
without having a vacuum supply connected to AMH Vent. Always checkthat AMH is supplied with vacuum BEFORE establishing reference
vacuum in the AMH bell jar. Failure to do so may result in damage to thebinary mass pins and/or binary masses.

 Caution
Do not plug the AMH vent connection. Use only a “SESO” type quickconnector stem. Plugging the AMH vent connection will cause serious
damage to AMH internal components.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 16

2. INSTALLATION

2.3

Setup
2.3.1

Preparing for Operation
Note
Before setting up the PG9000 system, see Section 2.2 for information onsite requirements.

To prepare PG9000 for check out and operation:
 Set up the PG9000 Platform (see Section 2.3.1.1).
 Make the system pressure interconnections (see Section 2.3.1.2).
 If a manual mass set is being used, set up the manual mass set (see Section 2.3.1.3).
 If an optional AMH is being used, set it up with its mass set (see Sections 2.3.1.4 and2.3.1.4.3).
 If the PG9000 is to be used with vacuum reference, set up the optional vacuum reference
hardware (see Section 2.3.1.6).

2.3.1.1

Setting Up the Platform

The PG9000 Platform consists of the PG9000 base, the PG9000 Remote
Electronics Module and the PG terminal. To set up the PG9000 Platform
proceed as follows: Place the PG9000 Base on the site table in the desired orientation.
Though the rear panel is usually in the back, any orientation can be used.
 Place the PG9000 Terminal and PG9000 Remote Electronics Module in thedesired locations.
 Connect the PG9000 Terminal to the PG9000 Remote Electronics Moduleusing the 25-pin cable supplied.
 Connect the PG9000 Temperature - Humidity Probe to the PG9000 Remote
Electronics Module either directly to the back panel or via the supplied TH
Probe extension cable.
 Connect the PG DRIVER connectors on the PG9000 Remote Electronics
Module and PG9000 Base using the 15-pin cable supplied with the PG
Platform Connect electrical power (100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz) to the PG9000
Terminal using the power cable supplied. Any grounded power cable with astandard IEC320-313 connection may be used.
 If an automated pressure generation/control component is being used,establish
communications
betweentheautomatedpressure
generation/control component and the PG9000 Platform by connecting thegeneration/control component RS232 port to the PG9000 Platform COM3
port and setting up PG9000 to use an automated pressure generation/control
component (see Section 3.11.9)

2.3.1.2

System Pressure Interconnections

Interconnect the PG9000 Platform, pressure generation/control components anda test connection.
The pressure connection on the PG9000 TEST port is DH200 (DH200 is
equivalent to AE SF250C,HIP LF4, etc.). Adapters to convert the DH200
connection to 1/8 in. NPT female and 1/8 in. swage are provided with PG9000
Platform accessories.
The pressure connection on the PG9000 CCP controlled clearance pressure port
is DH200. The pressure connection labeled CCP is for the application of acontrolled clearance pressure to the inside of the piston (see Section 3.8). In
Page 17© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

normal operation, the measured pressure is applied to the CCP pressureconnection. Use a tee to connect the TEST port and the CCP port together.
The pressure connections for an optional AMH Automatic Mass Handler aredescribed in Section 2.3.1.4.

2.3.1.3

Setting Up A Manual Mass Set
Note

If installing an MS-AMH-xxx mass set for use with an AMH
automated mass handling system, see Section 2.3.1.4.
To install a PG9000 manual mass set, place the mass loading tray (provided withthe mass set accessories) at the desired location then install the individual
masses on the mass loading tray. See Section 2.3.1.4 for instructions on
installation of an AMH mass set for automated mass handling.

 Caution
It is VERY IMPORTANT that the individual masses be installedon the mass loading tray in proper sequence. This will ensurethat PG9000 mass loading instructions are executed properly(carefully follow the instructions provided in Section 2.3.1.3,
Installing Masses on the Mass Loading Tray).
Installing Masses on the Mass Loading Tray (Manual Mass Set)
PG9000 masses are shipped in reusable, molded shipping and storage cases.
One of the cases contains the masses of 5 kg and under, the other case(s)contain(s) the 9 kg make up mass, if present, and main masses of 5 or 10 kg each.
Each mass is packed in a sealed plastic bag and then placed in a protective
shipping insert.

 Caution
The stability over time of PG9000 pressure measurements is afunction of the stability of the masses loaded on the piston.
Precautions should be taken in handling the masses to minimize
influences that may change their mass. This includes always
wearing protective gloves when handling the masses to avoid
contaminating them with body oils and perspiration. Protective
gloves are provided in the accessory kits of PG9000 Platforms.
Masses are loaded onto the mass loading tray in the opposite order that they areloaded onto the PG9000. To install the masses on the mass loading tray,
proceed as follows: Open the shipping cases.
 Install the main masses: The main masses (a series of 10 kg masses)
are installed horizontally aligned on the mass loading spindle.
 The main masses are sequentially numbered starting with the number 1.
The main mass with the highest sequential number is installed first at thebottom of the stack (i.e., the first mass loaded on the tray). The rest of themain masses should be stacked upwards in descending order ending withmain mass sequential number 1. Be careful NOT to confuse the makeup
mass (refer to next item) with main mass 1.
 Install the mass: The make up mass is a single mass sequentiallynumbered 1. It has the same diameter as the main masses. It is a 4 or 9 kg
mass. The make up mass is placed on top of the main mass stack. It isalways the top of the stack.
 Install the fractionary masses: The fractionary masses are all the massesof lower value than the main masses and makeup mass. These are masses© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 18

2. INSTALLATION

of 5 kg and under. Fractionary masses of 1 to 5 kg are discs with a central
hole. Fractionary masses of 100 to 500 g are solid, small diameter pucks.
Fractionary masses of 50 g and under are packed and stored in their own
separate storage case.
Fractionary mass discs and pucks are installed vertically in the corresponding slots
in the mass loading tray. Use a consistent setup for the sequence number
when there are two masses (e.g., always load sequential number 1 in the front).

2.3.1.4

Setting Up An AMH Automated Mass Handler(Optional)

The setup of the AMH can be broken down into 3 steps:•

Connecting the drive air supply (see Section 2.3.1.4.1)•

Connecting the drive vacuum supply (see Section 2.3.1.4.2)•

Connecting AMH communications (see Section 2.3.1.4.3)

2.3.1.4.1

Connecting AMH Drive

The AMH accessories kit includes hardware to facilitate the connection of thedrive air supply (see Table 8). Locate the drive air connection accessories
including:• Quick-connector stem (DESO type with red band).
• 2 m 1/8 in. O.D. clear PFA tubing.
• 1/8 in. Swage x 1/4 in. NPT M adaptor.
To use the supplied accessories to make the AMH drive air supply connection
proceed as follows: Connect the quick-connector to one end of the PFA tube. Loosen the 1/8 in.
Swage nut on the assembly slightly. Slip the PFA tube into the nut until it
stops. Tighten the nut to swage the tube.
 Connect the other end of the PFA tube to an appropriate drive air supply (seeSection 2.2.2.1). If desired, use the 1/8 in. Swage x 1/4 in. NPT M adaptor.
 Insert the quick-connector stem into the AMH DRIVE connection quickconnector (color coded with red band). Press firmly until the stem clicks into
place.
 Apply drive air pressure to the connection and check for leaks.

Note
The quick-connector stem seals when disconnected so thedrive air supply may be applied before the quick-connector
stem is inserted into the quick-connector.

 Caution
Do not operate AMH with drive pressure lower than 275 kPa (40psi). Damage to the AMH could result.

2.3.1.4.2

Connecting AMH Vent

If operating the PG9000 in vacuum reference mode with AMH-100-VAC it isnecessary to connect the AMH VENT to vacuum supply. The AMH accessories
kit includes hardware to facilitate the connection of the drive vacuum supply (seeTable 8) Locate the drive vacuum connection accessories including:• Quick-connector stem (with blue band) and three way sleeve valve assembly.
• 2 m 1/4 in. O.D. PFA tubing.
• 2 m 3/8 in. O.D. PFA tubing.
• 3/8 in. Swage x 1/4 in. 1/4 in. Swage reducer.
Page 19© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL• 3/8 in. Swage tee.
• 3/8 in. Swage Port connector.
To use the supplied accessories to make the AMH drive vacuum supply
connection proceed as follows: Connect the blue banded quick-connector/sleeve valve assembly to one endof the PFA tube. Loosen the 1/4 in. Swage nut on the assembly slightly. Slipthe PFA tube into the nut until it stops. Tighten the nut to swage the tube.
 Connect the other end of the 1/4 in PFA tube to an appropriate vacuum
supply (see Section 2.2 Automated Mass Handler, Vacuum Supply). If
desired, use the 3/8 in. x 1/4 in. reducer, 3/8 in. Swage Tee and Port
Connector. The Tee and Port Connector are particularly useful if the vacuum
supply is from a DH Intruments PPC/MPC Vacuum Kit. Install the Tee on the
3/8 in. PFA tube between the vacuum pump and the PPC or MPC.
 Insert the quick-connector stem into the drive vacuum connection quickconnector (color coded with blue band). Press firmly until the stem clicks
into place. Use only a “SESO” type stem (not self sealing).
 Check that the three-way sleeve valve is in the GAUGE position (drive
vacuum not applied to the AMH). Apply drive vacuum and check for leaks.

 Caution
Do not plug the AMH VENT connection. Use only a “SESO” type
quick-connector stem. Plugging the AMH VENT connection cancause serious damage to AMH internal components.

 Caution
A drive vacuum supply must be connected to AMH VENT
when using a PG9000 in “absolute by vacuum” mode. Always
check that AMH is supplied with drive vacuum before
establishing reference vacuum in the AMH vacuum chamber.
Failure to do so may result in damage to the binary mass pins
and/or binary masses.

2.3.1.4.3

Connecting AMH Communications

Connect the AMH communication cable (6 ft. cable with circular connectors at
each end) from the PG9000 Remote Electronics Module to the PG9000 Base.
The cable carries both power and signal to the AMH-100-VAC once it is loaded
onto the PG9000 Base. See Section 3.7.2.1 for instructions to load the AMH
onto the PG Base.

 Caution
Perform an AMH startup before loading AMH masses (seeSection 2.4.10). Startup ensures that AMH binary mass pins are
retracted and main mass columns are rotated correctly forloading. Installing the AMH over the masses before performing
an AMH startup risks damaging internal AMH components.

2.3.1.5

Setting Up an AMH Mass Set
 Caution

Perform an AMH startup before loading AMH masses (seeSection 2.4.10). Placing the AMH masses and the AMH on the
PG9000 before performing an AMH startup risks damaging
internal AMH components.
PG9000 AMH masses are shipped in reusable, molded shipping and storage cases.
One of the cases contains the binary masses, binary mass carrier, mass bell andlifting shaft/trim mass tray. The other cases contain the main masses of 10 kg,© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 20

2. INSTALLATION

Inspecting Contents, Mass Set for mass set composition detail). Each mass ispacked in a sealed plastic bag and then placed in a protective shipping insert.

 Caution
The stability over time of PG9000 pressure measurements is afunction of the stability of the masses loaded on the piston.
Precautions should be taken in handling the masses to minimize
influences that may change their mass. This includes always
wearing protective gloves when handling the masses to avoid
contaminating them with body oils and perspiration. Protective
gloves are provided in the accessory kits of PG9000 Platforms.

SHOWN IS THE MS-AMH-100 MASS SET FOR THE AMH-100-VAC MASS HANDLER. SMALLERMASS SETS MAY BE USED WITH AMH-100-VAC AND INCLUDE FEWER MAIN MASS DISCS.

Figure 5. AMH Mass Set

To install the AMH mass set, follow the order of operation below carefully (refer
to Figure 5):
 Prepare the masses: Open the shipping cases and remove all the masses
and mass set elements from their plastic bags.
 Install a piston-cylinder module in the PG9000 Platform: See Section
2.1.1.3.
 Install the binary mass carrier: Place the pyramidal shaped carrier on topof the piston cap.
 Install the mass loading bell: Slip the mass loading bell over the binary
mass carrier and slide it down until the inside top of the bell sits on the binary
mass carrier.
 Install the main mass discs: Load the 10 kg main mass discs onto themass bell starting with mass #1 and loading in sequential order. Mass
#1 should be at the bottom of the stack and the highest number mass at the
top. The mass sequence numbers are laser marked on the top surface ofeach mass. Pass the mass disc over and down the mass loading bell andcenter it on the ledge at the bottom of the bell. Load the rest of the main
masses, sequentially, onto the bottom mass.
 Install the binary mass tubes: Load the binary mass tubes concentricallyfrom the largest to smallest, outside to inside. The largest, long tubes slip
down between the main mass stack and the bell and rest on the ledge at the

Page 21© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

bottom of the mass bell. The smaller masses load onto the pyramidal stepsof the binary mass carrier.
 The mass loading process is complete: The mass set is in the all loaded
position. The mass lifting shaft/trim mass tray assembly is not yet installed.
It will be attached after the AMH automated mass handler is installed overthe masses on the platform (see Section 3.7.2.1).
 Create the mass set and mass loading bell in the PG Terminal: See
Sections 3.13.1.6 and 3.13.1.11.

2.3.1.6

Setting Up Vacuum Reference Hardware (Optional)

PG9000 may be operated in atmosphere reference or vacuum reference modes.
For vacuum reference, the optional bell jar and vacuum reference accessories
may be used (see Section 2.1.2.4).
To install the Vacuum reference accessories proceed as follows: Setup the base: Install and setup the base, piston-cylinder and mass set
per Sections 2.3.1.1 through 2.3.1.4.3. Ensure proper operation withatmospheric reference.
 Connect AMH Drive Vacuum: If not already performed, connect the AMH
drive vacuum connection (see Section 2.3.1.4.2).
 Install the PG9000 bell jar: Ensure that the elastomeric seal is in place on
the lower lip of the bell jar. Place the bell jar over the masses and the AMH if
present. The bell jar locates on the lip of the vacuum plate. Orient the balljar such that the three KF40 connections are located conveniently forreference vacuum source, manual vent and reference vacuum measurement
devices.
 Install the vacuum vent kit: The vacuum vent kit includes a manuallyoperated valve, a reducer, clamps and centering rings. Note that a KF40
centering ring with an integral mesh screen is provided to help prevent
contaminants from entering the bell jar through the vent valve.
 Connect the reference vacuum source: Attach the vacuum source to oneof the KF40 ports on the bell jar. Take measures to assure that vacuum oil
cannot return to the PG9000. Consider the need to shut-off the vacuum
supply when vacuum is not desired in the vacuum chamber and the need toremove the Bell Jar from the PG9000 Platform to access the piston-cylinder
module, the mass set or the AMH if present.
 Install the reference vacuum sensor: Connect the vacuum gauge andattached isolation valve to one of the KF40 ports on the bell jar using theattached reducer, elbow and centering rings.

 Caution
If using the standard PG9000 reference vacuum sensor or any
other capacitance diaphragm gauge, it is important to install ina vertical orientation. Due to gravitational influences installationin any other orientation may result in out of tolerance
measurements.
 Establish communications to the vacuum sensor: Connect the vacuum
sensor or the vacuum sensor display to the PG9000 base Com2 port with an
RS232 communications cable. See Section 3.13.5.5 for information on using
an external vacuum gauge.
 Level the platform if required: Use the PG9000 Base’s two leveling feetand the level mounted on the front of the base.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 22

2. INSTALLATION

2.3.2

Installing and Removing a PG9607 Piston-Cylinder
Assembly Caution
Given the large diameter and small annular gap of the PG9607 pistoncylinder, it is very difficult to insert the piston into the cylinder without theaid of the alignment mechanism provided by the PG9607 platform
mounting post and piston retaining assembly. There is a risk of cocking
the piston in the cylinder. It is not recommended that the piston ever be
put into the cylinder when the piston is not installed on the PG9607
mounting post.

Note•

For instructions on cleaning the PG9607 piston-cylinder see Section
5.3.3.

•For instructions on disassembling the PG9607 piston retaining
assembly see Section 5.3.1.

To operate the PG9607 platform, a piston-cylinder must be installed on its mounting post.
To install a piston-cylinder assembly on the PG9607 platform, follow the sequential
procedure below. This procedure may be used on the first and subsequent piston-cylinder
installations; it may also be used in reverse order to remove a piston-cylinder.
Numerical references in the procedure refer to Figure 6.
 Remove the piston retaining assembly (5). The PG9607 platform is delivered with thepiston retaining assembly (5) installed in the mounting post (7). Holding the piston
retaining assembly by the knurled surface (14), unscrew it (rotate CCW) fully from themounting post and remove it. Avoid touching the WHITE cylinder centering ring (15) as it
will eventually contact the critical inside surface of the cylinder.
 Check that the lower piston sealing O-ring (10a) is installed. The PG9607 platform isdelivered with the lower and upper piston sealing O-rings (10a, 10b) and O-ring carriers
installed loosely in the recess on the mounting post. Remove the upper O-ring andO-ring carrier (10b) and retain. Check that the lower O-ring and O-ring carrier (10a) arepresent and properly seated. (If needed two spare o-rings are included in the PG9607
platform accessory kit).
 Remove the piston (6) from its packing. Using lint free gloves or wipes to avoid directcontact with the piston critical surface (polished appearance) remove the piston (6) fromits packing.

 Caution
Never handle the piston or cylinder with bare hands. Oil and acids frombare skin can damage the critical surfaces (polished appearance). The
cylinder is part of the mass load and contamination can change its mass.
 Install the piston (6) on the mounting post (7). With the end of the piston etched with “X”
and/or the serial number UP (11) so that it will enter the cylinder first, slip the piston over themounting post and slide it down until it seats on O-ring (10a.) Check that the end of the piston
facing UP has “X” and/or the serial number marked on it.
 Install the piston retaining assembly (5). Place the upper O-ring and carrier (10a)centered on the top surface of the piston. Hold the piston retaining assembly (5) by theknurled ring (14); avoid touching the white cylinder centering ring (15) as it will eventuallycontact the critical inside surface of the cylinder. Thread the piston retaining assembly into
the top of the mounting post (7) and screw it down carefully assuring that upper O-ring carrier(10a) is not pinched. The assembly’s shoulder (13) should meet the top of the piston (11) withno gap between the two surfaces. There will be some resistance from the mounting post O-

Page 23© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

ring (12), only hand tightening is needed. Do not use tools to install the piston retaining
assembly. Tighten lightly by hand until the assembly reaches the end of the engagement
threads and surfaces (13) and (11) meet.
 Clean the piston (6) and the cylinder centering ring (15), consider cleaning thecylinder (4). Using the quick method described in Section 5.3.3, clean the piston (6) andthe cylinder centering ring (15). If this is the first piston-cylinder installation, also clean
the cylinder (4). On subsequent installations consider cleaning the cylinder before
installing it.
 Verify that the cylinder cap O-ring (3) is properly installed. Remove the cylinder (4) fromits packing. It is delivered with the cylinder cap O-ring (3) installed. Check that the O-ring ispresent and properly seated. If not, install one (an extra one is included in the piston-cylinderaccessories). Use tweezers or another long narrow tool. DO NOT touch the inside of thecylinder.
 Verify that the cylinder adjustment mass (17) is properly installed. Check that thecylinder adjusting mass (17) is present and completely threaded onto the cylinder
retaining screw (2). This mass is used to adjust the total cylinder mass to the value
reported in the calibration report.
 Install the cylinder (4) on the piston (6). Gently slip the cylinder (4) over the piston (6).
The cylinder centering ring (15) aligns the cylinder on the piston facilitating theinsertion process. Allow the cylinder to slip all the way down the piston until it reaches
end of stroke.
 Tighten the cylinder retaining screw (2). Using a 5 mm Allen tool (one is supplied in
the PG9607 accessories), tighten the cylinder retaining screw (2) into the cylinder stroke
limiter (16) of the piston retaining assembly (5). Turn the screw CW to tighten. Since thecylinder stroke limiter (16) is free to move within the piston retaining assembly (5), theretaining screw (2) may rotate with the assembly, failing to tighten. If this is the case,press down a bit or lift up on the screw to help it engage and tighten. Tighten gently until
you can feel the cylinder cap O-ring (3) takes its seat in the cylinder stroke limiter.

 Caution
Be sure the cylinder retaining screw (2) is tightened before applying
pressure to the piston-cylinder. The cylinder stroke limiter (16) limits thecylinder’s upward movement preventing it from coming off the piston.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 24

2. INSTALLATION Cylinder Cap
 Cylinder Retaining Screw Cylinder Cap O-ring (Brown, Viton, 2-015)
 Cylinder Piston Retainer Assembly/Nut Piston Mounting Post (part of PG9607 platform) Controlled Clearance Pressure (CCP) Inlet
 Test Pressure Inlet
 Piston Sealing O-ring – lower(Brown Viton, 2-029)
 Piston Top Surface
 Mounting Post O-ring (Brown, Viton, 2-019)
 Piston Sealing O-ring – upper(Brown Viton, 2-029)
 Piston Retainer Assembly Shoulder Knurled Gripping Holding Surface
 Cylinder Centering Ring
 Cylinder Stroke Limiter Adjustment Mass

Figure 6. PG9607 Piston-Cylinder Installation
 Caution
The PG9607 is intended to use the PC-9607-5 piston cylinder assembly. It is also
possible to use the PC-7607-5 piston cylinder assembly (formerly sold with model
PG7607 piston gauge) with no modifications in the mounting method orcomponents.

Page 25© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2.4

Power Up And Verification
2.4.1

Power Up
 Caution
Ensure that all PG9000 electrical connections are made before poweringon the PG9000 (see Section 2.3.1.1). Disconnecting and/or reconnecting
any PG9000 cable while power is ON may result in damage to PG9000
internal components.

Turn the PG9000 power ON by pressing the power ON/OFF switch on the rear panel of the PG
Terminal. Observe the PG terminal display as the terminal connects with the PG9000 Remote
Electronics Module, tests, initializes and goes to the main run screen (see Section 3.9).
If <….Searching…..> displays for more than 5 seconds, the communications between the
PG9000 Remote Electronics Module and the PG Terminal are failing. Check that the
PG9000 to PG Terminal cable is properly installed.
If PG900 fails to reach the main run screen, service may be required. Record the sequenceof operations and displays observed and contact a Fluke Calibration Authorized Service
Provider (see Table 28).

2.4.2

Check That On-board Piston-Cylinder Module And
Mass Set Information Are Correct

PG9000 uses stored piston-cylinder and mass set metrological information to calculate thereference pressures it defines (see Section 3.1). For the pressure values to be correct, thestored metrological information on the piston-cylinder, mass set and mass loading bell must
be correct. Before using PG9607 for accurate pressure definition, the validity of the stored
information should be verified. This consists of comparing the piston-cylinder, mass set andmass loading bell information stored in PG9000 to the information in the current piston-cylinderand mass set calibration reports.
To verify the PG9000 piston-cylinder, mass set and mass loading bell information, use thepiston-cylinder and mass set viewing capabilities accessed by pressing [SPECIAL],<1PC/MS> (see Section 3.13.1). Compare all the information contained in the PG9000
piston-cylinder, mass set and mass loading bell files to the information on the current
piston-cylinder, mass set and mass loading bell calibration reports.

2.4.3

Set Local Gravity Value

PG9607 uses the value of local acceleration due to gravity (gl) in its calculation of thereference pressure it defines (see Section 3.1). The correct value of local acceleration due togravity at the site of PG9000 use must be entered. This is accomplished by pressing[SPECIAL], <6gl> (see Section 3.13.6) and editing the value of local gravity.

2.4.4

Setup Pressure Equation Variable Input Sources

PG9000 uses many variables in calculating defined pressures. The sources of the variables
are determined by the current SETUP file. SETUP files are viewed, created, edited andselected using the SETUP function accessed by pressing [SETUP] (see Section 3.12).
A factory SETUP file is available and already selected on a new PG9000, but the operator
may desire to customize it. The factory setup file assumes that PG9000’s internalmeasurement values will be used whenever possible.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 26

2. INSTALLATION

2.4.5

Check Proper Operation Of Ambient Condition
Measurements

PG9000 automatically measures ambient conditions and uses these conditions in its
pressure calculations.
To verify that the ambient condition measurements are operating properly proceed as follows:•

Display current ambient condition readings: Press [AMBIENT]. The ambientconditions run screen is displayed (see Section 3.11.6).

•

Verify proper ambient condition readings: Compare the ambient condition values
displayed to the actual values of ambient conditions. Refer to the ambient condition
measurement specifications when evaluating the ambient readings (see Section
1.2.1.3).

Note•

The unit of measure in which ambient pressure is displayed is thesame as the unit selected by pressing [UNIT] (see Section 3.11.3).
Units of measure in which other ambient condition values are
expressed cannot be changed.

•

PG9000 allows the source of ambient condition values used inreference pressure calculations to be specified. The source may be
PG9000’s on-board measurements, a normal value or operator enteredvalues. See Section 3.12 for information on specifying the source of
ambient condition values used by PG9000 in reference pressure
calculations.

2.4.6

Apply Pressure To The Piston-Cylinder Module
Note•

This section assumes that the PG9000 system has already been set
up, including pressure interconnection (see Section 2.3).

•

PG9607 is a unique configuration of PG9000 that utilizes a floating
cylinder with a stationary piston. This is in contrast with other PG9000
models that use a floating piston and a stationary cylinder. For
consistency ‘Piston’ refers to the floating component on which mass
is loaded in this and other noted sections.

 Caution
Before applying pressure to the PG9000 system, be sure that all pressure
vessels and connections are rated for the pressure levels that will beapplied and that all connections have been properly tightened.
Continuing with the PG9000 set up and check out requires applying pressure to the pistoncylinder module and floating the piston.
Proceed as follows: Turn OFF automated piston rotation and automated pressure generation (ifpresent). This will prevent the automated rotation and pressure generation features (ifpresent) from interfering during verification of these features (see Sections 3.11.8 and3.11.9 for information on automated piston rotation and pressure generation).
 Load mass on the piston. Install the mass loading bell on the piston. Then load themake up mass (4 or 9 kg) (see Section 2.3.1.3).
If the PG9000 platform is equippedwith AMH automated mass handling, press [ENTER] and enter a low value of pressure or
mass to cause mass to be loaded onto the piston.
 Float the piston. Use the pressure generation/control component of the PG9000 system
to apply pressure under the piston through the PG9000 Platform TEST port. The piston
will float at a pressure approximately equal to the piston mass to pressure conversion

Page 27© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

factor multiplied by the mass load in kg. The piston-cylinder conversion factor is marked
on the top of the piston cap and is in either kPa or MPa per kilogram [kPa/kg or MPa/kg].

Note
If the piston cannot be floated because it immediately sinks down from afloat position, there is a leak in the pressure system. Identify and eliminate
leaks until the piston, once floated, falls at a rate less than the nominal fallrate given in the specifications of the piston-cylinder module being used(see Section 1.2.2).

2.4.7

Check Proper Behavior Of Motorized Piston Rotation
Note
PG9607 is a unique configuration of PG9000 that utilizes a floating cylinder
with a stationary piston. This is in contrast with other PG9000 models thatuse a floating piston and a stationary cylinder. For consistency ‘Piston’refers to the floating component on which mass is loaded in this and othernoted sections.

The motorized rotation feature can be set to engage and disengage automatically as needed tomaintain the floating piston rotating within a set rotation rate range when floating, and to stop rotation
before mass manipulation to set a different pressure occurs (see Section 3.11.8). Motorized piston
rotation can also be activated manually by pressing [ ]. Stopping piston rotation can be activatedby pressing and holding [ ] and then pressing [←] (see Section 3.11.13).
Turn automated rotation OFF by pressing [ROTATE] and selecting <1off>. Load at least themass bell on the piston, float the piston and press [ ]. When the piston is floating, themotorized rotation system should engage and cause the mass bell and piston to begin rotating.
Within 5 to 30 seconds, depending on the mass load, the rotation rate should reach about 50 rpm.
Current rotation rate can be observed by pressing [SYSTEM] (see Section 3.11.5).

2.4.8

Check Proper Operation Of Piston Behavior
Measurements
Note
PG9607 is a unique configuration of PG9000 that utilizes a floating cylinder
with a stationary piston. This is in contrast with other PG9000 models thatuse a floating piston and a stationary cylinder. For consistency ‘Piston’refers to the floating component on which mass is loaded in this and othernoted sections.

Float the piston and rotate it (see Sections 2.4.6 and 2.4.7).
Press [SYSTEM] once to reach the first SYSTEM run screen. Verify that the piston position,
piston fall/rise rate, piston rotation rate and piston rotation decay rate are indicating correctly(see Section 3.11.5). The piston position reading system may be calibrated using an onboard procedure if necessary (see Section 5.2.2). Calibration of piston position isrecommended when installing a new PG9000 and regularly after installation.
Press [SYSTEM] again to reach the second SYSTEM run screen. Verify that the piston-cylinder
temperature and temperature rate of change are indicating correctly (see Section 3.11.5).

2.4.9

Verify Vacuum Reference

PG9000 includes provisions for establishing and measuring a vacuum reference.
To verify the vacuum reference capability: Install a piston-cylinder module (see Section 2.3.2).
 Install the bell jar on the PG9000 Base (the bell jar aligns on the PG9000 vacuum plateand seals itself).

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 28

2. INSTALLATION

 Add a reference vacuum sensor to one of the KF40 ports on the bell jar (see Section
2.3.1.6).
 Apply a vacuum through another KF40 port on the bell jar, sealing other bell jar openings
with caps.
 Press [SYSTEM] twice to observe the value of vacuum read by the PG9000 vacuum
gauge.
If a vacuum pump of adequate capacity has been correctly connected to the reference
vacuum port, the vacuum read by the PG9000 vacuum gauge should go to 4 Pascal [Pa] orlower in less than five minutes on the first pump down and two to three minutes on
immediately subsequent pump downs.
If this performance is NOT achieved:•

The vacuum pump may be inadequate.

•

The connection of the vacuum pump to the PG9000 bell jar may have leaks orexcessive restrictions.

•

The PG9000 vacuum gauge may be incorrect.

•

There may be a leak in the PG9000.

2.4.10AMH Start Up/Verification
 Caution

Perform an AMH startup before loading AMH masses (see Section 2.4.10).
Startup ensures that AMH binary mass pins are retracted and main mass
columns are rotated correctly for loading. Installing the AMH over themasses before performing an AMH startup risks damaging internal AMH
components.
Perform the initial verification of the AMH mass loading system with no masses loaded on
the piston-cylinder, with the AMH loaded on the platform and with the AMH connected to theplatform pressure and electrical connection. Be sure to match the pressure (red) and thevacuum/vent (blue) connections. Do not install masses and the AMH together on theplatform until steps  through  below have been completed.

 Caution
A drive vacuum supply must be connected to AMH VENT when using a
PG9000 in “absolute by vacuum” mode. Always check that AMH is
supplied with drive vacuum before establishing reference vacuum in the
AMH vacuum chamber. Failure to do so may result in damage to thebinary mass pins and/or binary masses.
To verify the AMH mass handler prior to installing it on the PG9000 Platform, proceed asfollows:
 Make the necessary pressure, power and communications connections: Complete
the set up procedure described in Section 2.3.1.

 Caution
Do not operate AMH with drive pressure lower than 275 kPa (40 psi).
Damage to the AMH could result.
 Insert the mass lifting shaft into the AMH: Insert the shaft into the hole in the center ofthe AMH mass lifter and slide it down until the trim mass tray sits on the top of the lifter.
This arrangement trips the AMH’s internal proximity sensor allowing the AMH system tobe operated off of the PG9607 Platform without an actual mass load.
 Select an AMH mass set and mass bell as the active mass set and bell for the PG9000:
This step can be skipped if the AMH mass set and bell have already been selected, if so
go directly to step . On the PG Terminal, press [SPECIAL], <1PC/MS>, <3mass bell>,<5select> and select the mass bell of the AMH mass set. Using [SPECIAL], <1PC/MS>,<2mass set>, <5select>, select an AMH mass set (mass set designated by S/N nnnnA).
Selecting the AMH mass set causes the PG9000 Platform to attempt to establish
Page 29© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

communication with the AMH system.
occurs (see Sections 3.7.2.8, 6).

If the communication fails, an error message

If communication succeeds, the PG9000 initializes the AMH mass handler. The trim
mass tray should rise approximately 2.5 cm (1 in.) above the top of the lifter; followed by
the sound of the main mass selection columns rotating. Then the trim mass tray should
be lowered back down. The steps of this procedure are commented on the PG Terminal
display as they execute. If the sequence does not complete and/or any error messages
are observed, see Section 6 and Table 10 for troubleshooting assistance. If thesequence completes, the AMH system has been cleared and put into a known state inwhich all mass holding ledges and pins are retracted so that it can safely be slipped downover the AMH mass set and installed on the PG9000 Platform.
The PG9000 Platform must be able to initialize the AMH system before start up canproceed.
 Clear the AMH and test its operation: Press [SPECIAL], <8AMH>, <2control>,<3loadall>. The trim mass tray should rise approximately 2.5 cm (1 in.) above the top of
the lifter, followed by the sound of the main mass selection columns rotating. Then thetrim mass tray should be lowered back down. The steps of this procedure arecommented on the PG Terminal display as they occur. If the sequence does notcomplete and/or any error messages are observed, see Section 6 and Table 10 fortroubleshooting assistance. If the sequence completes, the AMH mass handler has beencleared and put into a known state in which all mass holding ledges and pins are
retracted so that it can safely be slipped down over the mass set and installed on the
PG9000 Platform.
 Remove the AMH from the platform: Once the AMH has been cleared it can beremoved and the AMH mass set can be loaded for operation.
If desired, visually inspect the condition of the AMH mass handler by carefully tipping the
AMH to look inside. The main mass selection columns should have their all flat surfaces(no ledges) oriented towards the center and all binary mass selection pins should be
retracted (see Section 3.7.1).
When this step is complete, the AMH masses and mass handler are ready to be installedon the PG9000 Platform (see Sections 2.3.1.4.3 and 3.7.2.1).

2.4.11

Check Automated Pressure Generation (If Present) Caution

Before applying pressure to the PG9000 system, be sure that all pressure
vessels and connections are rated for the pressure levels that will beapplied and that all connections have been properly tightened.
To check automated pressure generation/control: Verify that the automated pressure generation/control component is properly connectedto the system (see Section 2.3.1.2).
 When operation has returned to the main run screen, turn ON automated pressure generation
control, if available, by pressing [GEN] and selecting <1on> (see Section 3.11.9).
 Press [P OR M], <1pressure> to select pressure entry mode (see Section 3.11.12).
Press [ENTER] and enter a pressure value to be generated and follow the mass loading
instruction (see Section 3.6).
 Verify the pressure generation/control component properly generates pressure and floats
the PG9000 piston.

2.4.12Check/Set Security Level

PG9000 has a security system based on User Levels. By default, the security system is set
to low and NO password is required to change the security level. See Section 3.13.4.5 for
information on the security system. As part of the PG9000 startup, set your desired security
level and a password.
© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 30

2. INSTALLATION Caution
PG9000 is delivered with the security level set to low to avoid inadvertent
altering of critical internal settings but with access to changing security
levels unrestricted. It is recommended that the low security level bemaintained at all times and password protection be implemented if control
over setting of security levels is desired.

2.4.13

Additional Precautions to Take Before Making
Pressure Measurements

Before using PG9000 to make accurate pressure measurements, consider the following:

2.5•

Select/activate the correct piston-cylinder module, mass set and mass loading bell(see Sections 3.11.2, 3.13.1.10, 3.13.1.15).

•

If using an automated pressure generation/control component with automatedpressure generation, set the pressure controller’s upper limit (UL) (see Section
3.11.9.3).

•

Enter the correct value of local gravity at the site of use (see Section 3.13.6).

•

Consider head corrections (see Sections 3.11.7 and 3.13.3).

•

Level the PG9000 Platform properly (see Section 2.3.1.1).

•

Select the correct pressure unit of measure and measurement mode (see Sections
3.11.3 and 3.11.4).

•

Verify that the settings for the sources of variables to be used by PG9607 in its
calculations of reference pressures are those desired (see Section 3.12).

•

Verify that the piston-cylinder module is correctly cleaned and operating properly(see Section 5.3).

•

Verify that there are NO leaks in the pressure system.

Short Term Storage

The following is recommended for short term storage of PG9000.


Remove all masses from the PG9000 Platform (manual mass set only).
Vent all circuits to atmosphere.
Turn OFF power using the power switch on the rear of the PG9000 Terminal.

Page 31© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Notes© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 32

3.

General Operation

3.1

Fundamental Operating Principles
Note
PG9607 is a unique configuration of PG9000 that utilizes a floating cylinder with astationary piston. This is in contrast with other PG9000 models that use a floating
piston and a stationary cylinder. For consistency ‘Piston’ refers to the floating
component on which mass is loaded in this and other noted sections.

PG9000s operate on the principle of the piston gauge in which pressure is defined by balancing it against aknown force on a known area (see Figure 7). The known area is defined by a vertically mounted piston rotating
in a cylinder and the known force is applied to the piston by loading it with known mass subjected toacceleration due to gravity. When the force applied by the pressure and the force applied by the massaccelerated by gravity are in equilibrium, the piston floats and the pressure under the piston remains constant.
The pressure can be calculated following the equation in Figure 7) (see also, Section 7.2). For pure gas pistoncylinders the pressurized fluid under the piston also lubricates the gap between the piston and the cylinder.

Figure 7. Piston Gauge Operating Principle

The PG9000 Platform is designed to mount a variety of piston-cylinder sizes, allow pressure to be applied
under the piston and allow masses to be loaded on top of the piston. The PG9607 Platform, in particular, isdesigned to mount a 50 mm diameter piston with a floating cylinder with masses loaded on top of the cylinder.
The measurement uncertainty in the pressure defined by the piston gauge depends on the uncertainty inthe effective area of the piston-cylinder and the force applied by the mass accelerated by gravity.
PG9000 stores the calibrated values of the piston-cylinders and masses it uses in on-board files (seeSection 3.13.1). To determine the effective area of the piston-cylinder and the force applied by themasses under actual operating conditions, a number of influences on these values must be quantified
and taken into consideration. For this reason, PG9000 includes extensive features to monitor the
behavior and conditions of the piston-cylinder as well as ambient conditions that affect pressure definition(see Sections 3.11.5 and 3.11.6). PG9000 uses the piston-cylinder, mass and ambient condition
information to calculate the pressure defined by a given mass load or the mass load needed to define agiven pressure (see Section 7.2). The source of each value used by PG9000 in its calculations can beselected by the user between PG9000’s internal measurements, normal values or user entered values.
These sources are defined in SETUP files (see Section 3.12).
Once PG9000 has been set up, it is used in day-to-day operation either to define pressures applied to a device
or system under test or to measure a stable pressure. To interface with the PG Terminal, the operator:
Page 33© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

 Selects the appropriate piston-cylinder to cover the pressure range (see Section 3.13.1.5).
 Selects the desired pressure unit of measure (see Section 3.11.3).
 Selects the desired pressure measurement mode (gauge, absolute, differential) (see Section 3.11.4).
 Sets the head difference between the PG9000 and the device under test (see Section 3.11.7).
 Selects mass to pressure or pressure to mass operating mode (see Section 3.11.12).
 Enters a pressure to define or a current mass load to calculate (see Section 3.11.11.1 and 3.11.11.2).
 Loads masses by hand or with optional AMH automated mass handler, floats piston and definespressure.

3.2

Keypad Layout And Protocol

PG9000 has a 4 x 4 keypad for local operator access to direct functions, function menus and for data entry.



The Function/Data keys allow very commonly usedfunctions to be accessed directly from the main run screen bya single keystroke. The name of the function is on the bottom
half of the key (see Section 3.11.1). These keys enter
numerical values when editing.



The Editing and Execution keys are for execution,suspending execution, backing up in menus and editing
entries.



The Menu/Data keys provide access to function menus fromthe main run screen. The menu name is on the bottom half ofthe key. The SETUP menu is for more frequently usedfunctions. The SPECIAL menu is for functions that are NOT
generally used as a part of day to day operation. These keys
enter numerical values when editing.

Figure 8. PG9000 Keypad Layout

Key press confirmation is provided by both tactile and audible feedback. A single beep confirms a valid entry.
A descending two note tone signals an invalid entry. The audible valid entry feedback can be suppressed or
modified by pressing [SPECIAL] and selecting <5prefs>, <2sound> (see Section 3.13.4.2).
Pressing the [ENTER/SET P] key generally causes execution or forward movement in the menu tree.
[ENTER/SET P] is also used to enter a command to set a pressure.
Pressing the [ESCAPE] key generally allows movement back in the menu tree and/or causes execution
to cease or suspend without changes being implemented. Pressing [ESCAPE] repeatedly eventually
returns to the main run screen. From the main run screen, pressing [ESCAPE] allows momentary
viewing of the PG9607 identification screen.
Pressing the [+/-] key changes a numerical sign when editing. It also toggles through multiple screens
when available.
Pressing the [←] and [→] keys when editing allows reverse and forward cursor movement when editing
data entry. These keys are also used to scroll through choices.
Menu selections can be made by pressing the number of the selection directly or by pressing [←] and[→] to place the cursor on the number of the desired selection and pressing [ENTER].

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 34

3. GENERAL OPERATION

Note
Some screens go beyond the two lines provided by the display. This is indicatedby a flashing arrow in the second line of the display. Press [←] and [→] to movethe cursor to access the lines that are NOT visible or directly enter the number ofthe hidden menu choice if you know it.

3.3

SoundsThe PG Terminal is equipped with a variable frequency tone device to provide audible feedback
and alarms. Some sounds can be modified and all sounds can be suppressed (see Section 3.13.4.2).
Sounds are used for the following indications:
Valid key press
Invalid key press
Piston left end of stroke highor low

3.4

Brief high frequency beep.
Three rapid, low frequency beeps.
Three rapid valid key press beeps. Piston was at low stop or high stop andjust entered spring zone (see Section 3.5).

Pressure Ready/Not Ready Indication

The three characters on the top line, far left, of the main run screen provide a pressure Ready/Not Ready
indication. This indication is intended to give the user a clear and objective indication of when PG9000
conditions are such that the value of pressure it is defining is valid and in tolerance. There are three
Ready/Not Ready indication characters to indicate the status of the three main Ready/Not Ready criteria.
The Ready/Not Ready indication characters are shown on the first line, top left hand side, of the main run screen.

Note
PG9607 is a unique configuration of PG9000 that utilizes a floating cylinder with astationary piston. This is in contrast with other PG9000 models that use a floating
piston and a stationary cylinder. For consistency ‘Piston’ refers to the floating
component on which mass is loaded in this and other noted sections.
1. Piston position and vertical movement.
2. Piston rotation.
3. Reference vacuum (PG9000 in absolute byvacuum measurement mode only).

* * * 100.4755 kPa g h+ 0.1 mm 10.00564 kg

For each Ready/Not Ready indication character, <*> indicates a Ready condition. Therefore, <***> or <** >indicates that all conditions necessary for an in tolerance pressure definition are present. Any indication
other than <*> indicates Not Ready.
See Sections 3.4.1, 3.4.2 and 3.4.3 for details on each of the three Ready/Not Ready indicating characters.

Note
The criteria used to distinguish between Ready and Not Ready conditions can becustomized by the user (see Sections 3.4.1, 3.4.2, 3.4.3).

Page 35© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3.4.1

Piston Position Ready/Not Ready
Note
PG9607 is a unique configuration of PG9000 that utilizes a floating cylinder
with a stationary piston. This is in contrast with other PG9000 models thatuse a floating piston and a stationary cylinder. For consistency ‘Piston’refers to the floating component on which mass is loaded in this and othernoted sections.

The piston position Ready/Not Ready character indicates Ready or Not Ready based on theposition of the piston in its vertical stroke (see Section 3.5) and an automated measure generation
status (see Section 3.11.9). This ensures that pressure definitions will be made with the piston
not more than a certain distance from mid-float position and that measurements will not be madewhile the action of an automated pressure controller may influence the pressure.
The piston position Ready/Not Ready character is the first character from the left on the top
line of the main run screen.
The piston position Ready/Not Ready criterion is determined by the current SETUP file andcan be customized by the user (see Section 3.12).
Piston position Ready/Not Ready character indications include:<*>
Piston position Ready (within the position limits specified in the current SETUP file)(see Section 3.5).
<↓>

Piston position Not Ready, low (below the position limits specified in the current
SETUP file, see Section 3.12). The <↓> flashes if the piston is not at the bottom stop
position to alert the user that this indicator is Not Ready.

<↑>Piston position Not Ready, high (above the position limits specified in the current
SETUP file) (see Section 3.12). The <↑> flashes if the piston is not at the top stop
position to alert the user that this indicator is Not Ready.
Piston position not known (current specified mass load is less than the load of the piston+ bell). The bell must be installed for PG9000 piston position measurement to operatecorrectly so piston position values shown are not valid when the bell is not installed.

<?>

Note
Piston position always indicates Not Ready if automated pressure
generation is adjusting pressure, regardless of actual piston position.

3.4.2

Piston Rotation Ready/Not Ready
Note
PG9607 is a unique configuration of PG9000 that utilizes a floating cylinder
with a stationary piston. This is in contrast with other PG9000 models thatuse a floating piston and a stationary cylinder. For consistency ‘Piston’refers to the floating component on which mass is loaded in this and othernoted sections.

The piston rotation Ready/Not Ready character indicates Ready or Not Ready based on therotation rate of the piston.
The piston rotation Ready/Not Ready character is the second character from the left on the
top line of the main run screen.
The piston rotation rate Ready/Not Ready criterion is specific to the currently active piston
cylinder module and can be edited by the user (see Sections 3.13.1.1).
Piston rotation rate Ready/Not Ready character indications include:<*>
Rotation rate Ready: Rotation rate is within the rotation rate limits specified in thecurrent piston-cylinder module file) (see Section 3.13.1.1).
<<>

Rotation rate Not Ready, low: Rotation rate is less than the lower rotation rate limit
specified in the current piston-cylinder module file (see Section 3.13.1.1)© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 36

3. GENERAL OPERATION<?>or motorized rotation system is currently engaged. Note that the low rotation limit isautomatically reduced when the mass loaded on the piston is less than 3 kg. The<<> flashes if the piston is floating to alert the user that this indicator is Not Ready.
Rotation rate not known: Current specified mass load is less than the load of the(piston + bell). The bell must be installed for PG9000 piston rotation rate measurement
to operate correctly so piston rotation rate cannot be measured when the bell is notinstalled.

Note
At mass loads less than 3 kg the low rotation limit is automatically reduced
to an operational minimum to maximize free rotation time.

3.4.3

Vacuum Reference Ready/Not Ready

The vacuum reference Ready/Not Ready is only active when operating in absolute byvacuum mode (see Section 3.11.4).
The vacuum reference Ready/Not Ready character indicates Ready or Not Ready based on
the value of reference vacuum when making measurements in absolute by vacuum mode.
This ensures that definitions of absolute pressure with a vacuum reference will be made withthe vacuum under the PG9000 bell jar lower than a specified value. When the vacuum is not
low enough, vacuum measurement errors may be excessive.
The vacuum reference Ready/Not Ready character is the third character from the left on the
top line of the main run screen.
The vacuum reference Ready/Not Ready criterion is determined by the current SETUP fileand can be customized by the user (see Section 3.12). The vacuum reference criterion isa fixed value that can be customized by the user when the vacuum reference selection in the
SETUP file is COM2. If the selection in the SETUP file is user or normal, the vacuum reference
Ready/Not Ready character always indicates Ready and the value cannot be customized.
Vacuum reference Ready/Not Ready character indications include:<>(Blank) Vacuum reference Ready/Not Ready is not in use. Vacuum reference is
not present and enabled or current measurement mode is not absolute by vacuum.
<*>
Vacuum reference Ready. Vacuum value is below limit specified in the current
SETUP file if source is COM2 or user (not a measured value) (see Section 3.12).
< > > Vacuum reference Not Ready. Current SETUP file source for vacuum is COM2and vacuum value is above the limit specified (see Section 3.12). The <>> flashes if
the piston is floating to alert the user that this indicator is Not Ready.

3.5

Piston Position
Note
PG9607 is a unique configuration of PG9000 that utilizes a floating cylinder with astationary piston. This is in contrast with other PG9000 models that use a floating
piston and a stationary cylinder. For consistency ‘Piston’ refers to the floating
component on which mass is loaded in this and other noted sections.

When operating a PG9000 piston gauge, reference pressure values are defined by loading known mass
values on the piston and adjusting the pressure to float the piston. Piston position is measured anddisplayed real time on the MAIN run screen (see Section 3.9) and in the first SYSTEM run screen (seeSection 3.11.5.1). Piston position is used as a criterion for the Ready/Not Ready indication as valid
measurements can only be made when the piston is in the correct position (see Section 3.4.1).
The full piston stroke is ± 4.5 mm from the midstroke position.
positions and zones as illustrated in Figure 9. These zones are:•

The stroke is divided into different

High and low stops: The piston is at the minimum or maximum end of stroke. The pressure applied
to the piston is higher (at high stop) or lower (at low stop) than that corresponding to the mass loadedon the piston. The high and low stop positions are fixed.

Page 37© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL•High and low spring zones: The combination of pressure and the force of the high or low stop
springs have caused the piston to leave the stop. The pressure applied to the piston is within theequivalent of 2 kg of the pressure corresponding to the mass loaded on the piston. The high and low
spring zones indicate the piston is about to float. The spring zone positions are fixed.

•

High and low measurement zones: The piston is within the zone in which a Ready measurement
can be made (see Section 3.4.1). The pressure applied to the piston is the pressure corresponding
to the mass loaded on the piston. The default value of the high and low measurement zones is± 2.5 mm around midstroke position. This value can be adjusted in the SETUP file (see Section 3.12).

•

Midstroke: The piston is at the middle of its stroke. The bottom of the piston (or its equivalent
for hollow pistons) is at the reference level marked on the mounting post (see Section 3.11.7).
There is equal stroke available to the high and low stops.

Note
The piston position monitoring system is driven by the internal ring in the base of
the mass loading bell. When the bell is not installed, piston position cannot bemeasured. If the current mass load is less than the mass of the piston + bell,
PG9000 will display < ---- > where piston position is normally displayed. If thecurrent mass load is greater than the mass of the piston + bell but the bell is not
actually installed, the piston position indication is not valid.

Figure 9. Piston Stroke and Zones

3.6

Manual Mass Loading PURPOSE
To provide the operator with mass loading instructions and allow mass entry in convenient nominal values
which PG9000 can accurately convert to measured mass values to determine the actual mass load.
 PRINCIPLE
All PG9000 manual mass set masses of 0.1 kg and above, including those in the mass set, the massloading bell and the piston assembly, are adjusted so that their true mass is within ± 20 ppm of theirnominal value. The nominal value is marked on each mass. Each mass’s actual individual value ismeasured more accurately than ± 20 ppm and reported in the mass set, mass loading bell or pistoncylinder module calibration report. These measured actual values are used by PG9000 in all of its
defined pressure calculations. The nominal mass values, and the sequential numbers of the nominal
masses when there are several of the same value, are used by PG9000 to describe the mass to load or
the mass that is loaded. Following a few simple mass loading rules allows PG9000 to accuratelytransform actual mass values into nominal mass values and vice-versa so that mass loading
instructions to the operator and the operator mass entries can be made in simple nominal mass
instructions while representing actual individual mass values.
Since the nominal mass values written on the masses and the actual values of the individual masses
are different, in pressure to mass mode (see Section 3.11.12) the actual mass value loaded on the© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 38

3. GENERAL OPERATION

piston will be different from the mass loading instruction. In the same manner, in mass to pressure mode
the nominal value of the mass load that the operator enters is different from the actual mass loadedon the piston. The mass value shown in the MAIN run screen (see Section 3.9) is always theactual mass value. The mass loading instruction given in pressure to mass mode and the mass value
entered by the operator in mass to pressure mode is always the nominal mass value. If PG9000 massloading protocol is followed, the conversion from nominal mass to actual mass occurs correctly allowing
very simple nominal mass loading and accounting for the operator while using very accurate measured
mass values for metrological calculations.
 OPERATIONNote
To avoid wear to masses and to the piston-cylinder module end of stroke stops,
the piston should not be rotating when masses are loaded or unloaded. Before
loading masses, stop piston rotation by hand or using the motorized rotation
system (see Section 3.11.13).
PG9000 instructions to the operator of mass to load, and operator entries of the mass that is loaded, arealways expressed in terms of nominal mass within 0.1 kg and in terms of grams for values under 0.1 kg.
This protocol is also followed when using the AMH automated mass handler.
In pressure to mass mode, the instruction of the mass to load toachieve the requested pressure is formatted:

Load nominal mass:
kkk.k kg and gg.gg g

In mass to pressure mode, the entry of the mass currently loadedon the piston is formatted:

Nominal mass load:
kkk.k kg and gg.gg g

kkk.k and gg.gg must be expressed and loaded following the mass loading rules below:
Mass Loading Rules
See Sections 2.3.1.3, Installing Masses On The Mass Loading Tray and 3.6. for PG9000 mass set principles
and protocol information. Refer to display examples immediately above to identify kkk.k and gg.gg.
See EXAMPLES: Mass Loading below for mass loading examples.
PG9000 mass loading entries and instructions are always formatted:
kkk.k kg and nn.nn g•

The mass set being used must be selected as the active mass set (see Section 3.13.1.10) and must
be properly set up prior to use (see Section 3.13.1.6).

•

kkk.k is made up of the piston, the mass loading bell and mass set masses of 0.1 kg and greater.
When using an AMH mass set, the binary mass carrier and mass lifting shaft are also included.

•

kkk.k always includes the mass loading bell and then the makeup mass, if possible.

•

kkk.k is made up of the largest masses possible rather than a combination of smaller masses.
EXAMPLE: To load 11.1 kg on a PG9607:•

USE the piston (1.3 kg) + the mass loading bell (0.8 kg) + the 9 kg makeup mass.

•

DO NOT USE the piston + the mass loading bell + 5 kg + 2 kg #1 + 2 kg #2.

When several masses of the same nominal value are included in kkk.k, they are loaded in numericalsequence, low to high.
EXAMPLE: When loading three 10 kg masses:•

USE 10 kg mass #1, #2 and #3.

•

DO NOT USE 10 kg mass #4, #3, #1.

This rule will be followed automatically if masses are installed and used as described in
Section 2.3.1.3.
Page 39© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL•

gg.gg is made up of mass from the gram trim mass set (masses of 50 g to 0.01 g). These masses
can be loaded in any order.

 Caution
When PG9000 provides mass loading instructions and calculates the true mass ofthe mass currently loaded, it assumes that the mass set in use has been set up
correctly (see Section 2.3.1.3).
For PG9000 mass loading protocol to operateproperly, the mass set in use must be EXACTLY the mass set that has been
defined by the add and/or edit mass function (see Section 3.13.1.6).
EXAMPLE: Manual Mass Loading• Mass loading instruction using PG9607 and an
MS-7002-80 (80 kg) mass set:
77.7 kg and 10.45 gLoad: cylinder (1.3 kg)
 bell (0.8 kg)
 9 kg #1 (makeup mass)
 10 kg #1 through #6
 5 kg #1
 1 kg 0.5 kg #1
 0.1 kg #1
 10.45 g from trim mass set

3.7

AMH Mass Loading
3.7.1

Operating Principals
Note
Numerical reference in this section refers to Figure 10.

The purpose of the AMH system is to automatically load specified values of mass onto the
PG9000 piston-cylinder. This is accomplished by lifting the complete mass set up off andabove the piston-cylinder to the mass selection position, selecting the individual masses to beloaded and retained, and then placing the masses to be loaded back onto the piston.
To accomplish the mass lifting, selection and lowering function, the AMH mass handler uses
four main sub-systems.
1. Electronic and electrical controls (7): The AMH electronic and electrical controls arelocated just above the mass lifter, under a protective cap. These support the AMH
operating logic, a proximity sensor to detect mass load position, reading of the main
mass selection column switches, operation of the column rotating motor and actuation of
the pneumatic control solenoid valves.
2. Mass lifter (8): The mass lifter is used to lift the entire mass load to the mass selection
position and then to lower the selected masses onto the piston. The mass lifter ispneumatically actuated. A flexible diaphragm (4) is connected to a lifting assembly (5). A
three-way solenoid valve (e.g. 9) can be actuated to admit or exhaust drive air pressure
to and from the volume under the diaphragm. Admitting drive pressure forces the lifting
assembly up. Exhausting the pressure lowers it. The pressure is exhausted outside thevacuum chamber, to the AMH drive vacuum supply when there is vacuum in thechamber.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 40

3. GENERAL OPERATION

3. As the mass lifting assembly (5) rises, it engages a ledge on the mass lifting shaft(6),pushing it up. The mass lifting shaft is connected to the binary mass carrier (10) and themass bell(1) sits on the binary mass carrier. As the mass lifting shaft goes up, it lifts thebinary carrier and the bell, which in turn lifts the main masses (14) and the binary mass
tubes(2). When the lifting assembly reaches the top of its stroke, the entire mass load islifted completely off the piston cap (12) and the masses are in the mass selection
position. In this position, the ledges on the main mass selection columns (13) align withthe gaps between the main masses and the binary mass selector pins(e.g. 3) align withthe holding grooves in the binary mass tubes. When gas is exhausted from the volume
under the lifting assembly, it descends, lowering the selected masses onto the piston.
4. Main mass disc selection columns (13): The three main mass selection columns areused to retain the main mass discs (14) that are not to be loaded onto the piston. The
columns are rotated synchronously by a DC motor and a drive belt (11). Contact
switches are used to monitor the column position. Each column has ten sides. One side,which retains all the masses so that none are loaded, has a ledge for each mass. Eachsubsequent side has one less ledge, moving from the bottom up. The last side has noledges and is used to select all the main masses for loading. When the mass load is liftedto the mass selection position, the motor is operated to rotate the columns to retain thedesired number of masses. The rest of the main masses are free and are lowered onto
the piston when the lifting assembly descends.
5. Binary mass tube selection pins (3): The binary mass selection pins are used to retain
the binary mass tubes that are not to be loaded onto the piston. Three pins for eachmass are located in a circular pattern around the top of each mass. The pins arepneumatically actuated and double acting. Two three-way solenoid valves (e.g. 9)control drive pressure to each set of three pins. One valve admits pressure to one side of
the pin to extend it and the other admits pressure to the other side of the pin to retract it.
Once the pins have been moved, the pressure is exhausted; the exhaust is to vacuum
when there is vacuum in the bell jar. When the mass load is lifted to the mass selection
position, the pins are operated to retain the binary masses that are not to be loaded. The
rest of the binary masses are free and are placed onto the piston when the lifting
assembly descends.

 Warning
Do not put fingers or anything else beneath the AMH trim mass tray. AMH
may lower up to 100 kg (220 lbs) onto anything that is under the trim mass
tray. This could cause damage and/or injury.

Page 41© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL









Mass loading bell
Binary mass tubes
Binary mass selection pins
Flexible diaphragm
Mass lifting assembly
Lifting ledge on mass lifting shaft
Electronics and electrical controls









Mass lifter
Solenoid valve
Binary mass carrier
Main mass column rotation belt
Piston cap
Main mass column
Main masses

Figure 10. AMH Schematic/Operating Principle

3.7.2

AMH Operation

Once the AMH mass handling system has been initialized (see Section 2.4.10), the mass set
has been installed (see Section 2.3.1.5) and the AMH has been installed (see Section
3.7.2.1), regular operation of the AMH is controlled by the P9000 Platform in response to
local commands entered on the PG Terminal or remote commands received over the
PG9000 Platform’s COM1 or IEEE-488 interface.
Generally, AMH operation is transparent to the operator. The AMH system changes themass load on the piston automatically as needed when a pressure or mass load settingcommand is given to the PG9000. The AMH mass handler and mass set are removed only
when it is necessary to access the piston-cylinder assembly.
© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 42

3. GENERAL OPERATION

Subsections of this section describe various aspects of AMH operation.
See Sections 3.7.2.1 and 3.7.2.2 for instructions on installing and removing the AMH mass handler.
See Section 3.7.2.3 for information on regular pressure to mass or mass to pressure operation.
See Section 3.7.2.4 for information on controlling the AMH mass handling system directly, outsideof pressure to mass or mass to pressure operation.
See Section 3.7.2.5 for information on making and breaking the reference vacuum in AMH.
See Section 3.7.2.6 for information on accessing the piston-cylinder module when an AMH is
installed.
See Section 3.7.2.7 and 3.7.2.8 for a description of the indications of the AMH LED and alisting of AMH related error messages.
See Section 4 for information on controlling PG9000 equipped with AMH by remotecommands from a computer.

3.7.2.1

Installing an AMH Mass Handler on the PG9000
Platform Caution

Perform an AMH startup before loading AMH masses (seeSection 2.4.10). Startup ensures that AMH binary mass pins are
retracted and main mass columns are rotated correctly forloading. Installing the AMH over the masses before performing
an AMH startup risks damaging internal AMH components.

Figure 11. AMH Installation on PG9000 Platform

Page 43© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

To install the AMH mass handler on the PG9000 platform, proceed as follows(see Figure 11).
 Prepare the AMH: Before loading the masses, perform the AMH start
up/verification procedure describe in Section 2.4.10. This assures that the
AMH mass selection columns and pins are all correctly positioned.
Make sure that the mass lifting shaft is NOT installed on the mass bell.
 Remove the AMH and load the masses: Be careful to keep the AMH
upright and not bump the AMH against the PG Base or other objects. Set
the AMH down on an adjacent surface. Load the AMH mass set as
described in Section 2.3.1.5.
 Lift the AMH onto the PG9000 Platform: Grasping the AMH by thehorizontal platform in its middle, lift the AMH above the PG9000 platform
and masses. Align it so that the cable and pneumatic connections line up
with the connections on the rear side of the PG Base. Center the AMH overthe mass load and gently lower it down until the AMH feet enter the holes in
the PG9000 Platform. Assure that all three feet fully enter and seat in
the platform holes. Tighten the platform set screws using a 2.5 mm allen
wrench provided in the AMH accessories, one for each of the feet.
 Install the mass lifting shaft: Slip the threaded end of the shaft down throughhole in the center of the mass lifter. Thread the shaft into the binary masscarrier by holding and rotating the trim mass tray. NOTE THAT SHAFT HAS A
LEFT HAND THREAD SO IT MUST BE ROTATED COUNTER-CLOCKWISE
TO TIGHTEN IT. Use the 3 mm allen wrench supplied in the AMH-100
accessories to tighten the assembly until you feel the mass start to rotate.

 Caution
Be sure that the mass lifting shaft is fully threaded into thebinary mass carrier. Thread it by hand, then tighten it using theallen wrench supplied with the AMH until you feel the masses
rotate. If the mass lifting shaft is not fully threaded, the mass
will not align properly with the AMH mass handling columns
and pins and damage may result.
Connect the AMH drive, vent and electrical connections: The drive andvent connections are quick connect (push to connect) fittings. Drive isdesignated by a red band. Vent is designated by a blue band. Mate theAMH power and signal cable to the connector on the PG base.
 I If preparing to operate with vacuum in the bell jar, lift the Bell Jar onto
the PG9000 platform: Using the handles on the sides lift the Bell Jar above the
PG9000 platform and masses. Center it over the mass load and gently lower it
down until the bottom circumference of the Bell Jar reaches the PG9000
vacuum plate. Check that the vacuum chamber is well aligned on the vacuum
plate. The Bell Jar may be rotated on the platform to the most convenient
position. Make the reference vacuum connection if the KF40 connection on
the side of the AMH is being used.
 If preparing to operate with vacuum in the bell jar, open the AMH
vacuum supply valve to admit drive vacuum to the AMH (see Section
3.7.2.5). If operating without vacuum in the bell jar, open the AMH
Vent port atmosphere.
The PG9000 with AMH is now ready to operate (see Section 3).

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 44

3. GENERAL OPERATION Caution
Do not operate the AMH when using a PG9000 in “absolute byvacuum” mode without having a vacuum supply connected toAMH-100. Always check that the AMH is supplied with vacuum
before establishing reference vacuum in the bell jar. NEVER
plug the AMH drive vacuum port. Failure to do so may result indamage to the binary mass pins and/or binary masses (seeSection 2.3.1.4.2).

3.7.2.2

Removing a Mass Handler from the PG9000 Platform

To remove the AMH from the PG9000 platform, proceed as follows (see Figure 11).
 Load all the mass: Use [SPECIAL], <8AMH>, <2control>, <3loadall> toload all the masses of the AMH mass set. This assures that no masses are
retained in the AMH so it will be able to be lifted off the platform freely.
 If present, open the bell jar to atmospheric pressure: Check that the bell
jar is open to atmosphere. It is not possible to remove the bell jar withinternal pressure less than atmospheric pressure.
 If present, remove the bell jar: Disconnect vacuum connections andexternal vacuum measurement devices from the bell jar. Remove the bell jar
and set aside.
 Remove the mass lifting shaft: Use the 3 mm allen wrench supplied in the
AMH accessories to loosen and unscrew the shaft. NOTE THAT SHAFTHAS A LEFT HAND THREAD SO IT MUST BE ROTATED CLOCKWISE
TO LOOSEN IT. Slip the shaft up and out of the mass handler.
Disconnect the AMH drive, vacuum and electrical connections:
Disconnect the red and blue quick connects by pulling down on the collars.
These connections may be disconnected without turning off AMH supply or
vacuum.

Lift the AMH off of the PG9000 Platform: Grasping the AMH by thehorizontal platform in its middle, lift the AMH straight up until it clears themasses and set it on a flat surface. The AMH mass handler weighs about
12 kg (25 lb.).

3.7.2.3

AMH Mass to Pressure or Pressure to Mass Operation

If the PG9000 is equipped with AMH, AMH automatically loads the requested
mass values transparently to the operator.
Generally, the PG9000 is used to set pressures by loading mass onto the piston
and adjusting the pressure under the piston to float the piston. The PG9000
supports this operation locally from its main run screen in pressure entry or mass
entry mode (see Section 3.11.11). In pressure entry mode, when AMH is
installed and initialized, when the operator enters the pressure to set, thecorresponding mass load is loaded automatically with the AMH’s 0.1 kg massloading resolution. If the PG9000 is set for finer than 0.1 kg resolution (seeSection 3.11.10), the operator is prompted to load a trim mass value manually.
In mass entry mode, if a mass value with resolution finer than 0.1 kg is entered,after AMH loads the value within 0.1 kg, the operator is prompted to load theremaining trim mass value manually.

 Warning
Do not put fingers or anything else beneath the AMH trim mass
tray. AMH may lower up to 100 kg (220 lbs) onto anything that isunder the trim mass tray. This could cause injury and/or damage.

Page 45© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3.7.2.4

Direct Control of AMH Functions

In normal PG9000 operation, the AMH mass handler is operated transparently tothe operator when a mass change is necessary.
For AMH to be operated it must first be initialized by selecting an AMH mass set(see Section 3.13.1.10).
The status of the AMH (current masses loaded) can be viewed and its operation
controlled directly using [SPECIAL], <8AMH>.
Select <1status> to view which AMH masses are loaded.
Select <2control>, <1up/down> to raise and lower the mass load withoutchanging the selected masses.
Select <2control>, <2discreet> to select specific masses to load and unload.
Select <2control>, <3loadall> to clear the AMH and load all the masses on thepiston. This is the condition used to remove and install the AMH. In this state,
the AMH retains no masses.
Select <2control>, <1unloadall> to clear the AMH and unload all the masses
from the piston. In this state, the AMH retains all the masses.

3.7.2.5

Making and Breaking Reference Vacuum with AMH

When making and breaking a reference vacuum in the bell jar to switch the
PG9000 between absolute and gauge mode operation, it is important that the
AMH mass manipulation actuators also be exposed to the correct pressure. The
correct pressure is vacuum in absolute mode and atmosphere in gauge mode.
If the AMH is to be operated with a vacuum in the bell jar, a vacuum supply must
be connected to the drive vacuum connection quick connector so that the AMH
actuators (mass lifter, mass selector pins) are evacuated when they are notpressurized. See Section 2.3.1.4.2 for information on correctly connecting thedrive vacuum supply to AMH.
When using the AMH in absolute mode, the drive vacuum supply sleeve valve
must be set to the VACUUM position just before establishing the reference
vacuum.
When operating with atmosphere in the bell jar, set the drive vacuum supply
sleeve valve to GAUGE so that the AMH actuators vent to atmosphere.

 Caution
Failure to supply vacuum to the AMH before establishing avacuum in its vacuum chamber may cause unexpected
operation of the binary mass selector pins which could result indamage to the AMH mass handler and or masses (see Section
3.7.1). NEVER plug the AMH vent port.

3.7.2.6

Accessing the PG9000 Piston-Cylinder Module withAMH

To access the piston-cylinder module in a PG9000 Platform with AMH installed,
the AMH mass handler and mass set must be removed.
First, remove the AMH mass handler as described in Section 3.7.2.2.
Then, remove the AMH mass set following the instructions in Section 2.3.1.5 inreverse order.
Once the AMH mass handler and mass set are removed, the piston-cylinder
module can be accessed and removed by following the standard procedure (seeSection 2.3.2.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 46

3. GENERAL OPERATION

3.7.2.7

AMH Indicator LED

There is a green indicator LED located on the front of the PG9000 base plate
beside the spirit level (see Figure 12). This is the AMH status indicator.

Figure 12. AMH Indicator location
The indicator has four possible conditions:•

Off: AMH is not powered.

•

Solid green: AMH is powered and operation is normal.

•

Slow flashing green: AMH is powered and is in an unknown state. To recoveruse [SPECIAL], <8AMH>, <2control>, <3loadall> or <4unloadall> or initialize
AMH by selecting an AMH mass set (see Section 2.4.10., Step ).

•

Fast flashing green: AMH is powered and has encountered a known error
condition. The error is displayed on the PG Terminal (see Section 3.7.2.8)
and available remotely using the “AMHERR” command. To recover use[SPECIAL], <8AMH>, <2control>, <3loadall> or <4unloadall> or initialize
AMH by selecting an AMH mass set (see Section 2.4.10, Step ).

3.7.2.8

AMH Error Messages

The AMH mass handler can inform the PG9000 of certain error conditions.
An AMH error condition is indicated on the PG Terminal by an error message
and listing of the error number on the bottom right hand of the display.
An AMH error is indicated remotely by the PG9000 return string including thecharacter “E” in the third “Ready indicator position”. The “Ready” indication is
included in the “PR” and “STATUS” commands. When an “E” has been returned,
the error identification can then be retrieved using the “AMHERR” command.
See the PG9000 Operation and Maintenance Manual, Remote Operation for
additional information.
The possible errors are listed in Table 10.

Page 47© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Table 10. AMH Errors
AMH
ERROR
NUMBERPG TERMINAL MESSAGE

COMMENT

None(Remoteerror #28)

<AMH response fault>

The AMH has returned a string that the PG9000 cannot
identify. This is a PG9000 generated error.

None(Remoteerror #28)

<AMH not responding>

The PG9000 has not received a response from the AMH.
This is a PG9000 generated error as a consequence of a timeout while attempting to communicate with AMH.

2

None

Text argument is too long.

6

None

Argument out of range.

7

None

Missing or improper argument.

9

None

Unknown Command.

10

None

Invalid command suffix.

13

None

Receive buffer overflow. Buffer has been flushed.

18

None

Command not available.

60

None

Watchdog reset has occurred.

100

None

Present mass setting unknown.

102

None

6.2 kg binary mass not available on AMH.

103

<AMH memory failure>

Mass memory.

104<AMH memory failure>

Non-volatile memory is corrupt.

105<AMH logic failure>

Fatal electronics error.

106

None

Mass load must first be lifted.

107<AMH logic failure>

Incorrect CPLD version.

108<AMH logic failure>

CPLD logic error.

110<AMH unable to rotate column
motor>

Column motor switch error on column 0 (C0).

111<AMH unable to rotate column
motor>

Column motor switch error on column 1 (C1).

112<AMH unable to rotate column
motor>

Column motor switch error on column 2 (C2).

113<AMH unable to rotate column
motor>

Wrong column switch detected.

114<AMH logic failure>

JTAG buffer overflow.

115<AMH logic failure>

JTAG max retries.

116<AMH logic failure>

JTAG TDO mismatch.

117<AMH logic failure>

JTAG illegal state.

118<AMH logic failure>

JTAG ENDxR state unknown.

119<AMH logic failure>

JTAG unknown error.

120<AMH unable to lift mass load>

Mass lift valve not sensed.

121<AMH unable to lower mass load>

Mass is dropping unexpectedly.

122<AMH unable to lift mass load>

Mass never lifted.

123<AMH unable to lower mass load>

Mass is not dropping when it should.

124<AMH unable to lift mass load>

IR beam malfunction. AMH will not attempt lift

125

<AMH unable to rotate column
motor>

Column motor switch on column 1 is misaligned.

126<AMH unable to rotate column
motor>

Column motor switch on column 2 is misaligned.

130<AMH valve failure>

6.2 kg binary mass pin engage valve (VLV#14) not sensed.

131<AMH valve failure>

3.2 kg binary mass pin engage valve (VLV#6) not sensed.

132<AMH valve failure>

1.6 kg binary mass pin engage valve (VLV#12) not sensed.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 48

3. GENERAL OPERATION

AMH
ERROR
NUMBER

3.8

PG TERMINAL MESSAGE

COMMENT133<AMH valve failure>

0.8 kg binary mass pin engage valve (VLV#4) not sensed.

134<AMH valve failure>

0.4 kg binary mass pin engage valve (VLV#10) not sensed.

135<AMH valve failure>

0.2 kg binary mass pin engage valve (VLV#2) not sensed.

136<AMH valve failure>

0.1 kg binary mass pin engage valve (VLV#8) not sensed.

137<AMH valve failure>

6.4 kg binary mass pin disengage valve (VLV#15) not
sensed.

138<AMH valve failure>

3.2 kg binary mass pin disengage valve (VLV#7) not sensed.

139<AMH valve failure>

1.6 kg binary mass pin disengage valve (VLV#13) not
sensed.

140<AMH valve failure>

0.8 kg binary mass pin disengage valve (VLV#5) not sensed.

141<AMH valve failure>

0.4 kg binary mass pin disengage valve (VLV#11) not
sensed.

142<AMH valve failure>

0.2 kg binary mass pin disengage valve (VLV#3) not sensed.

143<AMH valve failure>

0.1 kg binary mass pin disengage valve (VLV#9) not sensed.

Controlled Clearance Pressure (PG9607)

The PG9607 model of PG9000 allows an independent pressure to be applied to the inside of the piston. Thispressure is the Controlled Clearance Pressure (CCP). The purpose of this feature is to allow the piston to be
artificially expanded, varying the size of the gap between the piston and cylinder. The ability to predictably
vary the size of the gap between the piston and the cylinder can be useful in analyzing piston-cylinder
behavior.

Note
In normal operation, the Controlled Clearance Pressure (CCP) is equal to themeasured pressure, thus the pressure applied to the TEST port should also be
applied to the CCP port.
The controlled clearance pressure is introduced through the CCP port on the back of the PG9607 platform.
The pressure is applied through the mounting post to the inside of the piston (see Figure 6, Ref. 8). The
pressure is contained by the two piston sealing O-rings (see Figure 6, Refs. 10a, 10b).
The piston sealing O-rings are positioned on the ends of the piston so that the deformation due to pressure
along the active zone of the piston is constant and parallel.
The expansion of the piston with pressure can be predicted using thick walled cylinder stress/strain relations
and the mechanical properties of the piston material (tungsten carbide). The result is 0.16 micron on the
diameter/MPa.
A typical 50 mm piston-cylinder assembly has a radial gap of 0.9 micron so a CCP of 3 MPa will reduce thegap by about 50 %. Around 5 MPa, the CCP may close the gap completely causing mechanical contact
between the piston-cylinder and damage to the parts.

 Caution
A Controlled Clearance Pressure (CCP) of about 5 MPa may close the gap between
the piston and cylinder completely causing metal to metal contact between the twoparts and possible damage.

Page 49© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3.9

Main Run Screen

The PG9000 main run screen is its home display that is reached upon powering up and from which otherfunctions and menus are accessed. It is the top level of all menu structures.
The main run screen is where PG9000 is left in normal operation. It displays the pressure defined by
PG9000, Ready/Not Ready condition and a variety of other information.

Note
The screen described below is called the MAIN run screen. The SYSTEM and
AMBIENT screens (see Sections 3.11.5 and 3.11.6) are also run screens in thesense that all the other functions may be accessed directly from them andpressure or mass entries may be made from them. See Section 3.10 for a
description of PG9000’s main menu/function structure.
3.
4.

prvPRESSURE1 unit aGh+N.N mm NN.NNNNN kg

1.

<prv>: Three Ready/Not Ready indication characters(from left to right: piston position, piston rotation,
vacuum reference) (see Section 3.4). Each character
indicates as follows:<p>: Piston Position Ready/Not Ready. <*> when
Ready, <↑> when Not Ready due to piston abovemeasuring zone, <↓> when Not Ready due to piston
below measuring zone, <?> if piston position notavailable or out of range. Flashes if condition is Not
Ready and piston is floating (see Section 3.4.1).
Indicates Not Ready when automated pressure
generation is adjusting pressure.

<PRESSURE1>: Numerical value and sign of thepressure defined by PG9000 with current mass loaded
on current piston when all Ready/Not Ready indication
characters indicate Ready.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

5.

Automated pressure generation status. <G> if automatedpressure generation is ON.
The <G> flashes if
automated pressure generation is ON and active, blank
if automated pressure generation is not ON (seeSection 3.11.9).

6.

DUT head correction status. <h> if a head correction iscurrently being applied, blank if head height is zero (seeSection 3.11.7).

7.

<NN.NNNNN kg>: Current mass load in actual mass(assuming mass loading instructions have been
followed and/or mass loading entries are correct (seeSection 3.6).

8.

<± N.N mm>: Current piston position in millimetersfrom midstroke position. Positive values are above
midstroke, negative values below. Indicates < ---- >if piston position not available or out of range (seeSection 3.5).

Note<r>: Piston Rotation Ready/Not Ready. <*> when
Ready, <<> when Not Ready due to piston rotation rate
too low or motorized rotation engaged, <?> if piston
position not available or out of range. Flashes if condition
is Not Ready and piston is floating. (see Section 3.4.2).
<v>:
Vacuum Reference Ready/Not Ready(if available). <*> when Ready, <v> if Not Ready due tovacuum not below ready limit. Flashes if condition is
Not Ready and piston is floating (see Section 3.4.3).
2.

<unit>: Current pressure unit of measure (see Section
3.11.3).
Current measurement mode. <a> for absolute, <g>
for gauge, <d> for differential (see Section 3.11.4).

•

When a number is too large to display
in the allocated screen space, PG9000
displays <********> or <OVERFLOW>.

•

PG9000 has a screen saver functionthat causes the display to dim if NO
key is pressed for 10 minutes.
Pressing a key restores full power tothe display.
The screen saver activation time canbe changed or screen saving can becompletely disabled (see Section
3.13.4.1).

Page 50

3. GENERAL OPERATION

3.10

General Function/Menu Flow Chart

Local operator interface with PG9000 is provided by PG Terminal keypad and display. Normal PG9000
operation is organized around run screens from which functions and menus are accessed. The runscreens include:•

MAIN run screen: Displays Ready/Not Ready, defined pressure, piston position and mass load.

•

SYSTEM run screens: Display piston position, rotation, temperature and reference vacuum.

•

AMBIENT run screen: Displays ambient pressure temperature, relative humidity and local gravity.

Figure 13 outlines the operating protocol of the run screens and associated key presses.

Figure 13. Run Screen Flow Chart

3.11

Direct Function Keys
3.11.1

Direct Function Keys Summary

Local operator interface with PG9000 is provided by PG Terminal keypad and display.
To minimize the use of multi-layered menu structures, the keypad’s numerical keys also
provide direct access to the most commonly used functions. The function accessed islabeled on the bottom half of the each key. Direct function keys are active whenever PG9000
is in a run screen (MAIN, SYSTEM or AMBIENT). Table 14 summarizes the operation of thedirect function keys. Section 3.10 provides a flow chart of PG Terminal general operation.
See corresponding manual Sections to 3.11.1 to 3.13.9.

Page 51© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALNote
It may be useful to keep a copy of Table 11 near the PG9000, especiallywhen first becoming acquainted with its operation.
Table 11. Summary of PG9000 Direct Function Key Operations
DIRECT FUNCTION KEYS ARE ACTIVE FROM ANY RUN SCREEN(main, ambient, system).
See corresponding manual sections for full detail.

3.11.2

Menu of less frequently used internalfunctions and settings including resets,
user preferences, internal calibration
and remote interface setup.

Set the resolution of PG9000 massloading commands (0.01 g to 0.1 kg).

Edit and select files that determine thesources of the values for the variables
PG9000 uses in calculations of reference
pressures.

Access SYSTEM run screens whichdisplay current measurements of pistonbehavior, piston-cylinder temperatureand reference vacuum if present.
Advances through the screens.

Select pressure to mass or mass topressure operation.

Access AMBIENT run screen whichdisplays current values of barometricpressure, ambient temperature, ambient
humidity and local gravity as specified in
the active SETUP file.

Activate motorized control manually.
Activates when pressed, deactivateswhen released.

Adjust height of DUT fluid headcorrection. Set to zero to defeat headcorrection.

From a run screen: Access mass orpressuresettingcommands.
From other screens:
Select menu
choice, enter value, confirm selection.

Select active piston-cylinder module(range).

Turn automatic activation of motorized
rotation ON/OFF.

Set unit of measure in which pressures
are defined. Choice of units available
from this key can be customized.

Turnautomatedpressure
generation/control
ON/OFF,
adjustcontrol parameters, set upper limit for
automated pressure control. Has noeffect if an automated pressure
generation/control component is not partof the PG9000 system.

Set pressure measurement(gauge, absolute, differential).

mode

[P-C]

 PURPOSE
To view and/or change the active piston-cylinder.

Note•[P-C] is for selecting the active piston-cylinder only. Piston-cylinders
can be added and deleted and their characteristics can be edited bypressing [SPECIAL] and selecting <1PC/MS> (see Section 3.13.1).

•

The active mass set and mass loading bell are selected by pressing[SPECIAL] and selecting <1PC/MS> (see Section 3.13.1).

 PRINCIPLE
To make valid pressure and mass load calculations, PG9000 must know the exact
characteristics of the piston-cylinder module that is currently in use. See Section 7.2 fordetailed information on PG9000 pressure and mass calculations.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 52

3. GENERAL OPERATION

Most PG9000s may be used with more than one piston-cylinder module.
Detailed characteristics on up to 18 piston-cylinder modules are stored in files. These files
can be added, deleted, viewed and edited by pressing [SPECIAL], <1pc/ms> (see Section
3.13.1).
The P-C function provides rapid access, from any run screen, to viewing the piston-cylinder
modules available and selecting one to be active.
 OPERATION
Pressing [P-C] activates the piston-cylinder module viewing and selecting function. Pressing[P-C] again or [←] or [→] while in the P-C function steps through displays of available pistoncylinder modules.
When [P-C] is first pressed, a summary of the characteristics of the active piston-cylinder
module is displayed, for example:
1.

Nominal pressure to mass conversion coefficient of the pistoncylinder module that is currently selected (active). This value iscalculated from the effective area of the piston-cylinder and isin kPa (if < 1 MPa) or MPa.

2.

Serial number of the active piston-cylinder module.

3.

Current pressure unit of measure.

4.

Nominal pressure in current pressure units resulting fromloading all the mass of the active mass set.

5.

Nominal pressure in current pressure units resulting fromloading the piston and mass bell only.

Active 10 kPa/kg 247
0.7 to 50 psi

Pressing [P-C] again or [←] or [→] causes the screen to step through the other available
piston-cylinder modules in the sequence that they were added.
Pressing [ENTER] while in the P-C function causes PG9000 to select the currently displayed
piston-cylinder module as the active piston-cylinder module.
Pressing [ESCAPE] while in the P-C function returns to the main run screen withoutchanging piston-cylinder modules.

Note•

The pressure unit of measure in which the range offered by the pistoncylinder module using the active mass set is displayed can bechanged by pressing [UNIT] (see Section 3.11.3).

•

When the current pressure unit of measure is an altitude unit, pistoncylinder module range is expressed in kPa if the altitude unit is meters(m) or psi if the altitude unit is feet (ft).

3.11.3[UNIT]

 PURPOSE
To specify the unit of measure in which defined pressures are expressed.
 PRINCIPLE
PG9000 supports a wide variety of pressure units of measure. Internally, PG9000 always
operates in Pascal [Pa] (the SI unit of pressure). Values of pressure are represented in otherunits by the application of conversion factors to convert from Pascal. See Section 7.1.1 for
Unit of Measure Conversions.
The pressure unit of measure selection (e.g., psi, kPa, etc.) is separate from the pressure
measurement mode selection (gauge, absolute or differential). See Section 3.11.4 for
information on changing the measurement mode.
 OPERATIONTo change the pressure unit of measure, press the[UNIT] function key from any run screen. The
display is (default units depend on model):Page 53

1kPa 2Mpa 3Pa
4bar 5psi 6kcm2© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALThe cursor is on the number corresponding to the active unit. To change the pressure unit, selectthe desired unit. The display returns to the previous run screen with the selected unit active.
If the pressure unit selected is inWa, the reference
temperature for water density must be specified. When
inWa is selected as the unit, the next display is:

Select inWa ref temp
4°C

20°C

60°F

Select the desired reference temperature for water density using the [←] or [→] key to movethe cursor. Pressing [ENTER] returns to the main run screen with inWa based on water
density at the selected reference temperature as the active pressure unit. The current inWa
reference temperature can be viewed by observing the position of the cursor in the reference
temperature screen.

Note•

See Section 7.1.17.1.1 for tables of the pressure unit of measure
conversion factors used by PG9607.

•

The UNIT function provides rapid access to a choice of up to six units.
The choice of units can be customized from a wider selection by theuser (see Section 3.11.3.1). The default units are:
1kPa 2MPa 3Pa 4bar 5psi 6kcm2•

To restore the default UNIT function settings, use the Unit Reset (seeSection 3.13.9.2).

•

Certain internal and/or metrological functions (e.g., vacuum reference
pressure) are always represented in Pascal [Pa], regardless of theactive pressure unit of measure.

•

When the current pressure unit of measure is an altitude unit,
atmospheric pressure in the AMBIENT run screen is expressed in kPa
if the altitude unit is meters (m) or psi if the altitude unit is feet (ft).

3.11.3.1 Customizing Pressure Units Available Under the
UNIT Function
 PURPOSE
To customize the selection of pressure units that are available for selection fromthe [UNIT] function key.
 PRINCIPLEThe UNIT function provides a choice of different pressure units of measuredepending on the PG9000 model. The units that are available by default arethose indicated in the Note in Section 3.11.3. However, PG9000 supports manyother pressure units of measure. Other units can be made available for selection
and units can be deleted by customizing the UNIT function. This allows PG9000
to offer a very wide selection of units while simplifying day to day operation.
The typical user will customize the [UNIT] function key to support the six mostcommonly used units.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 54

3. GENERAL OPERATION

 OPERATION
To customize the [UNIT] function key, from the main run screen press [SETUP]
and select <2PresU>. The display is:

1.

The UNIT number in the [UNIT] menu that is
to be changed.

Set up user unit #6

Enter the number of the unit position thatyou would like to change. The display
becomes:

Unit #6
1SI 2other3altitude 4user

Select the desired pressure unit category. SI units include units based on SI
such as mmHg. Select the desired unit from the unit list (see Table 15).
Table 12. Pressure Units of Measure Available<1SI><2Other><3altitude>*<4User>**<1Pa><2Kpa><3MPa><4mbar><5bar><6mmHg><7mmWa><1psi><2psf><3inHg><4inWa><5kcm2><6Torr><7mTor><8none>

<1m>
<2ft>

<1user>* <3altitude>: in absolute by vacuum mode only.
** <4user>: User defined unit. .

The UNIT function display is not required to display six units. To delete thecurrent unit from the UNIT screen and show no unit, select <2other>, <6none>
for that unit number.
If <4user> was selected, the user unit must be defined. The display is:1.

Define user unit:
1.000000 Units/Pa

Entry field.

Enter the number of user units per Pascal [Pa] in the entry field. Pressing [ENTER]
defines the user unit and returns to the <Set up unit #> screen.

Note

3.11.4•See Section 7.1.1 for the pressure unit of measure conversion
factors used by PG9000.

•

The user defined unit can be assigned a user defined label
using the UDU remote command (see Section 4.3.4.2).

[MODE]

 PURPOSE
To specify the measurement mode (gauge, absolute or differential) in which PG9000 defines
reference pressures.

Note
Pressure measurement mode and unit of measure are not the same thing.
See Section 3.11.3 for information on the pressure unit of measure.
Page 55© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL PRINCIPLE
Pressure defined relative to vacuum is generally referred to as absolute pressure.
Pressure defined relative to atmospheric pressure is generally referred to as gauge pressure,with pressure below atmosphere called negative gauge pressure.
Pressure defined relative to another pressure that may be, but is not necessarily atmosphericpressure, is generally referred to as differential pressure.
PG9000s can define absolute, gauge, negative gauge and differential pressures. These arereferred to as measurement modes.
The specific PG9000 measurement modes are as follows:•gauge: Defines gauge pressure by leaving the PG9000 mass load open to atmosphere.
This mode does not allow negative gauge pressures. The minimum gauge pressure is
the pressure resulting from loading the combined mass of the piston and the bell on
piston-cylinder effective area.

•

absolute by adding atmospheric pressure (absolute by ATM): Defines absolutepressure by defining a pressure in the same manner as in gauge mode and adding thevalue of atmospheric pressure measured by a barometer. The barometer can be
PG9000’s on-board sensor or a remote RS232 barometer.
•absolute by vacuum (absolute by vac): Defines absolute pressure by measuring
relative to an evacuated bell jar. This mode is required for setting absolute pressures
under atmospheric pressure and for lowest uncertainty under about 1 MPa (150 psi).

•

differential (dif): Defines differential pressures at an absolute static pressure
between vacuum and two atmospheres by defining an absolute pressure relative toan evacuated bell jar and subtracting static pressure monitored by a digital pressure
indicator. An offsetting technique ensures that only the digital indicator’s resolution
and very short term repeatability influence the measurement results.
Allows positive and negative differential pressure (including gauge pressures) with
one common hardware setup. Covers pressures very near and at zero without
limitations due to piston-cylinder size and mass loads (see Section 3.11.4.1).

 OPERATIONTo change the pressure measurement mode, press [MODE] from any run screen. The resulting
display depends on the PG9000 Model:
The cursor is on the number corresponding to the current measurement mode.
Measurement mode:
1g 2avac 3aatm 4dif
[MODE] Screen

Selecting <2avac> accesses absolute by vacuum mode. Selecting <3aatm> accesses
absolute by ATM mode. Selecting <4dif> accesses differential mode (see PRINCIPLE
above and Section 3.11.4.1).
Making a measurement mode selection returns to the previous run screen with the selectedmode active.

Note
When using an AMH automated mass handler, be sure to apply drive
vacuum to the AMH when switching operation to absolute by vacuum
mode (see 3.7.2.5).

3.11.4.1 Differential Measurement Mode
 PURPOSE
To define gauge pressures near and under atmospheric pressure that cannot becovered in conventional gauge mode; to define pressures at a static pressurenear atmospheric pressure but other than atmospheric pressure.
© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 56

3. GENERAL OPERATION

Note
Differential mode operation requires that the PG9000 SETUP
AtmP selection be for an external barometer connected to
COM2 (see Section 3.12, 3.13.5.4). Differential mode operation
also requires the PG9000 Differential Mode Interconnections Kit
P/N 3070127, which includes the Differential Mode Controller.
 PRINCIPLE
Differential mode is designed to allow PG9000 to define pressures which pistongauges have typically not covered or for which they have been difficult to use.
This includes positive and negative gauge pressures near zero, for example± 2.5 kPa (10 in. H2O); as well as low differential pressures at low absolute staticpressures, for example 0 to 2.5 kPa (20 Torr) at 15 kPa absolute (2.2 psia) staticpressure.
The principal of differential mode is to define a differential pressure as thedifference between an absolute pressure relative to vacuum and a second
absolute pressure (the static pressure) measured by a precision Reference
Pressure Monitor (RPM). An offsetting procedure “tares” the RPM so that theuncertainty contributed to the differential pressure by the RPM’s measurement isa function of the RPM resolution and short term repeatability rather than its
absolute accuracy and long term stability.
For differential mode operation, the static pressure is set to the desired value asmeasured by the RPM (atmospheric pressure for gauge pressure
measurements). The RPM offset at the static pressure is determined by applying
the static pressure as defined by the PG9000 following:
RPMoffset = PGRPMstart - RPMindicate
Where:PGRPMstart=

RPMindicate=

Pressure applied by PG9000 to RPM(nominally equal to RPMstart)
RPM reading when PGRPMstart is applied
to RPM test port

Once the RPM offset has been determined, differential pressures are defined bysubtracting the static pressure measured by the RPM from an absolute pressure
defined by the PG9000 following:
PGdif = PGabs - RPMcurrent - RPMoffset
Where:
Pgdif
Pgabs
RPMcurrent
RPMoffset====

Differential pressure defined by PG9000
Absolute pressure defined by PG9000
Current RPM indication of static pressure
Disagreement between PG9000 and RPM at
the operating static pressure

For differential mode operation, the PG9000 Differential Mode Interconnections
Kit should be used to provide the DUT high and low test connections and support
the RPM offsetting procedure (see Figure 14 and Section 3.11.4.1). A precision
Reference Pressure Monitor, such as a DH Intruments RPM, must be selected
for the AtmP source in SETUP (see Section 3.12, 3.13.5.4).
PG9000 differential measurement mode manages the data acquisition andhandling to support differential mode operation without operator effort.
Differential mode operation requires setting the static pressure at which
differential measurements are to be made and regular determination of the RPM
offset. These functions are supported under [MODE], <4dif>.

Page 57© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL PG/STATIC P
CONTROL Port PG Port TEST HIGHPort (Quick
Connection) TEST LOWPort (Quick
Connection)
 1/8 in. NPT F or
4T Quick
Connector
 STATIC P Port STATIC P
SUPPLY Port CONTROL
SELECTIONValve
 PG SHUTOFFValve TEST BYPASS
Valve
 Reference
Pressure
Monitor (RPM)(Optional)
 STATIC P
SELECTION
Valve
 Static Pressure
Exhaust(Internal)

Figure 14. Differential Mode Controller Schematic

Note
Fluke Calibration Technical Note 9940TN02 provides moredetailed information on differential mode principles andincludes a complete uncertainty analysis.
Consult Fluke
Calibration or visit www.dhinstruments.com.
 OPERATIONTo select differential mode operation and access differential mode functions
press [MODE] and select <4dif>.
Differential mode operation includes:•

Selecting differential mode, setting static pressure and finding the RPM
offset (see Section 3.11.4.1, Selecting Differential Mode, Setting Static
Pressure, Finding RPM Offset (<1run>).

•Operating in differential mode (see Section 3.11.4.1, Operating In
Differential Mode).

•

Viewing differential mode static pressure and RPM offset (seeSection 3.11.4.1, Viewing Static Pressure and RPM Offset (<2view>).
Selecting Differential Mode, Setting Static Pressure, Finding RPM
Offset (<1run>)© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 58

3. GENERAL OPERATIONNote
To operate in differential mode and/or execute the RPM offset
determination procedure, the AtmP selection under SETUP must
be external (COM2) (see Section 3.12). If this is not the case, anerror message will be displayed (<Dif mode requires COM2 AtmP
SETUP>) when attempting to activate differential mode.
To select differential mode operation and/or execute the RPM offset determination
procedure, press [MODE] and select <4dif>, <1run>. The display is:1.

Current value of RPM offset. Always in Pascal[Pa].

Offset:9.03 Pa
New offset? 1no 2yes

Select <1no> to use the existing RPM offset and return the previous run screen
in differential mode (see Section 3.11.4.1, Operating in Differential Mode).

Note
The RPM offset should be redetermined any time the staticpressure value is changed, as well as at the beginning of eachcalibration or test sequence. If the difference in the value of the
RPM offset in subsequent determinations is < 0.1 Pa, then lessfrequent offset determinations may be considered.
Select <2yes> to proceed with a new determination of the RPM offset(see Section 3.9.4.1, PRINCIPAL. The display is:1.

Current pressure reading of the RPM in thecurrent units of.

Set RPM P & [ENT]96.57785 kPa a

Table 13. Valve Settings for Setting Differential Mode Static Pressure
VALVE

VALVE SETTING

Control Selection

Static P

PG Shutoff

ClosedTest Bypass

Open

Static P SelectionOff
If static pressure is atmosphericpressure VENT or OFF

With the Differential Mode Controller valves (see Figure 14) set as indicatedin Table use the system’s pressure control component to set the desired staticpressure value as read by the RPM.
If the desired static pressure is atmospheric pressure (for example, for low gauge
and negative gauge differential pressures), set the STATIC P SELECTION valve
to VENT.
If a REFERENCE VOLUME is connected to the STATIC P port and the desired
static pressure is less than atmospheric pressure, consider setting the STATIC P
SELECTION VALVE to SUPPLY. This will connect the pressure setting vacuum
source directly to the reference volume and reduce pull down time.

Page 59© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Caution
Be sure the TEST BYPASS valve is in the OPEN position before
adjusting the static pressure. Failure to do so will cause
differential pressure to be generated across the HIGH and LOWTEST ports which may overpressure the DUT.
When the static pressure, as indicatedby the RPM, has been set to the desired
value, press [ENTER]. PG9000 reads
the RPM and calculates the mass to loadon PG9000 to set the pressure value
indicated by the RPM. The display is:

Load mass & vac:
9.2 kg & 32.47 g

Note
When using an AMH automated mass handler, the mass value
to set the value indicated by the RPM is always loaded withresolution of 0.1 kg. This is to avoid having to break thereference vacuum to load trim masses.
The differential
pressure values are loaded with the resolution specified in[RES] (see Section 3.11.10).
This is the standard nominal mass loading in instruction display of pressure to massmode (see Section 3.11.11.1). The mass loading instruction is always given with
0.01 g resolution regardless of the current mass loading resolution setting (seeSection 3.11.10). Load the mass value following PG9000 mass loading protocol(see Section 3.6). If an AMH automated mass handler is being used, the mass isloaded automatically and default mass loading resolution of 0.1 kg is used.
Set the PG9000 Differential Mode Controller (see Figure 14) to apply thepressure defined by the PG9000 to the RPM (see Table 14).
Table 14. Valve Settings to Apply PG9000 Pressure
to the RPM for Differential Mode Offsetting
VALVE

VALVE SETTING

Control Selection

PG

PG Shutoff

Open

Test Bypass

Open

Static P SelectionOff
If static pressure is atmosphericpressure VENT or OFF© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 60

3. GENERAL OPERATION

Once the valves have been properly set and the mass has been loaded, install
the bell jar and establish vacuum under the bell jar. Then press [ENTER].
The display is:1.

Current pressure reading of the RPM in thecurrent units of measure.

2.

Standard main run screen piston positionindication (see Section 3.7).

3.

Current RPM offset (pressure applied by
PG9000 - RPM indication). Indicates******* if the value is > 9999.99 Pa.
Pressure unit of measure is always
Pascal [Pa].

<<* 99.9785 kPa a h-3.5
Off: -7.89 Pa

Float and rotate the PG9000 piston-cylinder. When the PG9000 is Ready(see Section 3.4), press [ENTER]. Wait about 6 seconds while the PG9000
takes and averages multiple readings. The display is:1.

RPM offset currently in use.

2.

New RPM offset just measured.

Old offset: -7.72 Pa
New offset: -7.89 Pa

To record the new RPM offset and go to the previous run screen in differential
mode with the new RPM offset active, press [ENTER].
To return to the <New offset?> screen, press [ESCAPE].
See Section 3.11.4.11, Operating in Differential Mode, for information ondifferential mode operation.

Note•

The value of the RPM offset typically should be inside of ± 20
Pa. An RPM offset value outside of this range may indicate apoorly calibrated RPM or a problem with the offset
determination procedure.

•

The difference between the RPM offset at the beginning and at
the end of a test will be reflected as zero drift of thedifferential pressures defined during the test. To quantify thisvalue, perform the RPM offset procedure at the beginning andat the end of a test and evaluate the difference between thestarting and ending RPM offset values.
Operating in Differential Mode

 Caution
Differential mode is often used to calibrate DUTs with very low
differential pressure ranges.
These can easily be overpressured and damaged by inadvertently applying excessive
pressure to one port. OPEN the MPC1-D BYPASS valve to zerothe differential across the DUT when there is a risk ofoverpressure.
From a practical standpoint, operating in differential mode is nearly identical tooperating in absolute by vacuum mode (see Section 3.11.11). Unless an AMH
automated mass handler is used, vacuum under the bell jar must be broken to makemass load changes and reestablished to set a pressure.

Page 61© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Operation is in either pressure to mass or mass to pressure mode(see Section 3.11.12).
To operate in differential mode, set the PG9000 Differential Mode Controller(see Figure 14) to apply pressure defined by PG9000 to the high side of the DUT(see Table 15).
Table 15. Valve Settings for Operating in Differential Mode
VALVE
Control Selection

VALVE SETTING
To adjust pressure under PG9000 piston-cylinder PG
To adjust static pressure: STATIC P

PG Shutoff

Piston is floating or near floating: OPEN
Any other time: CLOSED

Test Bypass

To make differential pressure measurements: CLOSEDTo set or check DUT zero: OPEN

Static P SelectionOFF
If static pressure is atmospheric pressure: VENT or OFF

Note
For the highest quality differential mode measurements, useconsistent conditions for static pressure and PG9000 vacuum
reference pressure at each point. Set the PG9000 Differential
Mode Interconnections Kit CONTROL valve to STATIC P toreadjust the static pressure to the same value at each point if
necessary. This value should be the same as the value at which
the RPM offset was determined.
Typical Differential Mode Operational Sequence
See Figure 14 for a schematic of the Differential Mode Controller and its valves.
 Set RPM offset at desired static pressure (see Section 3.11.4.1, Selecting
Differential Mode, Setting Static Pressure, Finding RPM Offset (<1run>)).
 Select pressure to mass or mass to pressure mode (see Section 3.11.12).
 Put the Differential Mode Controller PG SHUTOFF valve in CLOSED position.
 If desired, read DUT output at zero differential pressure withTEST BYPASS valve open. Put TEST BYPASS valve in CLOSED position. If
desired, put CONTROL valve in STATIC P position and use system control
component to adjust static pressure to starting value.
 Press [ENTER] and enter a pressure or mass value. Load mass as instructed
on PG9000.
 Install bell jar on PG9000, shut the PG9000 vacuum vent valve, open vacuum
reference shutoff valve. Wait for vacuum under bell jar to reach Readycondition. If using AMH automated mass handler and mass loading resolution of
0.1kg, mass can be changed without breaking vacuum.
 Put CONTROL valve in PG position and use system control component to float
PG9000 piston. Slowly put PG SHUTOFF valve into OPEN position. Readjustpressure to float the PG9000 piston-cylinder if necessary.
 If desired, put CONTROL valve in STATIC P position and use system control
component to adjust static pressure to starting value.
 When PG9000 indicates Ready on all Ready/Not Ready indicators, take DUT
reading at differential pressure indicated on the top line of the PG9000 display.
Slowly put PG SHUTOFF valve in CLOSED position.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 62

3. GENERAL OPERATION

Shut vacuum reference shutoff valve, open vacuum vent valve. Wait forpressure under bell jar to return to ambient. Remove bell jar. This step is notnecessary is using AMH automated mass handler and mass loading resolutionof 0.1 kg.
Repeat Steps  throughfor each desired differential pressure point.

Setting Zero Differential Pressure
See Figure 14 for a schematic of the Differential Mode Controller and its valves.
Zero differential pressure can be set by PG9000 or simply by setting theDifferential Mode Controller TEST BYPASS valve to the OPEN position whichconnects the HIGH and LOW TEST ports together. The TEST BYPASS valve
OPEN position is a “true” zero. The zero differential pressure value set by
PG9000 has the same uncertainty as any other differential pressure point (seeSection 1.2.4). Comparing the DUT reading at zero set by TEST BYPASS in the
OPEN position and at zero set by PG9000 in differential mode like any other
differential pressure, can help quantify the quality of the current RPM
offset value. If the difference between the two zero readings is excessive, theRPM offset value should be redetermined (see Section 3.11.4.1, Selecting
Differential Mode, Setting Static Pressure, Finding RPM Offset (<1run>)).
Also, consider correcting all the DUT readings by the difference in the zeroreading found in the two different conditions to correct for the defect in the
RPM offset.
Viewing Static Pressure and RPM Offset (<2view>)
To view the current RPM offset and the static pressure value at which the offset
was recorded, press [MODE] and select <4dif>, <2view>. This display is:1.

RPM offset value that is currently active.

2.

PG9000 pressure at which RPM offset wasrecorded.

Offset: -6.33 Pa@99.8755 kPa a

Press [ESCAPE] to return to the <Differential mode:> menu.
Press [ENTER] to return to the previous run screen.

3.11.5[SYSTEM] PURPOSE
To access the two SYSTEM run screens which display current values of PG9000 pistonbehavior, piston-cylinder temperature and vacuum reference measurements.
 OPERATION
To access the SYSTEM run screens, press [SYSTEM] from any other run screen. There are
two or three SYSTEM run screens, depending on the PG9000 model (see Figure 13).
Pressing [SYSTEM] or [±] when in a SYSTEM screen rolls through SYSTEM screens.
See Sections 3.11.5.1through 3.11.5.3 for detailed information on the contents of the
SYSTEM run screens.

Note
The SYSTEM screens are run screens. This means that other functions
can be accessed from the SYSTEM screens and the active SYSTEM screen
will be returned to when leaving functions. The MAIN screen and
AMBIENT screen are also run screens (see Section 3.10).

Page 63© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3.11.5.1 First System Run Screen
Note
PG9607 is a unique configuration of PG9000 that utilizes afloating cylinder with a stationary piston. This is in contrast
with other PG9000 models that use a floating piston and astationary cylinder. For consistency ‘Piston’ refers to thefloating component on which mass is loaded in this and othernoted sections.
 OPERATION
The first SYSTEM run screen provides real time display of piston rotation rate,
decay in piston rotation rate, piston position and piston fall rate.
To access the first SYSTEM run screen, press [SYSTEM] from any otherrun screen.
The first SYSTEM run screen displays:
1.

<nnn rpm>:
Numerical value of current
piston rate of rotation. The unit of measure isrotations per minute [rpm] and cannot bechanged. Flashes when Not Ready andpiston is floating (see Section 3.4.2).
Indicates < ---- > when information isunavailable or out of range.
<±nn/min>: Numerical value of current decay
in piston rotation rate (deceleration). The unitof measure is rotations per minute [rpm/min]and cannot be changed. < ---- > when
information is unavailable or out of range.

2.

nnn rpm±n.nn mm±nn/min±n.nn/min

3.

<±n.nn/min>: Sign and numerical value of current piston vertical rate of displacement. A
negative value indicates piston falling. A positive value indicates piston rising. The unit of measureis millimeters per minute [mm/min] and cannot be changed. Indicates < ---- > when
information is unavailable or out of range.

4.

<±n.nn mm>: Sign and numerical value of current position of the piston within the piston
stroke (see Section 3.5). The unit of measure is millimeters [mm] away from mid-stroke
position and cannot be changed. Indicates <HSTOP> when the piston is at the high stop (all
the
way
up)
and
<LSTOP>when
thepiston
is
at
the
low
stop
(all the way down). Flashes when Not Ready and piston is floating (see Section 3.4.1). Indicates< ---- > when information is unavailable or out of range.

Pressing [ESCAPE] in the first SYSTEM run screen returns operation to the MAIN
run screen. Pressing [SYSTEM] or [±] advances to the second run screen.
Pressing [SYSTEM] or [±] again, advances to the third SYSTEM run screen. All
function keys are active from the first SYSTEM run screen and operation returns tothat screen when leaving functions they were accessed from it.

Note•

The measurement systems for piston behavior indications
rely on movement of the mass loading bell. Piston behavior
indications (piston position, piston rotation rate) are not valid
when the mass bell is not loaded on the piston.

•See Section 3.5 for information on the piston stroke andmeasurement zone.

3.11.5.2 Second System Run Screen
 OPERATIONThe second SYSTEM run screen displays the values of piston-cylinder
temperature and temperature rate of change measured by PG9000.
PG9000 also displays the value of the optional reference vacuum and vacuum
rate of change if present. If an optional external vacuum reference measurement
is present (see Sections 3.12 and 3.13.5.5), the second SYSTEM run screen
provides a real time display of the values measured.
© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 64

3. GENERAL OPERATION

To access the second SYSTEM run screen, press [SYSTEM] or [±] from the first
SYSTEM run screen. To access the first SYSTEM run screen, press [SYSTEM]
from any other run screen (see Figure 13).
The second SYSTEM run screen displays:
1.

<n.nn°C>:
Current
piston-cylinder
temperature. Source of value can be internalmeasurement, normal or user depending on
current SETUP selection (see Section 3.12).
The unit of measure is degrees Centigrade[°C] and cannot be changed. Indicates < ---- >when information is unavailable or out ofrange. PG9607 uses two internal PRTs tomeasure the piston cylinder temperature wheninternal temperature source is selected in
SETUP (see Section 3.12. The average ofthese two PRT measurements is shown in thisscreen.
The individual PRT temperature
measurements can be viewed in the third
SYSTEM screen (see Section 3.11.5.3).

n.nn°Cnnn.n Pa±n.nn/min±nnn.n/min

2.

<+n.nn/min>: Sign and numerical value of current rate of change of temperature. Wheninternal temperature source is selected for PG9000 the rate of change of temperature is basedon the average temperature of PG9607’s two internal PRTs. A negative value indicatestemperature decreasing. A positive value indicates temperature increasing. The unit ofmeasure is degrees Centigrade per minute [°C/min] and cannot be changed. Indicates < ---- >when information is unavailable or out of range. Indicates < ---- > when “user” or “normal” isthe current SETUP selection for piston-cylinder temperature source (see Section 3.12).

3.

<+nnn.n/min>: Sign and numerical value of current rate of change of the optional vacuum
reference pressure, if present. A negative value indicates pressure decreasing. A positive
value indicates pressure increasing. The unit of measure is Pascal per minute [Pa/min] andcannot be changed. Indicates < ---- > when information is unavailable or out of range.
Indicates < - TO - > if external device is not connected or communicating. Blank when ingauge or absolute by ATM modes.

4.

<nnn.n Pa>: Current vacuum reference value, if present (blank if not present). Can be normal
or other external measurement, normal or user depending on current SETUP selection.
Flashes when Not Ready and piston is floating (see Section 3.4.3). The unit of measure is
Pascal [Pa] and cannot be changed. Indicates < >13 Pa > if current SETUP selection isCOM2 and current measurement is out of range or greater than 13 Pascal. Indicates <- TO ->if external device is not connected or communicating. Blank when in gauge or absolute by
ATM modes.

Pressing [ESCAPE] in the second SYSTEM run screen returns operation to the
MAIN run screen. Pressing [SYSTEM] or [±] advances to the third SYSTEM run
screen. Pressing [SYSTEM] or [±] again, advances back to the first SYSTEM
run screen. All function keys are active from the second SYSTEM run screen
and operation returns to that screen when leaving functions that were accessedfrom it.

Note
The current selection in SETUP determines the source of thevalues used by PG9000 for piston-cylinder temperature andvacuum reference values. If the SETUP setting is user or
normal, the SYSTEM screen displays the user or normal value,
not PG9000’s on-board measurement(s).

3.11.5.3 Third System Run Screen
 OPERATION
The third SYSTEM run screen is only displayed on the PG9607. The third
SYSTEM run screen displays the individual values measured by PG9607’s twointernal PRTs.
To access the third SYSTEM run screen, press [SYSTEM] or [±] twice from thefirst SYSTEM run screen or once from the second SYSTEM run screen. To
access the first SYSTEM run screen, press [SYSTEM] from any run screen.

Page 65© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALThe second SYSTEM run screen displays:
1.

<n.nn°C>:
Current
piston-cylinder
temperature measured by the first internal
PRT when internal is selected as the pistoncylinder temperature source. When user or
normal is selected as the source of thistemperature measurement, the resulting fixed
temperature value is displayed in both
positions on this screen. (see Section 3.12).
The unit of measure is degrees Centigrade[°C] and cannot be changed. Indicates < ---- >when information is unavailable or out ofrange.

2.

<n.nn°C>:
Current
piston-cylinder
temperature measured by the second internal
PRT when internal is selected as the pistoncylinder temperature source. When user or
normal is selected as the source of thistemperature measurement, the resulting fixed
temperature value is displayed in both
positions on this screen. (see Section 3.12).
The unit of measure is degrees Centigrade[°C] and cannot be changed. Indicates < ---- >when information is unavailable or out ofrange.

n.nn°C
_n.nn°C

Pressing [ESCAPE] in the third SYSTEM run screen returns operation to the
MAIN run screen. Pressing [±] advances through the first, second and third
SYSTEM run screen. All function keys are active from the second SYSTEM run
screen and operation returns to that screen when leaving functions that wereaccessed from it.

Note
The current selection in SETUP determines the source of thevalues used by PG9000 for piston-cylinder temperature andvacuum reference values. If the SETUP setting is user or
normal, the SYSTEM screen displays the user or normal value,
not PG9000’s on-board measurement(s).

3.11.6[AMBIENT] PURPOSE
Access the AMBIENT run screen which displays the current ambient condition values being
used by PG9000 for calculations of reference pressures.
 PRINCIPLE
PG9000 uses ambient condition values to calculate the reference pressures that it defines(see Section 7.2). The source of the ambient condition values is specified in the current
SETUP file (see Section 3.12). The AMBIENT run screen displays the current ambientcondition values. If the SETUP selection for the ambient condition is internal measurement,
then the AMBIENT run screen provides a real time display of the measurement of PG9000’s
on-board sensor for that variable.
 OPERATION
To access the AMBIENT run screen, press [AMBIENT] from any other run screen(MAIN or SYSTEM).

Note
The AMBIENT screen is a run screen. This means that other functions canbe accessed from the AMBIENT screen and the active AMBIENT screen
will be returned to when leaving functions. The MAIN screen and SYSTEM
screens are also run screens (see Sections 3.9 and 3.11.5).

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 66

3. GENERAL OPERATIONThe AMBIENT run screen displays:
1.

<nnnnnnn uuuu>: Current numerical value and pressure
unit of atmospheric pressure. Source of value can be internalmeasurement, remote barometer, normal or user depending
on current SETUP selection (see Section 3.12). The unit ofmeasure is determined by the UNIT function setting (seeSection 3.11.3). ATM head is applied to internal or externalbarometer reading to correct atmospheric pressure to the
PG9000 reference level (see Section 3.13.3). Indicates < ---> when information is unavailable or out of range. Indicates<TIMEOUT> if the current SETUP selection is a remotebarometer and PG9607 communication with the barometertimes out.

nnnnnnn uuuu nn.n°C
nn%RH
n.nnnnnn/s22.

<n.nn°C>: Current ambient temperature. Source of value can be internal measurement, normal or user
depending on current SETUP selection (see Section 3.10). The unit of measure is degrees Centigrade [ºC]and cannot be changed. Indicates < ---- > when information is unavailable or out of range.

3.

<n.nnnnnnm/s2>: Value of local acceleration due to gravity. Can be normal or user depending on current SETUP
selection (see Section 3.10). The unit of measure is meters per second squared (m/s2) and cannot be changed.

4.

<nn%RH>: Current ambient relative humidity. Can be internal measurement, normal or user depending on
current SETUP selection (see Section 3.12). The unit of measure is percent relative humidity (%RH) andcannot be changed. Indicates < -- > if current SETUP selection is internal and current measurement isunavailable or out of range.

Pressing [ESCAPE] in the AMBIENT run screen returns operation to the MAIN run screen.
All function keys are active from the AMBIENT run screen and operation returns to thatscreen when leaving functions that were accessed from it.

Note•

The current selection in SETUP determines the source of the values
used by PG9000 for atmospheric pressure, ambient temperature andrelative humidity. If the SETUP setting for these values is user or
normal, the AMBIENT screen displays the user or normal value, not
PG9000’s on-board measurement(s).

•To change the ambient pressure units of measure, see Section 3.11.3.
When the current pressure unit of measure is an altitude unit,
atmospheric pressure in the AMBIENT run screen is expressed in kPa
if the altitude unit is meters (m) or psi if the altitude unit is feet (ft).

3.11.7[HEAD]

 PURPOSE
To cause a pressure value, representing the fluid head resulting from a difference in height,
to be added to the pressure defined by PG9000 at its reference level. To set the height of the
DUT head.
 PRINCIPLE
Calculation of the fluid head requires determination of the difference in height between the
PG9000 reference level and the level of the DUT. The PG9000 reference level takes into
consideration the piston-cylinder natural reference level, geometry and position.
The natural reference level of a piston-cylinder is defined as the height at which changes influid density have no effect on the defined pressure. For a solid floating piston the naturalreference level is located at the bottom of the piston. For hollow pistons the geometry isirregular and the natural reference level is located above the bottom of the piston. For a
floating cylinder (PG9607) the geometry is irregular and the natural reference level is near
the bottom surface of the cylinder cap. In order to create a convenient, single location forreference level determination the PG9000 defines the reference level as the location of solid
pistons at mid stroke. The calculated reference level offset of hollow pistons and floating
cylinders normalizes the different natural reference levels to the same height for convenience– the position of a solid piston at mid stroke or reference level (see Figure 15). In this way
the DUT height does not need to be determined for each piston-cylinder that is used.

Page 67© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Note•

See Section 7.2.2 for information on calculation of the three fluid headcorrection functions.

•

It is important to include the DUT head, reference level offset andpiston position if performing pressure calculations independently of
the PG9000 platform (see Section 7.2.2 for PG9000 fluid headcalculations).

•

Piston position relative to the mid stroke position is automaticallycorrected in the piston head calculation which can be turned ON or
OFF (see Section 3.13.3.4).

The pressure defined by a PG9000 floating piston is the pressure at the PG9000 reference
level. The reference level is shown in Figure 15 for PG9000 platforms. Frequently, when
performing a calibration or test, the device or system under test is at a different height than
the PG9000 reference level. This difference in height (referred to as DUT head) can cause asignificant difference between the pressure defined by the PG9000 at its reference level andthe pressure actually applied to the device under test located at a different height. In thiscase, it is useful to make a head correction to the pressure defined by the PG9000 at its
reference level in order to accurately predict the pressure actually applied at a different
height. The HEAD function allows this head correction to be applied automatically for a variety
of fluids based on operator entry of the height difference. The fluid used and the HEAD function
units of measure are set by pressing [SPECIAL] and selecting <3head> (seeSection 3.13.3).

Figure 15. PG9000 Platform Reference Level Location

PG9000 can accurately determine head pressures for gases (nitrogen, helium and air) and liquids(Di-2 ethylhexyl Sebacate oil, water and a user defined liquid) as the pressurized medium.
 OPERATION
To access the HEAD function, press [HEAD]. The display is:1.

Test fluid currently specified for the head correction.

2.

Entry field for head height (-999 to 999 cm or in.).

Edit DUT head height
95 cm
N2

Entering a value of zero turns the HEAD function OFF. Entering a value other than zeroturns the HEAD function ON using the height entered. Pressing [ESCAPE] returns to themain run screen with NO change to the current head setting.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 68

3. GENERAL OPERATION

Note•

The DUT head height should be entered as a positive value if thedevice or system under test is higher than the PG9000 reference leveland negative if it is lower (see Figure 15).

•

The reference level is indicated by the piston mounting surface (for
PG9607), the marking on mounting post (other PG9000 models) or
may be taken as a distance from the platform baseplate (see Figure
15).

•

To change units of DUT head height between inches and centimeters
and to change the test fluid, press [SPECIAL] and select <3Head> (seeSection 3.13.3).

•

When the HEAD function is ON (DUT head value different from 0), theapplication of a head correction is indicated by <h> in the right side of
the top line of the MAIN run screen (see Section 3.9). When the HEAD
function is OFF, the <h> is NOT shown. PG9000’s also have aseparate head correction to compensate for the deviation between thecurrent piston position and mid-stroke (see Section 3.13.3.4). ThisPISTON head can be turned ON and OFF (see Section 3.11.3.4).

3.11.8[ROTATE]
Note

PG9607 is a unique configuration of PG9000 that utilizes a floating cylinder
with a stationary piston. This is in contrast with other PG9000 models thatuse a floating piston and a stationary cylinder. For consistency ‘Piston’refers to the floating component on which mass is loaded in this and othernoted sections.
 PURPOSE
To turn automatic control of motorized piston rotation (acceleration and brake) ON and OFF.

Note
See Section 3.11.13 for information on manual control of motorized piston
rotation.
 PRINCIPLE
The motorized piston rotation system is used to start or increase piston rotation rate when thepiston is floating. It is also used to stop piston rotation when necessary, for example before
manipulating mass to set a new pressure. The system operates by engaging a motor driven
belt around the bottom of the mass loading bell to accelerate or brake the rotation rate of themass bell and piston it is loaded on. The motorized rotation system can engage with thepiston at any position in its stroke and at any rotation speed with minimal impact on piston
position and the defined pressure. When the motorized rotation system disengages, thepiston is completely free.
With automatic motorized rotation ON, the motorized rotation system engages anddisengages automatically as needed when the piston is floating to maintain the piston rotation
rate above the minimum rate Ready limit (see Section 3.4.2). The rotation rate is measured
by PG9000 on board sensors and the rotation rate limits are set in the file of the active piston
cylinder (see Section 3.13.1.1). Whenever the piston is floating, the motorized rotation
system will attempt to maintain the piston rotation rate within the Ready limits (except under
the cutoff mass load of 3 kg, at which the low limit is reduced to minimum to maximize freerotation time. The piston rotation Ready/Not Ready indication character indicates Not Readyto alert the operator when the motorized rotation system is about to engage. The rotation
system will not engage when the current mass load is less than the mass of the piston +mass loading bell.
The motorized rotation system is also used to brake and stop rotation when starting a newpressure point. If the piston is floating and rotating when [ENTER/SET P] is pressed, thePage 69© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

motorized rotation system engages at a speed near the rotation rate of the piston and thenbrakes it to a stop. Piston rotation is stopped to avoid loading and unloading masses on therotating piston and to avoid stopping rotation by friction between the piston and the piston
end of stroke stops.
With automatic motorized rotation OFF, the motorized rotation system engages only when
actuated by the operator. Pressing [ ] accelerates rotation or [ ] followed by [←] stops
rotation (see Section 3.11.13).
Automatic motorized rotation is generally left ON for normal operation. It is turned OFF insituations where rotation system actuation independent of operator initiative is undesired(e.g. when performing a crossfloat intercomparison with another piston gauge).
 OPERATION
To access the AutoRotate[ROTATE]. The display is:functions,press

AutoRotate OFF
1on 2pre-decel<AutoRotate ON> or <AutoRotate OFF> indicates the current state of AutoRotate. Use<1on> or <1off> to change the state.
When automated rotation is OFF, the PG9000 motorized rotation system will only engage if
the operator presses [ ] or [ ] followed by [←] (see Section 3.11.13).
When automated rotation is ON, the automated rotation system engages automatically.
When the piston is floating, it engages as needed to maintain the piston rotation rate above
the Ready limit (see Section 3.4.2). When [ENTER/SET P] is pressed, it engages to stop
rotation before masses are loaded and/or the pressure is adjusted (this function can beturned ON and OFF, see Section 3.11.8.1). Manual control using [ ] and [ ] followed by[←] is also still active.

Note•

Automatic motorized piston rotation is dependent on PG9000’s
measurements of piston position and rotation rate.
These
measurements are only available when the mass loading bell isinstalled on the piston. Automatic piston rotation is suspended when
the current PG9000 mass load does not include the mass loading bell.

•

Proper operation of the rotation system is dependent on PG9000’s
measurements of piston position. When using AutoGen, be sure thatthe piston position indication system is properly adjusted (see Section
5.2.2).

•

When PG9000 is operating in absolute by vacuum mode using theinternal vacuum sensor to measure reference vacuum, automatic
motorized piston rotation will not engage until the reference vacuum
value is within the Ready limit (see Section 3.4.3).

3.11.8.1 <2Pre-Decel>
 PURPOSE
To turn ON and OFF a function that causes the automated rotation system tobegin the piston rotation deceleration when [ENTER/SET P] is pressed rather
than at the time mass is to be loaded.
On a PG9000 Platform equipped with motorized rotation, when AutoRotate is on,
the piston rotation deceleration function is used to stop rotation before masses
are loaded or pressure is adjusted. As the deceleration function can take up to
one minute to execute, it can be initiated the moment that [ENTER/SET P] ispressed to enter a new pressure or mass target. The deceleration function thenruns while the new target value is being entered. However, when the next target
does not require changing main masses, it may not be necessary to stop piston
rotation. In these cases, the running the deceleration function is probably notdesired and it is not beneficial for piston deceleration to initiate it when

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 70

3. GENERAL OPERATION[ENTER/SET P] is pressed. For this reason, the function to start piston
deceleration when [ENTER/SET P] is pressed can be turned ON and OFF.
If pre-deceleration is ON and AutoRotate is ON, piston rotation deceleration
always initiates immediately when [ENTER/SET P] is pressed.
If pre-deceleration is OFF and AutoRotate is ON, piston rotation deceleration
occurs after entry of the pressure or mass target value and only if the new target
requires changing main masses with a manual mass set or operation AMH if anautomated mass handling system is active.
 OPERATION
To turn ON and OFF the function that causes stopping piston rotation to initiate
when [ENTER/SET P] is pressed, press [ROTATE], <2pre-decel>. The cursor
is on the choice corresponding to the current state. Select <2on> for piston
rotation deceleration to initiate when [ENTER/SET P] is pressed. Select <1off>for deceleration to initiate only after entry of a new pressure or mass target andonly if main masses need to be moved or AMH automated mass handling needs
to be operated. The default is <2on>.

3.11.9[GEN] (Optional)

 PURPOSE
To turn ON and OFF automated pressure generation/control and view and edit automatedpressure control settings.
Requires that an automated pressure generation/control
component be included in the PG9000 system and properly configured (see Section 2.4.11).
 PRINCIPLE
PG9000s support automated pressure generation/control components. These components, whenproperly configured and interfaced with the PG9000 platform, are controlled by the PG9000
platform to automatically set and adjust pressure to float the piston. Automated pressure
generation and control components are interfaced via the PG9000 platform’s COM3 RS232
port (see Section 3.13.5.1).
Once an automated pressure generation/control component has been properly configured
and interfaced with the PG9000 platform, the functions under [GEN] are used to turnautomated pressure generation/control ON and OFF and to set operating parameters
associated with automated pressure control.
With automated pressure generation/control ON, PG9000 uses the automated control
component to float and refloat its piston when a pressure or mass value is entered.
[ENTER/SET P] is pressed to initiate a new command. The automated control function issuspended when any function key is pressed, when entering remote mode or if automatedpressure control is turned OFF.
After a target pressure or mass has been entered (locally or remotely) and the required mass
has been loaded, the GEN function controls the pressure control component as needed tofloat the PG9000 piston at the piston float target (see Section 3.11.9.1) and refloat it ifnecessary. If the piston moves beyond the high or low piston position Ready limit the GENfunction refloats it to the piston float target. The piston float target and piston position readylimits are user adjustable (see Section 3.12.2 and 3.12.3 <6READY>). See Section 3.5,
Figure 9 for a description piston position stroke zones and limits.
With automated pressure generation/control OFF, PG9000 leaves the automatedpressure generation/control component idle and does not attempt to use it.
If an automated pressure control component is included in the PG9000 system, automatedpressure generation/control is generally left ON for normal operation. It is turned OFF insituations where pressure control independent of operator initiative is undesired (e.g. when
performing a crossfloat intercomparison with another piston gauge).
The [GEN] menu includes:
1. Turning the GEN function ON and OFF.
2. The adjustable piston float target that defines the position to which the piston is set
when floated (see Section 3.11.9.1).
Page 71© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3. A choice to have the piston raised to the top of the stroke before manipulating
mass using an AMH automated mass handler (see Section 3.11.9.2).
4. Viewing and setting the UPPER LIMIT of the automated pressure generation
component to avoid accidental overpressure (see Section 3.11.9.3).
5. Viewing and setting the assumed pressure controller tolerance used to determinepressure setting limits when floating the PG9000 piston (see Section 3.11.9.4).
6. A choice to not readjust piston position if the piston is already floating within the
Ready position limit after a new target is executed (see Section 3.11.9.5).
 OPERATION
To access the GEN functions, press [GEN].
display is:

The

AutoGen OFF
1on
2target 3raise 4UL 
5tol 6refloat<AutoGen ON> or <AutoGen OFF> indicates the current state of AutoGen. Use <1on> or<1off> to change the state.
If automated pressure control is OFF, PG9000 attempts to turn automated pressure control
ON when <1on> is pressed. To do so, communication must be established with a valid
automated pressure control component over its COM3 RS232 port (see Section 3.13.5.1). If
PG9000 is not able to establish communication with a valid pressure control component, <P
control timeout, autogen off> is displayed momentarily. Correct the communications error
with the pressure control component and try again. If PG9000 is able to establish
communications with a valid automated pressure control component, <Turning ON
automated generation> is displayed momentarily and automated control is turned ON.
The PG9000 automated control function will attempt to float the piston within the piston
position ready limits (see Section 3.4.1) after any mass to pressure or pressure to masscommand once mass loading has been confirmed. It will continue to attempt to float its
piston until [ENTER] is pressed to initiate a new command, a function key is pushed tointerrupt AugoGen, or automated pressure control is turned OFF using [GEN].
If automated pressure control is ON and <1off> is pressed, <Turning OFF automatedgeneration> is displayed momentarily and automated control is turned OFF. The PG9000
automated control function is inactive.

Note•

Automated pressure generation/control ON is indicated by a <G> inthe right of the top line of the PG Terminal main run screen. The <G>
flashes when automated generation is active (see Section 3.9).

•

Proper operation of the automated pressure generation/control
function is dependent on PG9000’s measurements of piston position.
When using AutoGen, be sure that the piston position indication
system is properly adjusted (see Section 5.2.2).

•

Proper operation of the automated pressure generation/control
function is dependent on PG9000’s measurements of piston position
and rotation rate. These measurements are only available when themass loading bell is installed on the piston. Automated pressure
generation/control is automatically turned off when the PG9000
entered pressure or mass load does not include the mass loading bell.

 Caution
To help protect against accidental overpressure, when using automatedpressure generation/control, set the upper limit (UL) of the pressure
control system using [GEN], <4UL> (see Section 3.11.9.3).

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 72

3. GENERAL OPERATION

3.11.9.1 <2target>
 PURPOSE
To adjust the distance from midstroke to which the piston position must be set
before the automated generation system considers the piston floating processcomplete (see Sections 3.11.9, 3.5).
 OPERATION
To adjust the AutoGen piston float target press [GEN], <2target>. Edit the value ofthe target as desired. The default is + 1 mm. The entry should not exceed + 2.5 mm.

3.11.9.2 <3raise> PURPOSE
To turn ON and OFF a function that causes the automated generation component (seeSection 3.11.9.) to raise the PG9000 piston to the top of its stroke before automatedmass manipulation by an AMH automated mass handler. This can avoid a largepressure change which may occur in certain circumstances when AMH lifts the massload off of the piston.
 OPERATION
To turn ON and OFF the raise piston before mass loading function, press [GEN],<3raise>. The cursor is on the choice corresponding to the current state. Select <1no>for the piston not to be raised or <2yes> to raise the piston. The default is <1no>.

3.11.9.3 <4UL> PURPOSE
To read and/or set the UPPER LIMIT (UL) of the automated pressure generation
component used by AutoGen. This function is used to protect against accidental
overpressure when using the PG9000 automated pressure generation function (seeSection 3.11.9 and the generation component’s Operation and Maintenance Manual,
UL section)
 OPERATION
To view or set the UPPER LIMIT of the automated pressure control component
used by AutoGen, press [GEN], <4UL>.
If AutoGen is not currently ON, the control component UPPER LIMIT cannot be
accessed and an error message is displayed.
If AutoGen is ON, the current UPPER LIMIT of the automated control component
is displayed and can be edited.
The automated pressure control component will abort pressure generation andbeep repeatedly if its UPPER LIMIT is exceeded.

3.11.9.4 <5tol>
 PURPOSE
To read and/or set the pressure measuring tolerance of the pressure controller used by
AutoGen to automate pressure control.

Note
This function is used when the pressure controller is a PPC3 or
PPC4.
 PRINCIPLE
The control tolerance function can be used to reduce the time required to set pressureand float the PG9000 piston when the pressure controller used is significantly moreaccurate than the default tolerance value. The tolerance can also be described as thedegree of agreement between the pressure control’s pressure measurement and thePage 73© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

pressure value set by the PG9000 when its piston is floating. In general, making thetolerance smaller reduces the time required to float the piston and making the tolerance
wider increases the time. However, if the tolerance is set too small so that it does notcorrectly reflect the degree of agreement between the pressure controller pressure
measurement and the PG9000’s floating piston, overshoot of the piston float point or
inability to float the piston will result.
The pressure controller tolerance determines, when applicable:a) the distance from the actual pressure target that pressure is set before the
AutoGen function begins to seek movement of the piston.
b) the amount of pressure overshoot that must occur before “forced rotation” isused to overcome possible friction between the piston and the cylinder.

Note
This function is used when the pressure controller is a PPC3 or
PPC4.
 OPERATION
To view or set the pressure control tolerance, press [GEN], <5tol>.
The current value of the pressure control tolerance is displayed. The value is in% of full scale of the pressure controller. If the pressure controller is
AutoRanged, the AutoRange maximum pressure is used as full scale (see thepressure controller’s Operation and Maintenance Manual).
The default tolerance value is 0.05% of full scale.
Edit the tolerance value if desired. Do not make the pressure tolerance less than
the worst case agreement between the pressure controller pressure measurement
and the pressure indicated by the PG9000 when its piston is floating.

3.11.9.5 <6refloat> PURPOSE
To turn ON and OFF a function that causes the automated generation component (seeSection 3.11.9) to refloat the piston to the target piston position after a new pressure or
mass target is entered, even if the piston is already floating within the piston position
Ready limits. When Refloat is ON, the piston is always refloated to the target piston
position after a new pressure or mass target command. This gives the full stroke of thepiston to drop before refloat is necessary. When Refloat is OFF, the time required toactivate the pressure control component and refloat the piston is eliminated if it is notneeded. This can result in very rapid pressure setting when the piston is still floating
after a mass load change.
 OPERATION
To turn ON and OFF the Refloat function, press [GEN], <6refloat>. The cursor is on
the choice corresponding to the current state. Select <1no> for the piston NOT to becontrolled to the target position after a pressure or mass command if the piston isalready in the Ready piston position limits. Select <2yes> for the piston to always to becontrolled to the raise the piston. The default is <2yes>.

3.11.10 [RES] PURPOSE
To set the resolution with which PG9000 loads mass in response to pressure or masscommands (see Section 3.11.12).

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 74

3. GENERAL OPERATION PRINCIPLE
PG9000 piston-cylinders are sized such that there is a whole number, nominal relationshipbetween mass loaded on the piston in kilograms [kg] and the pressure at which the piston will
float in kilo Pascal [kPa] or Mega Pascal [MPa]. This relationship is called the pressure tomass conversion coefficient and is expressed as kPa/kg or MPa/kg. The pressure to massconversion coefficient is marked on the cap of each piston.
PG9000 mass sets are made up of masses in multiples and submultiples of the kilogrammaking it simple to load mass values rounded to 0.01 g, 1 g, 10 g or 0.1 kg.
When using PG9000 to define pressure, the desired pressure value is entered (see Section
3.9.11) and PG9000 prompts the user with the mass value to be loaded. Due to the many
variables that influence the exact pressure to mass relationship for a piston-cylinder(even though there is nominally a whole number mass to pressure relationship) the mass value toload to reach exactly the pressure requested is always an odd value. Therefore, defining the exact
pressure value requested always requires loading mass with 0.01 g resolution.
When it is acceptable for the pressure values defined to not be exactly the nominal pressure valueof the point, operation can be simplified and mass loading errors can be reduced by loading mass
with a lower level of resolution and using the pressure that the lower level resolution mass load
generates. For example, on a piston-cylinder with a nominal pressure to mass relationship of 10
kPa/kg, defining a pressure of exactly 100 kPa, nominally requires loading 10 kg of mass.
However, once all the influences on the measurement are taken into consideration, the actual
mass to load to define exactly 100 kPa will not be 10.00000 kg, it will be a value near 10 kg suchas 9.99731 kg. This value is difficult to load, as it requires relatively complex mass accounting
and the manipulation of very small sub-gram masses. To avoid handling a difficult, odd mass
value, one might instead decide to load 10 kg and use whatever pressure results as thereference pressure. In this example, loading 10 kg rather than 9.99731 kg would result in defining
100.0269 kPa rather than 100.0000 kPa. The pressure defined is only very slightly different fromthe nominal value and there is no additional uncertainty if that value is used. The savings in timeand reduction of possible mass loading errors are significant.
The PG9000 RES function is used to cause PG9000 to automatically calculate mass loads to awhole number value starting at 0.01 g and increasing in powers of 10 to 0.1 kg. This function is very
useful to make operation more convenient and less error prone when it is not imperative that thepressure defined by PG9000 be exactly the nominal pressure of the test or calibration sequence.

Note
The mass loading resolution of AMH automated mass handling systems is
0.1 kg. The default mass loading resolution when AMH is initialized is 0.1
kg. If resolution finer than 0.1 kg is set when AMH is active, the AMH loads
the required mass value wit 0.1 kg resolution and the operator is promptedwith an instruction to load the trim mass under 0.1 kg. For fully automatedoperation, the mass loading resolution should always be set to 0.1 kg.
 OPERATION
To access the resolution function, press [RES]. The
display is:

Mass loading rsltn:
0.01 g< and >

Press the [←] and [→] keys to select the desired level of resolution. [←] decreases
resolution and [→] increases resolution. Press [ENTER] to set the selected resolution andreturn to the main run screen. The resolution range is from 0.01 g to 0.1 kg in powers of 10.

Note
The RES setting has no affect in mass to pressure mode. The RES setting
only affects the resolution of the mass commands that result frompressure entries in pressure to mass mode (see Section 3.11.12).

Page 75© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3.11.11 [ENTER/SET P] From Run Screen
 PURPOSE
To enter and execute pressure to mass or mass to pressure commands (seeSection 3.11.12).
 PRINCIPLE
PG9000 can calculate and display the mass to be loaded to achieve an entered pressure
value (pressure to mass mode), or the pressure resulting from an entered mass load (massto pressure mode). The P OR M function is used to set pressure to mass or mass to pressuremode (see Section 3.11.12).
Pressing [ENTER/SET P] from any run screen (MAIN, SYSTEM or AMBIENT) accesses thepressure or mass entry screen which allows the command value to be entered and proceeds
through the sequence to set or read the pressure defined by PG9000.
 OPERATION
To access the pressure or mass entry screen, press [ENTER/SET P] from any run screen. The
sequence after [ENTER/SET P] has been pressed varies between mass to pressure andpressure to mass mode. The mode is selected by pressing [P OR M] (see Section 3.11.12).
See Section 3.11.11.1 for details on [ENTER/SET P] in pressure to mass mode and Section
3.11.11.2for mass to pressure mode. See immediately below for typical operational sequencesin gauge and absolute modes. See Section 3.11.4.1, Operating in Differential Mode, fortypical differential mode operational sequence.
Typical Gauge and Absolute by ATM Mode Operational Sequence Press [MODE] and select gauge or absolute by ATM mode as desired (see Section
3.11.4).
 Press [P OR M] and select pressure to mass or mass to pressure mode (see Section
3.11.12).
 Press [ENTER/SET P] and enter a pressure or mass value. If the piston is floating and
AutoRoate is ON, the braking function engages to stop piston rotation (see Section 3.11.8.1).
 Load mass as instructed (see Section 3.6). If an AMH automated mass handling systemis active, the mass is loaded automatically with resolution of 0.1 kg.
 Use the system pressure control component to float the PG9000 piston. If the AutoGenfunction is ON, the automated pressure control component floats the piston automatically(see Section 3.11.9).
 When PG9000 indicates Ready on all Ready/Not Ready indicators (see Section 3.4), take a
DUT reading at the pressure indicated on the top line of PG9000 display.
 Repeat Steps  through  for each desired pressure value.
Typical Absolute by Vacuum Mode Operational Sequence Press [MODE] and absolute by vacuum (avac) mode (see Section 3.11.4).
 Press [P OR M] and select pressure to mass or mass to pressure mode (see Section
3.11.12).
 Press [ENTER/SET P] and enter a pressure or mass value.
If AutoRoate is ON, thebraking function engages to stop piston rotation (see Section 3.11.8.1).
 Load mass as instructed (see Section 3.6).
If an AMH automated mass handlingsystem is active, the mass is loaded automatically to resolution of 0.1 kg.
 Install bell jar on PG9000, shut PG9000 vacuum vent valve, open vacuum reference
shutoff valve. Wait for vacuum under bell jar to reach Ready condition (see Section 3.4.3).
 Use system pressure control component to float the PG9000 piston. If the AutoGenfunction is ON, the automated pressure control component floats the piston automatically(see Section 3.11.9).
 When PG9000 indicates Ready on all Ready/Not Ready indicators (see Section 3.4), take a
DUT reading at absolute pressure indicated on the top line of the PG9000 display.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 76

3. GENERAL OPERATION Shut vacuum reference shutoff valve, open vacuum vent valve. Wait for pressure underbell jar to return to ambient. Remove bell jar. If an AMH automated mass handlingsystem is active and mass loading resolution is 0.1 kg, the vacuum does not need to bebroken and reestablished at each increment since the masses are moved automatically.
 Repeat Steps  through  for each desired pressure point.

3.11.11.1 [ENTER/SET P] In Pressure To Mass Mode
 PURPOSE
To enter and execute a pressure to mass command in pressure to mass mode(see Section 3.11.12).
 OPERATION
Put the PG9000 in pressure to mass operation mode (see Section 3.11.12), thenpress [ENTER/SET P] in any run screen. If automated rotation is on, the<DECELERATING> screen shows until piston deceleration is complete.

Note
Pressing [ENTER] in the run screen causes automated pressure
generation to be suspended if ON (see Section 3.11.9) and
AutoRotate to stop piston rotation if ON (see Section 3.11.8).
When [ENTER] is pressed to confirm mass entry, automatedpressure generation and/or motorized rotation resume.
The display is:1.

Current measurement mode (see Section
3.11.4).

2.

Current pressure unit of measure (see Section
3.11.3).

3.

Entry field for the target value of pressure to
be set.

Target pressure:100.0000 kPa a

Use the numerical keys and editing keys to enter the target pressure value desired.
Press [ENTER/SET P] to process the target pressure value. If the pressure
value entered cannot be executed, an explanatory error message is displayed
momentarily and operation returns to the target pressure entry screen with theprevious target pressure value displayed. If the target pressure value entered isvalid, the value is processed and operation proceeds to the mass loading
instruction screen. The display is:1.

Mass to load using trim masses.

2.

Nominal mass to load using main andfractional masses.

Load nominal mass:
10.0 kg and 3.17 g

Note
If an AMH automated mass handling system is active and massloading resolution is set to 0.1 kg, the AMH loads the mass
automatically. As it does, the steps of its operation aredisplayed. If resolution is set to higher than 0.1 kg, the operator
is prompted to load the trim mass value.
With PG9000 in absolute by vacuum measurement mode (see Section 3.11.4),
the instruction is <Load mass & vac:> indicating that the nominal mass value
should be loaded and then the bell jar should be installed and vacuum
established under the bell jar.
Load the nominal mass value following the protocol described in Section 3.6 andpress [ENTER/SET P]. When [ENTER/SET P] is pressed confirming that the

Page 77© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

nominal mass value has been loaded, operation returns to the previous run
screen with the new pressure target and mass value active.

 Caution
To make “in tolerance” measurements, it is imperative that all
mass loading instructions be executed following the protocol
describe in Section 3.6. This ensures that the actual mass value
resulting from a nominal mass loading command will becorrect. Failure to load masses following the PG9000 massloading protocol is likely to result in out of tolerance mass load
determinations and pressure definitions.

Note•

The resolution with which the pressure to mass mode massloading instruction is given depends on the resolution set in
the RES function. The RES function makes it possible to
avoid loading high resolution mass values when it is notimperative that the pressure defined be exactly the nominalpressure requested (see Section 3.11.10).

•

The pressure to mass loading instruction is given in nominal
mass while the main run screen displays the true mass
loaded. For this reason, the nominal mass loading instruction
and the true mass displayed in the main run screen are slightly
different values. This is normal operation (see Section 3.6).

3.11.11.2 [ENTER/SET P] In Mass To Pressure Mode
 PURPOSE
To enter and execute a mass to pressure command in mass to pressure mode(see Section 3.11.12).
 OPERATION
Put the PG9000 in mass to pressure operation mode (see Section 3.11.12), thenpress [ENTER/SET P] in any run screen. If automated rotation is on, the<DECELERATING> screen shows until piston deceleration is complete.

Note
Pressing [ENTER] in the run screen causes automated pressure
generation to be suspended if ON (see Section 3.9.9) and
AutoRotate to stop piston rotation if ON (see Section 3.9.8).
When [ENTER] is pressed to confirm mass entry, automatedpressure generation and/or motorized rotation resume.
The display is:1.

Edit field for total trim mass currently loaded.

2.

Edit field for nominal mass of main andfractional masses currently loaded.

Load nominal mass:
10.0 kg and 3.17 g

Use the numerical and editing keys to enter the nominal mass to be loaded on
the piston following the mass loading protocol described in Section 3.6.
Press [ENTER/SET P] to process the mass value. If the mass value enteredcannot be executed, an explanatory error message is displayed momentarily andoperation returns to the mass entry screen with the previous nominal mass value
displayed. If the mass value entered is valid, the value is processed andoperation proceeds to the previous run screen with the new mass value active.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 78

3. GENERAL OPERATION Caution
To make “in tolerance” measurements, it is imperative that thevalue of mass loaded on the piston be the NOMINAL mass
following the protocol describe in Section 3.6. This ensuresthat PG9000 will correctly determine the true mass value
loaded. Failure to enter nominal mass values following the
PG9000 mass loading protocol is likely to result in out of
tolerance mass load determination and pressure definitions.

Note•

The setting of the RES function has no effect on the
resolution of mass load entries in mass to pressure mode(see Section 3.11.10).

•

The mass to pressure mass entry is expressed in nominal mass
while the MAIN run screen displays the true mass loaded. For
this reason, the nominal mass loading instruction and the true
mass displayed in the main run screen are slightly different
values. This is normal operation (see Section 3.6).

3.11.11.3 Commands for zero pressure, ending a test
Entering a value of zero as the target pressure is a convenient way to end a test
and vent the automated pressure control component when AutoGen is ON.
Entering a value of zero in pressure to mass mode causes the following
sequence to occur:
 Stop piston rotation if AutoRotate is ON.
 Vent pressure control component if AutoGen is ON or prompt operator to vent.
 A special run screen displays reflecting that the PG9000 is at rest and themass loading bell may not be installed. The display is:1.

<?> in ready/not ready indicator positions asstatus of piston is unknown since mass loading
bell may not be installed.

2.

Unknown pressure except in absolute byatmosphere measurement mode in which thecurrent value of atmospheric pressure isdisplayed. This is the value of absolute byatmospheric pressure when the system isvented.

3.

Unknown/meaningless mass load.

4.

Unknown/meaningless piston position.

???----- psi a--- mm --------kg

3.11.12 [P OR M]
 PURPOSE
To select between PG9000 pressure to mass or mass to pressure operation mode.
 PRINCIPLE
Piston gauges are generally used either to define desired pressure set points (e.g. when
applying reference pressures to a device to be calibrated) or to measure a static pressure(e.g. when performing a crossfloat intercomparison with another piston gauge).
PG9000s support these two typical situations with two operating modes: pressure to massand mass to pressure.
In pressure to mass operating mode, the operator enters target pressure values and the
PG9000 provides instructions of the mass to load to achieve the desired target pressure.
In mass to pressure operating mode, the operator enters the mass currently loaded and the
PG9000 determines the pressure resulting from the current mass load. Mass to pressuremode is also useful to determine the true mass resulting from a nominal mass load (seeSection 3.6).
Page 79© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALThe P OR M function is used to set the PG9000 operating mode to either pressure to mass ormass to pressure.
 OPERATIONNote
For details on pressure to mass and mass to pressure operation, see
Section 3.11.11.
To access the P OR M function, press [P OR M],
the display is:

Select entry mode:
1pressure 2mass

Selecting <1pressure> activates pressure to mass mode and returns to the previous run screen.
Selecting <2mass> activates mass to pressure mode and returns to the previous run screen.

3.11.13 [ ] and [ ], [←]Note
PG9607 is a unique configuration of PG9000 that utilizes a floating cylinder
with a stationary piston. This is in contrast with other PG9000 models thatuse a floating piston and a stationary cylinder. For consistency ‘Piston’refers to the floating component on which mass is loaded in this and othernoted sections.
 PURPOSE
To activate motorized piston rotation manually.
 PRINCIPLE
Motorized rotation engages and disengages to rotate or stop the rotation of the PG9000
piston.
Motorized rotation can be set to operate automatically to maintain the piston within Readycondition rotation rate limits when the piston is floating and stop rotation before changing thepressure or mass load (see Section 3.11.8). Motorized rotation can also be engaged
manually to accelerate or brake piston rotation at any time under direct operator control.
[ ] is used for momentary acceleration of piston rotation. [ ] followed by [←] is used tostart a function that stops piston rotation.
 OPERATION
To momentarily engage the motorized piston rotation system and accelerate the piston, press[ ] from any run screen. If PG9000 is equipped with motorized rotation, the motorized
rotation system engages and remains engaged until maximum rotation rate has beenachieved or the key is released.
st
The display is a modified version of the 1 system run screen to indicate the piston rotation is
being accelerated while showing rotation rate and position:

1.

Current piston rotation rate.

2.

Current rate of piston vertical displacement.

3.

Current piston position.

12 rpm ACCELERATING+ 2.05 mm
0.1/minTo start the piston braking function press and hold [ ], then press [←]. The motorized
rotation system engages and stays engaged until the piston rotation is stopped. Once thebraking function starts the keys may be released and the function will complete unless[ESCAPE] is pressed.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 80

3. GENERAL OPERATIONst

The display is a modified version of the 1 system run screen to indicate the piston rotation is
being decelerated while showing rotation rate and position:

1.

Current piston rotation rate.

2.

Current rate of piston vertical displacement.

3.

Current piston position.

48 rpm DECELERATING+ 2.05 mm
0.1/min

To interrupt the piston rotation braking routine, press [ESCAPE].

Note
The motorized rotation system can be set to operate automatically basedon current piston position and rotation rate. See Section 3.11.8 for
information.

3.12[SETUP] Menu

 PURPOSE
To select, view and edit the SETUP files that determine the source of the values that PG9000 uses in its
calculation of defined pressure and as criteria for Ready/Not Ready condition determination.
 PRINCIPLE
PG9000 piston gauges perform continuous, real time calculations of the pressure defined by the floating
piston under current conditions (see Section 7.2 for the details on the calculations applied). The
calculations are used to determine the defined pressure displayed in the MAIN run screen, and to arriveat the mass to load value when a target pressure is entered in pressure to mass mode.
The equations that PG9000 uses to calculate pressure include many instrument and ambient variables.
PG9000 allows the source of the value used for each variable to be defined. For example, the valueof barometric pressure used to calculate current air density and to add to gauge pressure to define
absolute pressure in absolute by atmosphere mode could come either from PG9000’s internal sensor,
an external barometer connected to PG9000’s COM2, a user entered value or be set to standard
atmospheric pressure. The PG9000 SETUP function allows the source (and in some cases the value) of
the variables used in the pressure equations to be specified. In order to allow various combinations ofsources and/or values to be setup and recalled, SETUP files can be created, stored, edited and recalled.
The SETUP files also include certain variables used to determine PG9000 Ready/Not Ready status.
Table 16 identifies the variables included in the SETUP file, the factory source setting for each variable
and the normal value for each variable.
Variable source and value selections are recorded in SETUP files. These files can be stored and recalled
so that specific combinations of variable sources and/or values can be conveniently recalled. There are
20 SETUP files. File #1 is a factory SETUP file that cannot be edited. It includes the factory default
variable choices and normal values.

Note
SETUP files, USER values and PG9000’s calculation capabilities can be used to
calculate defined pressure in specific conditions independent of actual PG9000
operation.
The SETUP function supports the following:•

View SETUP files (see Section 3.12.2);•

Create/edit SETUP files (see Section 3.12.3);•

Select active SETUP file (see Section 3.12.1).

Page 81© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Table 16. SETUP File Choices, Factory Preferred Choice and Normal Value

VARIABLE

SOURCECHOICESFACTORY
DEFAULT CHOICE

NORMAL VALUE

Atmospheric pressure

1. Internal
2. Normal
3. User
4. COM2

1. Internal

101.325 kPa(14.6959 psi)

Ambient temperature

1. Internal
2. Normal
3. User

1. Internal

20 °C

Ambient relative humidity

1.Internal
2. Normal
3. User

1. Internal

45 %RH

Piston-cylinder
temperature

1. Internal
2. Normal
3. User

1. Internal

20 °C

Gravity

1. Local
2. Normal
3. User

1. Local

9.806650 m/s2

Vacuum

1. COM2
2. Normal
3. User

1. COM2

0 Pa

Ready/Not Ready
Piston position

1. User

1. User± 2.5 mm frommidfloat position(default)

Ready/Not Ready
Maximum vacuum
reference pressure in
absolute by vacuum mode

1. User

1. User

5 Pa (default)

Note
The factory default SETUP choice is the SETUP choice setting for all variables in a new
SETUP file. SETUP file #1 is fixed to factory SETUP choices and cannot be altered.
 OPERATION
To access the SETUP menu, press [SETUP] from the main run
screen. The display is:

Current SETUP: #01
1select 2view 3edit#nn in the upper right hand corner displays the number of the SETUP file that is currently active.
Select <1select> to select a different active SETUP file. Select <2view> to view the variable choices andvalues of the active SETUP file. Select <3edit> to create or edit a SETUP file.
See Sections 3.12.1 to 3.12.3 for detailed information on each SETUP function operation.

3.12.1<1select> PURPOSE
To change the active SETUP file number.

 Caution
Changing the current SETUP file will change the source and in some cases
the values of the variables used by PG9000 in calculating definedpressure. SETUP files should be selected and changed only by qualified
personnel. Incorrect SETUP file selection may cause out of tolerance
calculations and measurements. See Section 3.12, PRINCIPLE, for
information on SETUP files and their use.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 82

3. GENERAL OPERATION

 OPERATIONTo select a SETUP file number to make it the active SETUP file, press [SETUP] and select<1select>. In the following screen enter the number of the desired SETUP file and press[ENTER]. If a valid SETUP file number has been entered, operation returns to the previous
run screen with the selected SETUP file number displayed and active.

Note•

Entering an invalid SETUP file number causes an error message to be
displayed briefly and returns to the select SETUP file screen.

•

If the SETUP file selected specifies COM2 as the source of barometricpressure, PG9000 will attempt to read a barometer on COM2 when
initializing the new SETUP file. If PG9000 is unable to read a barometeron COM2, a communications time out message is displayed briefly
and operation returns to the select SETUP file screen. See Section
3.13.5.4 for information on configuring COM2 to read an externalbarometer.

3.12.2<2view>

 PURPOSE
To view the variable source choices and values of any SETUP file number.
 OPERATION

Note•

Selecting <2view> SETUP allows the variable source choices andvalues of the active SETUP file for viewing only. <2view> does notmake the viewed SETUP file active. To select the active SETUP file,press [SETUP] and select <1select>.

•

See Table 16 for a listing of the source choices for each variable.

To view an existing SETUP file, press [SETUP] and select <2view>. The display is:1.

Entry field for number of SETUP file to be viewed. Defaults
to SETUP file currently selected. Must be a number from 2 to10.

View SETUP file:#02

Enter the desired SETUP file number and press [ENTER].
View #02 latmP 2ambT
3%RH 4PCT 5g 6READY
7vac
Select <1atmP> to view the atmospheric pressure variable source choice and current value.
The value is displayed in the current pressure units (see Section 3.11.3).
Select <2ambT> to view the ambient temperature variable source choice and thecurrent value. The value is displayed in degrees Centigrade [°C].
Select <3%RH> to view the ambient relative humidity variable source choice and the current
value. The value is displayed in %RH.
Select <4PCT> to view the piston-cylinder temperature variable source choice and thecurrent value. The value is displayed in degrees Centigrade [°C].
Select <5g> to view the gravity variable source choice and the current value. The value is2
displayed in meters per second squared [m/s ].
If a valid SETUP file number is entered, the display is:Page 83© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Select <6READY> to view the values of Ready/Not Ready status criteria (see Section 3.4).
These include:<1Pposition>:

Piston position Ready/Not Ready limits (see Section 3.4.1). The value isdisplayed as a band in millimeters about mid-float position [± mm] (see Section
3.5).

<2vac>:

Maximum reference vacuum pressure limit when operating in absolute byvacuum mode. The value is displayed in Pascal [Pa].

Select <7vac>: to view the reference vacuum variable source choice and the current value.
The value is displayed in Pascal [Pa].

3.12.3<3edit> PURPOSE
To edit an existing SETUP file and/or to create a new SETUP file.

Note
See Section 3.12, PRINCIPLE for information on SETUP files and their
purpose.
 OPERATIONNote•

SETUP file #1 is the factory preferred file and it cannot be edited.

•

See Table 16 for a listing of the source choices for each variable.

To edit an existing SETUP file or create a new SETUP file, press [SETUP] andselect <3edit>. The display is:1.

Entry field for number of SETUP file to be edited or created.
Defaults to SETUP file currently selected. Must be a number
from 2 to 10.

Edit SETUP file:#02

Enter the desired SETUP file number and press [ENTER].
If a valid SETUP file number is entered, the display is:

Edit #02 latmP 2ambT
3%RH 4PCT 5g 6READY
7vac

Selecting an item leads to the variable source choices menu for that item. The cursor is on thesource choice that is currently selected in that SETUP file number. Select the desired
variable source. The selection causes the variable choice selection to be made and returns
to the edit menu. From the variable source choice menus, pressing [ENTER] or [ESCAPE]
returns to the edit selection menu. This allows easy, discreet movement between variable
source choices when editing a SETUP file.
Select <1atmP> to specify the atmospheric pressure variable source for the pressure values
that are used to calculate ambient air density and to add to gauge pressure measurements tocalculate absolute pressure in absolute by addition of atmosphere mode. Selecting <1atmP>
offers the atmospheric pressure variable source choices:© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration<1internal>

Use real time readings from PG9000’s on-board barometer.

<2normal>

Use a fixed value of 101.325 kPa (14.6959) psi.

<3user>Use a fixed user entered value. If <3user> is selected, the user value must beentered, in the current pressure unit of measure (see Section 3.11.3).

<4COM2>

Use real time readings from the device connected by RS232 to PG9000’s COM2
port. The external barometer must be properly set up to communicate with PG9000(see Section 3.13.5.4 for information on setting up to read an external barometer).

Page 84

3. GENERAL OPERATIONNote
For differential mode operation (see Section 3.11.4.1) the AtmP selection
must be <4COM2>.
Select <2ambT> to specify the ambient temperature variable source for the temperature
values that are used to calculate ambient air density. Selecting <2ambT> offers thetemperature variable source choices:<1internal>:<2normal>:<3user>:

Use real time readings from PG9000’s ambient temperature platinum resistancethermometer in the Temperature - Humidity (TH) Probe.
Use a fixed value of 20 °C.
Use a fixed user entered value. If <3user> is selected, the user value must beentered, in degrees Centigrade [°C].

Select <3%RH> to specify the relative humidity variable source for the relative humidity
values that are used to calculate ambient air density. Selecting <3%RH> offers the relative
humidity variable source choices:<1internal>:

Use real time readings from PG9000’s relative humidity sensor in theTemperature - Humidity (TH) Probe.

<2normal>:

Use a fixed value of 45 %RH.

<3user>:Use a fixed user entered value. If <3user> is selected, the user value must beentered, in percent relative humidity [%RH].

Select <4PCT> to specify the piston-cylinder temperature variable source for the temperature
values that are used to compensate piston-cylinder effective area for temperature. Selecting<4PCT> offers the temperature variable source choices:<1internal>:

Use real time readings from PG9000’s on-board piston-cylinder temperature
platinum resistance thermometers (embedded in the piston-cylinder module
mounting post).

<2normal>:

Use a fixed value of 20 °C.

<3user>:Use a fixed user entered value. If <3user> is selected, the user value must beentered, in degrees Centigrade [°C].

Select <5g> to specify the value of acceleration due to gravity that is used in calculating theforce applied to the piston. Pressing <5g> offers the gravity variable source choices:<1locall>:<2normal>:<3user>:Use the fixed value of local gravity stored under [SPECIAL], <6gl> (see Section
3.11.6).
Use a fixed value of 9.806650 m/s2.
Use a fixed user entered value different from the current local gravity value
stored in the [SPECIAL], <6gl> menu option. If <3user> is selected, the user
value must be entered, in meters per second squared [m/s2].

Select <6READY> to edit the values of Ready/Not Ready status criteria (see Section 3.4).
These include:<1position>:

Piston position limits. Edit the fixed value, in millimeters [mm], of the bandaround mid-float position within which the piston position is Ready (seeSection 3.4.1). This also determines the limit at which the piston is refloated by
the GEN function when GEN is ON (see Section 3.11.9).

<2vacl>:Maximum reference vacuum pressure when operating in absolute by vacuum
mode. Edit the value, in Pascal [Pa], under which the reference vacuum mustbe for a vacuum Ready condition to occur (see Section 3.4.3).

Page 85© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Select <7vac> to specify the reference vacuum variable source for the value used for thepressure under the bell jar when calculating the absolute pressure defined in absolute byvacuum mode. Pressing <7vac> offers the reference vacuum variable source choices:<1COM2>:

Use real time readings from the device connected by RS232 to PG9000’s COM2
port. <1COM2> is the selection for the standard PG9000 reference vacuum sensor
included with the optional vacuum reference hardware. If a different external vacuum
gauge is used in place of the default, it must be properly set up to communicate with
PG9000 (see Section 3.13.5.5).

<2normal>:

Use a fixed value of 0 Pa.

<3user>:

3.13

Use a fixed user entered value. If <3user> is selected, the user value must beentered, in Pascal [Pa].

[SPECIAL] Menu
 PURPOSE
The [SPECIAL] key accesses a menu of PG9000 functions and settings that are lesscommonly or not regularly used in normal operation.
 OPERATION
1PC/MS 2presU 3headTo access the SPECIAL menu, press [SPECIAL] fromthe main run screen. This display is:4prefs 5remote 6gl 
7cal 8AMH 9reset

Note
Some screens, such as the SPECIAL menu, go beyond the two lines
provided by the display. This is indicated by a flashing arrow in thesecond line of the display. Press the [←] and [→] keys to move the cursor
to access the lines that are NOT visible or directly enter the number of thehidden menu choice if you know it.
Special menu choices include:<1PC/MS>:

Edit and view stored piston-cylinder module and mass set metrologicalinformation. Select mass set to be used (see Section 3.13.1).

<2presU>:

Customize the pressure unit of measure choices available under [UNIT](see Section 3.13.2).

<3head>:Change the height unit of measure and the fluid used in DUT head corrections;adjust the barometer head height; turn the automated piston position headcorrection ON and OFF (see Section 3.13.3).

<4prefs>:

To access a menu of internal PG9000 operational preferences and functions
including screen saver, sounds, time/date, instrument ID and user levelprotection (see Section 3.13.4).

<5remote>:

Set up/modify PG9000 RS232 (COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4) and IEEE-488
interfaces. Test RS232 ports. Set up external barometer or vacuum gaugecommunications (see Section 3.13.5).

<6gl>:

Set the value of local gravity used by PG9000 in reference pressure
calculations when gl is specified as the gravity value in the active SETTINGS
file (see Section 3.13.6).

<7cal>:

View the output of and adjust PG9000 internal sensors and measurement
systems (see Section 3.13.7).

<8AMH>:

View the status of and directly control an AMH automated mass handler (seeSection 3.13.8).

<9reset>:Access and execute various reset options (see Section 3.13.9).

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 86

3. GENERAL OPERATION

3.13.1<1PC/MS> PURPOSE
To perform the following piston-cylinder module and mass set metrological functions:•View and edit piston-cylinder module metrological information.

•

Create new piston-cylinder modules.

•

View and edit mass set and mass loading bell information.

•

Create new mass sets and mass loading bells.

•

Select the active mass set and mass loading bell.

Note
See Section 3.11.2 for information on more direct access to selecting theactive piston-cylinder module.

 Caution
The piston-cylinder module and mass set information contained in<1PC/MS> is element specific metrological data. Uninformed or accidental
altering of this information may lead to out of tolerance measurements.
Piston-cylinder module and mass set information should only be edited byqualified personnel as part of the PG9000 calibration or recalibration
process.
 PRINCIPLE
To calculate the pressure defined by its floating piston, PG9000 must have available thespecific characteristics of the piston-cylinder module, mass set and mass loading bell that are
being used. This information is entered, viewed and edited under [SPECIAL], <1PC/MS>.
This is also where the active mass and mass loading bell are selected.
The piston-cylinder module and mass set information required by PG9000 is reported on the
Calibration Reports that are delivered with the metrological elements. When the PG9000
Platform and metrological elements are delivered together, the metrological elements
information is entered by Fluke Calibration at the factory. If the metrological elements aredelivered separately from the platform or after a recalibration when new data is available, theinformation must be entered or edited by the user.
 OPERATION
To access the piston-cylinder module, mass set andmass loading bell information, press [SPECIAL] andselect <1PC/MS>. The display is:1PC 2mass set
3mass bell

Select the type of metrological element that you would like to view, edit, create or select.
See Sections 3.13.1.1 to 3.13.1.15 for operation of specific piston-cylinder module, mass set
and mass bell functions as follows:•

Create a new piston-cylinder module (see Section 3.13.1.1).

•

Edit piston-cylinder module information (see Section 3.13.1.2).

•

View piston-cylinder module information (see Section 3.13.1.3).

•

Delete a piston-cylinder module (see Section 3.13.1.4).

•

Select the active piston-cylinder module (see Section 3.13.1.5).

•

Create a new mass set (see Section 3.13.1.6).

•

Edit mass set information (see Section 3.13.1.7).

•

View mass set information (see Section 3.13.1.8).

•

Delete a mass set (see Section 3.13.1.9).

•

Select a mass set (see Section 3.13.1.10).

•

Add a mass loading bell (see Section 3.13.1.11).
Page 87© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL•

Edit mass loading bell information (see Section 3.13.1.12).

•

View the active mass loading bell (see Section 3.13.1.13).

•

Delete a mass loading bell (see Section 3.13.1.14).

•

Select a mass loading bell (see Section 3.13.1.15).

3.13.1.1 Create a Piston-Cylinder Module
 PURPOSE
To create a new piston-cylinder module that will be available for selection fromthe [P-C] function key. Use this function when a new piston-cylinder module has
been acquired.

Note
If the piston-cylinder module and PG9000 Platform weredelivered together, the piston cylinder module has already beenentered at the factory. Before creating a new piston-cylinder
module, press [P-C] to check if it already exists (see Section
3.11.2).
 PRINCIPLE
The PG9000 add and edit piston-cylinder module functions allow piston-cylinder
metrological module variable values to be defined and stored. These values will
be used by PG9000 in calculating defined pressure, piston-cylinder range andpressure to mass and mass to pressure values when the piston-cylinder moduleis made active using [P-C]. The information needed can be found in thecalibration report for the piston-cylinder module.
Setting up or editing a piston-cylinder module requires specifying, in sequential
order, the following:
Serial number (S/N) [nnnn].
Effective area (Ae) at 0 pressure and 20 °C [mm2].

Piston temperature coefficient [linear thermal expansivity/°C].

Cylinder temperature coefficient [linear thermal expansivity/°C].

Effective area pressure coefficient [change in Ae/MPa].

Piston-cylinder surface tension effect [N/m].

Reference level offset [mm].

Piston assembly mass [kg].
Piston assembly apparent density [kg/m3].
Rotation rate ready limits [rpm].
k(P) [kg/mm/min].
Calibration report number [nnnnnnnnnn].
Calibration report date [yyyymmdd].


OPERATION

Note•© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Adding or editing a piston-cylinder module requires the user
to specify a large number of variables in a series of data entry
screens described below. For a summary of the piston
cylinder module data requirements in the order they areedited see PRINCIPLE in this section.

Page 88

3. GENERAL OPERATION•

PG9000 can store up to 18 piston-cylinder module (PC) files.
When <3add> is selected and all the files have already been
used, a warning is displayed. A file must be deleted before afile can be added.
To create a new piston-cylinder module press [SPECIAL] , <1PC/MS> andselect <1PC>, <3add>. A series of data entry menus will be presented. Editeach menu to reflect the correct information on the piston-cylinder module being
added. Press [ENTER] after each entry to proceed to the next menu. Pressing[ESCAPE] at any point offers an <Abandon edits?> query and then returns to
the <1PC> menu without saving any of the edited data or [ENTER] returns to theadd piston-cylinder module process.
The data entry screens to add or edit a piston-cylinder module are, in order:•

Serial number (S/N): Edit the serial number using four digits. Thisvalue is marked on the piston cap. The default is 1.

•

Effective area at 0 pressure and 20 °C: Edit the value of the pistoncylinder effective area at 0 pressure and 20 °C. The value must be
2
entered in square millimeters [mm ]. This value is reported in thecalibration report for the piston-cylinder module. The default is 0.

•

Piston temperature coefficient: Edit the value of the piston material
linear thermal expansivity. The value must be entered in terms of relative-6
change per degree centigrade [nn x 10 /°C]. The E-6 exponent is fixed.
This value is reported in the calibration report for the piston-cylinder
module. The default is 00.

•

Cylinder temperature coefficient: Edit the value of the cylindermaterial linear thermal expansivity. The value must be entered in terms-6-6of relative change per degree centigrade [nn x 10 /°C]. The 10
exponent is fixed. This value is reported in the calibration report for thepiston-cylinder module. The default is 00.

•

Effective area pressure coefficient: Edit the value of the pistoncylinder change in effective area in terms of relative change per-6
MegaPascal [n.nn x 10 /MPa]. This value is reported in the calibration
report for the piston-cylinder module. The default is 0.00.

•

Piston-cylinder surface tension effect: Edit the value of the surface
tension effect of the pressurized fluid on the piston. The value must beentered in Newtons per meter [N/m]. This value is reported in thecalibration report for the piston-cylinder module. The default is 0.00. The
correct value for all gas lubricated, gas operated piston-cylinders is 0.

•

Reference level offset: Edit the value of the reference level offset
which corrects the piston-cylinder reference level for hollow pistons (5kPa/kg,10 kPa/kg, 20 kPa/kg and 50 kPa/kg gas lubricated pistoncylinder modules only) to the reference level marked on the mounting
post (see Section 3.11.7). The value must be entered in millimeters[mm]. This value is reported in the calibration report for 5 kPa/kg, 10
kPa/kg, 20 kPa/kg and 50 kPa/kg gas lubricated piston-cylinders; it is
0 for all other piston-cylinders. The default is 0.00.

•

Piston assembly mass: Edit the value of the mass of the piston
assembly (piston + piston head + piston cap). The value must be entered in
kilogram [kg]. This value is reported in the calibration report for thepiston-cylinder module. The default is 0.200000.

•

Piston assembly average density: Edit the value of the averagedensity of the piston assembly (piston + piston head + cap). The value
3must be entered in kilogram per cubic meter [kg/m ]. This value isreported in the calibration report for the piston-cylinder module. The
default is 0.

•

Rotation rate ready limits [rpm]: The minimum Ready rotation rate
(see Section 3.4.2) and the target maximum rate. The values must be
Page 89© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

entered in rotations per minute [rpm]. The values (min and max) must
be entered in rotations per minute [rpm]. The value automaticallydefaults to the factory recommended value for the piston-cylinder sizeand pressurized medium. In most circumstances, the factory default
values should be used.
•k(P) coefficient [kg/mm/min]: Edit the value of the mass to equilibrium
fall rate proportionality coefficient. This value is not used in PG9000.
The default value is 0.00.

•

Calibration report number: Edit the calibration report number to reflect
the number of the piston-cylinder module calibration report that iscurrently valid. The number can be up to ten digits. The default is 1.

•

Calibration report date: Edit the date of the current calibration report.
The date must be expressed in yyyymmdd format. The default is
20000101.

After pressing [ENTER] to accept theedited calibration report date the option tosave the edited piston-cylinder module
information is presented. The display is:

Save PC S/N nnnn
1no 2yes

Select <2yes> to save the piston-cylinder module information under serial
number nnnn and return to the <1PC/MS> menu.
Select <1no> to discard all edits and return to the <1PC/MS> menu.

3.13.1.2 Edit a Piston-Cylinder Module

PURPOSETo edit information contained in an existing piston-cylinder module file. Use thisfunction to change piston-cylinder module data after a recalibration.

PRINCIPLE/OPERATION Caution
Piston-cylinder module information is element specificmetrological data. Uninformed or accidental altering of thisinformation may lead to out of tolerance measurements. Piston
cylinder module information should only be edited by qualified
personnel as part of the PG9000 calibration or recalibration
process.
See Section 3.13.1.1 describing adding a new piston-cylinder module.
The principles and procedures to add or edit a piston-cylinder module are
identical except for the identification of the piston-cylinder module to be edited.
To edit information on an existing piston-cylinder module, press [SPECIAL] ,<1PC/MS> and select <1PC>, <2edit>.
The display identifies the currently active piston-cylinder module. Press [ENTER]
to edit the currently active piston-cylinder module or press [P-C] or [←] or [→] toadvance through the other piston-cylinder modules available. When the desired
piston-cylinder module is identified, press [ENTER] to proceed with editing
piston-cylinder module information. Operation of the editing function is identicalto the add new piston-cylinder module procedure (see Section 3.13.1.1,
OPERATION).

3.13.1.3 View a Piston-Cylinder Module
 PURPOSE
To view the information contained in an existing piston-cylinder module file.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 90

3. GENERAL OPERATION PRINCIPLE/OPERATION
See Section 3.13.1.1, PRINCIPLE. The piston-cylinder module viewing function
allows the piston-cylinder module information to be viewed but not altered.
To view information on an existing piston-cylinder module, press [SPECIAL] ,<1PC/MS> and select <1PC>, <3view>.
The display identifies the currently active piston-cylinder module.
Press[ENTER] to view the currently active piston-cylinder module or press [P-C] or[←] or [→] to advance through the other piston-cylinder modules available (seeSection 3.11.2). When the desired piston cylinder module is identified, press[ENTER] to proceed with viewing piston-cylinder module information.
Successive pressing of [ENTER] steps through the piston-cylinder information
screens in the same order as the add and edit functions (see Section 3.13.1,
View Piston-Cylinder Module, Principle).

3.13.1.4 Delete a Piston-Cylinder Module
 PURPOSE
To delete a piston-cylinder module file so that it is no longer included in thepiston-cylinder modules available for selection by pressing [P-C].
 OPERATION Caution
Once a piston-cylinder module file has been deleted it cannot
be recovered. To recreate it, the add piston-cylinder module
function must be used (see Section 3.13.1.1) which requires
entering all the piston-cylinder module information. Before
deleting a piston-cylinder module, consider editing it (seeSection 3.13.1.2).
To delete a piston-cylinder module press [SPECIAL] , <1PC/MS> and select<1PC>, <4delete>.
The display identifies the currently active piston-cylinder module.
Press[ENTER] to delete the currently active piston-cylinder module or press [P-C] or[←] or [→] to advance through the other piston-cylinder modules available (seeSection 3.11.2). When the desired piston cylinder module is identified, press[ENTER] to proceed with deleting the piston cylinder module information.
Confirmation to delete is required. Select <2yes> to delete the piston-cylinder
module. Select <1no> to NOT delete.

Note
The active piston-cylinder module (piston-cylinder module thatis currently selected) cannot be deleted. Before attempting todelete a piston-cylinder module, be sure it is not currently
selected.

3.13.1.5 Select The Active Piston-Cylinder Module
 PURPOSE
To select the piston-cylinder module that is active and used by PG9000 in its
mass loading and defined pressure calculations.

Note
This function serves the same purpose as pressing [P-C] (seeSection 3.11.2).
 OPERATIONTo select the active piston-cylinder module press [SPECIAL] , <1PC/MS> andselect <1PC>, <5select>.

Page 91© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3.13.1.6 Add a Mass Set
 PURPOSE
To create a new mass set that will be available for selection as the active mass
set to load on the PG9000 piston. Use this function when a new mass set has
been acquired or a mass set was deleted and must be reentered.

Note
If the mass set and PG9000 Platform were delivered together,
the mass set has already been entered at the factory. Before
creating a new mass set, check whether it already exists using
the view mass set function (see Section 3.13.1.8).
 PRINCIPLE
The PG9000 add and edit mass set functions allow mass set composition andmetrological variable values to be defined and stored. These values will be used
by PG9000 when the mass set is made active to calculate nominal mass
instructions and true mass loads. Up to three mass sets can be created.
Setting up or editing a mass set requires defining the density of the masses, themass set composition and the true mass of each individual mass. This
information can be found in the calibration report for the mass set.
Mass sets are created and edited in terms of mass groups reflecting the normalcomposition of a PG9000 mass set. Standard PG9000 mass sets are made upof these groups (see Section 2.1.2.2 for listings of standard PG9000 mass
set compositions).
The mass groups of a MANUAL mass set include:
1. Make up mass (4 or 9 kg): A single mass, sequentially numbered 1.
The value of this mass is 9 kg if the mass set main masses are 10 kg and
4 kg if the mass set main masses are 5 kg. The purpose of this mass is toarrive at a whole number nominal mass load equal to the set’s main masses(10 kg or 5 kg) when added to the piston and mass loading bell.
2. 10 kg masses: The main masses in a standard 80 or 100 kg mass set.
Sequentially numbered from 1 up to the total number of 10 kg masses.
Mass sets of < 80 kg do not normally include 10 kg masses.
3. 5 kg masses: The main masses in any standard mass set of less than
80 kg. Sequentially numbered from 1 up to the total number of 5 kg masses.
Standard 80 and 100 kg mass sets have one 5 kg mass.
4. 2 kg masses:and 2.

Every standard mass set has two 2 kg masses numbered 1

5. 1 kg masses:

Every standard mass set has one 1 kg mass numbered 1.

6. 0.5 kg masses: Every standard mass set has one 0.5 kg mass number 1.
7. 0.2 kg masses: Every standard mass set has two 0.2 kg masses numbered 1
and 2.
8. 0.1 kg masses: Every standard mass set has one 0.1 kg mass numbered 1.
9. Trim masses: Every standard mass set has a trim mass set made up ofmasses from 50 to 0.01 g. These masses are NOT defined and entered aspart of the mass set.
The mass groups of an AMH-100-VAC automated mass handler mass set
include:1. 10 kg Main masses: Sequentially numbered from 1 to a maximum of 9.
2. 6.4 kg mass:

Single tubular, binary mass.

3. 3.2 kg mass:

Single tubular, binary mass.

4. 1.6 kg mass:

Single tubular, binary mass.

5. 0.8 kg mass:

Single tubular, binary mass.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 92

3. GENERAL OPERATION

6. 0.4 kg mass:

Single tubular, binary mass.

7. 0.2 kg mass:

Single tubular, binary mass.

8. 0.1 kg mass:

Single tubular, binary mass.

9. Trim masses: Every standard mass set has a trim mass set made up ofmasses from 50 to 0.01 g. These masses are NOT defined and entered aspart of the mass set.

 Caution
When PG9000 provides mass loading instructions and calculates
the true mass of the mass currently loaded, it assumes that themass set in use has been set up correctly and that masses havebeen loaded following PG9000 mass loading protocol (see Section
3.6). For PG9000 mass loading protocol to operate properly, themass set in use must be EXACTLY the mass set that has been
defined by the add and/or edit mass function. No extra mass canbe included, no mass used can be missing and the sequential
numbers of masses in each mass group must be followed with thecorrect true mass value entered for each individual mass. Using a
mass set that is not accurately set up may result in out of
tolerance pressure definitions.

Note
Though the piston and the mass loading bell constitute part ofthe mass load, they are not included in the definition of a mass
set. Also, one PG9000 system may be used with several pistoncylinder modules, mass loading bells and mass sets.
Therefore, the piston mass and mass loading bell massinformation are not part of the mass set.
Piston massinformation is defined and stored in the piston-cylinder module
file (see Section 3.13.1.1) and mass loading bell information isdefined and stored in a separate mass loading bell files (seeSection 3.13.1.11). In an AMH mass set, the binary mass carrier
and mass lifting shaft are considered part of the bell.


OPERATION Caution
Mass set information is element specific metrological data.
Uninformed or accidental altering of this information may leadto out of tolerance measurements. Mass set information should
only be edited by qualified personnel as part of the PG9000
calibration or recalibration process.

Note•

To use the create or edit mass set function with a manualmass set, it is important to have an understanding of mass set
structure and mass groups. Consult Section 3.6, PRINCIPLE,
to familiarize yourself with this information before attempting
to create or edit a mass set. Before creating or editing an
AMH automated mass handler mass set, see Section 3.7.

•

PG9000 can store up to 3 MS (mass set) files. When <3add> isselected and all the files have already been used, a warning isdisplayed. A mass set must be deleted before a mass set canbe added.

Page 93© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

To create a new PG9000 mass set there are three sequential steps:
 Initialize mass set: Define serial number, density, mass set type (manual or
AMH), calibration report number and date.
 Define individual masses: Edit, add and delete mass groups as necessary to
identify and define all masses in the mass set.
 Save mass set file or abandon changes.
Step : Initialize Mass Set
Press [SPECIAL] , <1PC/MS> and select <2mass set>, <3add>.
Edit the serial number to the number ofthe mass set being added and press[ENTER]. The display is:

Add mass set:
S/N 1

Edit the density of the masses being
added (all PG9000 mass sets havedensity of 8 000 kg/m3) and press[ENTER]. The display is:

Mass density:
8000 kg/m3

Select <1manual> for a manual mass set
or <2AMH> for an automated mass
handler mass set.

Mass set type:1manual 2AMH

Edit the calibration report number (up toten digits) to the number of the current
calibration report of the mass set that isbeing added and press [ENTER]. The
display is:

Cal report number?
1

Edit the calibration report date to the dateof the current calibration report of themass set that is being added (format must
be YYYYMMDD) and press [ENTER].
[ENTER] leads to the second step ofmass set adding or editing.

Cal report date?
20000101

Pressing [ESCAPE] at any point goes to an abandon edits warning screen.
To continue with defining the mass set proceed to Step .
Step : Define Individual Masses
This step can only be reached by going through Step .
If the mass set is a MANUAL mass set
less than 80 kg, the display is:

Select mass grp (kg)MKUP 5.00 2.00 1.001
0.50 0.20 0.10 ADD

If the mass set is an AMH automatedmass handler mass set, the display is:

Select mass grp (kg)
MAIN 6.40 3.20 1.60
0.80 0 40 0.20 0.10

Note
Some screens, such as the SPECIAL menu, go beyond the twolines provided by the display. This is indicated by a flashingarrow in the second line of the display. Press the [←] and [→]keys to move the cursor to access the lines that are NOT visible
or directly enter the number of the hidden menu choice if you
know it.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 94

3. GENERAL OPERATION

Refer to Sections 3.13.1.6, PRINCIPLE and 3.6 for information on massgroup definitions. To create the mass set, each and every mass in the mass set,no more and no less, (but not the piston and the bell) must be identified and itstrue mass entered. To select a mass group press the [←] and [→] keys toposition the cursor on the mass group to be edited. If the mass is needed but notshown, select <ADD> to create a new mass group. To delete a mass group,
enter <0> as the number of masses in the group.

 Caution
All standard PG9000 MANUAL mass sets have a makeup mass
(MKUP). This mass is 9 kg or 4 kg depending on the mass set(see Section 3.6, PRINCIPLE). It is imperative that the makeup
mass be defined and entered in the MKUP group.
Operation within each mass group is identical, for example, select <5.00>. The
display is:1.

Edit field for number of masses in the massgroup.

# of masses in group(0 deletes grp):
1

Edit the number of masses in group to reflect the number of masses of that
nominal value there are in the group and press [ENTER]. The display is:1.

Sequential ID number of this specific mass
within the mass group.

2.

Edit field for the true value of this specificmass.

5.0 kg mass #1
True mass: 5.00000

Edit the mass value to the true value of the specific mass identified and press[ENTER].
If there are additional masses in this mass group, the next display is the same as
the display immediately above but with the next mass specific mass sequential
ID number in the mass group. The screens continue until the true value of all of
the masses within the group has been entered. After the last entry, the screen
returns to the <Select mass grp> screen.
Edit, add and delete mass groups as necessary until all of the masses in themass set (do not include pistons, bells and trim masses of 50 grams and less)have been entered, no more, no less. When Step  is completed, press [ESCAPE]
to go to Step .

Note
Setting up an 80 kg or 100 kg manual mass set requires using<ADD> to add a 10 kg mass group as the 10 kg mass group is
not included by default.
Step : Save Mass Set File
Pressing [ESCAPE] in the mass set editing screen goes to the save screen.
Save MS S/N 4573
1no 2yes

The display is:

Select <2yes> to save the all changes made to the mass set and exit.
Select <1no> to abandon all changes made to the mass set and exit.

Page 95© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3.13.1.7 Edit a Mass Set
 PURPOSE
To edit information contained in an existing mass set file. Use this function tochange mass set data after a recalibration or if a mass set configuration
changes.
 PRINCIPLE/OPERATION Caution
Mass set information is element specific metrological data.
Uninformed or accidental altering of this information may leadto out of tolerance measurements. Mass set information should
only be edited by qualified personnel as part of the PG9000
calibration or recalibration process.
See Section 3.13.1.6 describing adding a new mass set. The principles andprocedures to add or edit a mass set are identical except that the mass set toedit is selected from the existing mass sets screen.
The mass set type (manual or AMH) cannot be changed when a mass set is edited.

3.13.1.8 View a Mass Set
 PURPOSE
To view information contained in an existing mass set file.
 OPERATION
To view information contained in an existing mass set file press [SPECIAL] ,<1PC/MS> and select <2mass set>, <1view>. The viewing function operates inthe same manner as the add function (see Section 3.13.1.6).

3.13.1.9 Delete a Mass Set
 PURPOSE
To delete an existing mass set file entirely.
 OPERATION Caution
Once a mass set file has been deleted it cannot be recovered.
To recreate it, the add mass set function must be used (seeSection 3.13.1.6) which requires entering all the mass set
information. Before deleting a mass set, consider editing it (seeSection 3.13.1.7).
To delete a mass set press [SPECIAL] , <1PC/MS> and select <2mass set>,<4delete>. Select the mass set to be deleted and press [ENTER]. Select<2yes> to delete the mass set. Press <1no> to NOT delete.

Note
The active mass set (mass set that is currently selected) cannot
be deleted. Before attempting to delete a mass bell, be sure it is
not currently selected.

3.13.1.10 Select Mass Set
 PURPOSE
To select a mass set to be active and used by PG9000 in its mass loading anddefined pressure calculations. To initialize the optional AMH automated mass
handler if present.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 96

3. GENERAL OPERATION

 OPERATIONTo select the active mass set press [SPECIAL] , <1PC/MS> and select <2mass
set>, <5select>.
Mass sets for an AHM automated mass handler are identified by a letter <A>
after their serial number.
Put the cursor on the desired mass set and press [ENTER].
If a MANUAL mass set is selected, operation returns to the MAIN run screen.
If an AMH automated mass handler mass set is selected, the PG9000 platform
attempts to establish communication with the AMH and initialize it. If thecommunication cannot be established with the AMH, an error is displayed. If
communication with the AMH mass set is established, the AMH is initialized andall masses are loaded. If the AMH is unable to complete initialization, an error
message is displayed. The most common reason for failure to complete
initialization is inadequate drive pressure supply to the AMH. For trouble
shooting, see the AMH/AMH-100 Operation and Maintenance Manual. If the
AMH initialization completes successfully, operation returns to the main run
screen with the AMH active. The AMH remains active until a non-AMH mass set
is selected. The PG9000 platform will attempt to initialize the AMH on power up if
an AMH mass set is the active mass set.

3.13.1.11 Add a Mass Loading Bell
 PURPOSE
To create a new mass loading bell that will be available for selection as the active massloading bell. Use this function when a new mass loading bell has been acquired.

Note
If the mass loading bell and PG9000 Platform were delivered
together, the mass loading bell has already been entered at thefactory. Before creating a new mass loading bell, check
whether it already exists (see Section 3.13.1.13).
 PRINCIPLE
See Section 3.13.1.6, PRINCIPLE.
 OPERATION Caution
Mass loading bell information is element specific metrological
data. Uninformed or accidental altering of this information may
lead to out of tolerance measurements. Mass loading bell
information should only be edited by qualified personnel as partof the PG9000 calibration or recalibration process.

Note
PG9000 can store up to 3 mass bell files. When <3add> isselected and all the files have already been used, a warning isdisplayed. A mass loading bell must be deleted before a massloading bell can be added.
To create a new PG9000 mass loading bell press [SPECIAL] and select<1PC/MS>, <3mass bell>, <3add>.
Edit the serial number to the number ofthe mass bell being added andpress [ENTER]. The display is:Page 97

Add mass bell:
S/N 1© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Edit the average mass density of themass loading bell and press [ENTER].
The value defaults to the default density
for the typical mass loading bell for the
PG9000 model. The display is:

Mass density?
5058 kg/m3

Note
The AMH automated mass handler mass bell includes thebell, the binary mass carrier and the mass lifting shaft.
Edit the calibration report number (up toten digits) to the number of the current
calibration report of the mass loading bellthat is being added and press [ENTER].
The display is:

Cal report number?
1775

Edit the calibration report date to the dateof the current calibration report of themass loading bell that is being added andpress [ENTER]. The display is:

Cal report date?
20040101

Edit the true mass value of the massloading bell that is being added and press[ENTER]. The value defaults to the nominal
mass of the typical mass loading bell for the
PG9000 model. The display is:

Bell #2832
True mass: 0.449985

Select <2yes> to save the all changes
made to the mass loading bell and exit.
Select <2no> to abandon all changes
made to the mass loading bell and exit.

Save bell S/N 2832?
1no 2yes

3.13.1.12 Edit a Mass Loading Bell
 PURPOSE
To edit information contained in an existing mass loading bell file.
function to change mass loading bell data after a recalibration.
 PRINCIPLE/OPERATION

Use this Caution
Mass loading bell information is element specific metrological
data. Uninformed or accidental altering of this information may
lead to out of tolerance measurements. Mass loading bell
information should only be edited by qualified personnel as partof the PG9000 calibration or recalibration process.
See Section 3.13.1.11 describing adding a new mass loading bell. The principles
and procedures to add or edit a mass loading bell are identical except that the massloading bell to edit is selected from the existing mass loading bell screen.

3.13.1.13 View a Mass Loading Bell
 PURPOSE
To view information contained in an existing mass loading bell file.
 OPERATION
To view information contained in an existing mass loading bell file press[SPECIAL] and select <1PC/MS>, <3mass bell>, <1view>. The viewing
function is identical to the add function (see Section 3.13.1.11).

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 98

3. GENERAL OPERATION

3.13.1.14 Delete A Mass Loading Bell
 PURPOSE
To delete an existing mass loading bell file entirely.
 OPERATION Caution
Once a mass loading bell file has been deleted it cannot berecovered. To recreate it, the add mass loading bell function
must be used (see Section 3.13.1.11) which requires entering all
the mass loading bell information. Before deleting a massloading bell, consider editing it (see Section 3.13.1.12).
To delete a mass loading bell press [SPECIAL], <1PC/MS> and select <3mass
bell>, <4delete>.
Confirmation to delete is requested. Select <2yes> to delete the mass loading bell.
Press <1no> to NOT delete.

Note
The active mass bell (mass bell that is currently selected)
cannot be deleted. Before attempting to delete a mass bell, be
sure it is not currently selected.

3.13.1.15 Select A Mass Loading Bell
 PURPOSE
To select the mass loading bell that is active and used by PG9000 in its massloading and defined pressure calculations.
 OPERATIONTo select the active mass loading bell set press [SPECIAL], <1PC/MS> andselect <3mass bell>, <5select>.

3.13.2<2presU>

 PURPOSE
To customize the selection of pressure units that are available for selection from the UNIT
function key (see Section 3.11.3).
 PRINCIPLE/OPERATION
See Section 3.11.3.1.

3.13.3<3head> PURPOSE
To change DUT head configuration; to change the ATM head height; turn to turn the PISTON
head ON and OFF.
 PRINCIPLE
PG9000 supports three different fluid head correction functions.
1. There is a correction to consider the difference in height between the PG9000 reference
level and a device under test (see Section 3.11.7, PRINCIPLE). This head correction isreferred to as DUT head. The head height can be adjusted by pressing [HEAD]. The
head unit of measure and fluid are adjusted by pressing [SPECIAL] and selecting<3head>, <1fluid> and <2unit>.
2. The second head function is the head correction for the PG9000 reading of atmosphericpressure that is used to calculate air density and/or to add to atmospheric pressure in absoluteby adding atmosphere mode. The barometer reading atmospheric pressure may not be at thesame height as the piston reference level and, if so, a head correction is needed to determine
atmospheric pressure at the piston reference level. This head correction is referred to as ATM
head. The ATM head height can be edited by pressing [SPECIAL] and selecting <3head>,Page 99© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL<3atm>. The ATM head is only applied to internal or external barometer readings. It is notapplied to normal or user values of atmospheric pressure.
3. The third head function is the automated correction for the piston position, referred to as
PISTON head. The PG9000 reference level marked on the piston-cylinder module
mounting post is the level at which pressures are defined when the piston is in midstroke
position. But it may not always be practical to make measurement with the PG9000
piston exactly in its midstroke position. In fact, the piston position is Ready within a limit
band above and below midstroke (see Section 3.4.1). As the piston moves away frommidstroke, the pressure definition reference level moves proportionally. PG9000’s
automated correction for piston position calculates the head pressure corresponding to
the deviation in piston position from midstroke and compensates the defined pressureback to midstroke. In this way, the defined pressure calculated by PG9000 is always thepressure at the reference level marked on the mounting post, even if the piston is not at
midstroke position. The PISTON head function can be turned ON and OFF by pressing[SPECIAL] and selecting <3head>, <4piston>.

Note
See Section 7.2.2 for information on calculation of the three
fluid head correction functions.
 OPERATION
To access various fluid HEAD correction functions press[SPECIAL], and select <3head>. The display is:

Edit head: 1fluid
2unit 3atm 4piston•

Select <1fluid> to change the DUT head fluid (see Section 3.13.3.1).

•

Select <2unit> to specify the DUT head height unit of measure (see Section
3.13.3.2).

•

Select <3atm> to adjust the ATM head height (see Section 3.13.3.3).

•

Select <4piston> to turn the PISTON head correction ON and OFF (see Section
3.13.3.4).

3.13.3.1 <3head>, <1fluid>

OPERATION•

To specify the DUT head fluid (seeSection 3.13.3, PRINCIPLE), press[SPECIAL] and select <3head>,<1fluid>. The display is:

Head fluid:
1gas 2liquid

If <1gas> is selected, the display
offers the choice of three gasses.
Making a gas selection returns to theprevious run screen with that gas
active for the DUT head function.
The display is:

Gas type:
1N2 2He 3Air

If <2liquid> is selected, the display
offers the choice of oil, water or auser defined liquid.
If the user
defined liquid is selected, its density
must be specified. Making a liquid
selection returns to the previous run
screen with that liquid active for the
DUT head function. The display is:

Liquid type:1oil 2H20 3user

•

•

Note
In systems using fluid interfaces, the head fluid selected shouldbe the medium used in the height separating the P9000
reference level from the device under test.
© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 100

3. GENERAL OPERATION

3.13.3.2 <3head>, <2unit>

OPERATION

To specify the DUT and ATM headheight unit (see Section 3.13.3,
PRINCIPLE), press [SPECIAL] andselect <3head>, <2unit>. The display is:

Head height unit:
1in 2cm

Selecting the desired unit returns to the previous run screen with that unit active
for the DUT and ATM head function heights.

3.13.3.3 <3head>, <3atm>


OPERATION

To specify the ATM head height (seeSection 3.13.3, PRINCIPLE), press[SPECIAL]
andselect<3head>,<3atm>. The display is:

Edit ATM head unit:-17.00 cm

Entering the ATM head returns to the previous run screen with the new height active.
The correct head height when using the PG9000 internal barometer is the
distance from the reference level of the PG base to the mid line of the barometerin the Remote Electronics Module (see Section 3.12). If the Base and REM areon the same surface and the REM is horizontal, the distance is -17.0 cm (6.70 in) for PG9607. These values are the default values of ATM head height.

Note
The ATM head height is negative if the barometer is below the
PG9000 reference level and positive if the barometer is above thereference level. The ATM head fluid is air and it cannot bechanged.
The ATM head height unit is set by pressing[SPECIAL] and selecting <3head>, <2unit>. The default ATM headheight is -17.0 cm, which is the difference in height between the
PG9000 reference level and its internal barometer mounted on the
PG9000 Platform rear panel.

3.13.3.4 <3head>, <4piston>
Note
PG9607 is a unique configuration of PG9000 that utilizes afloating cylinder with a stationary piston. This is in contrast
with other PG9000 models that use a floating piston and astationary cylinder. For consistency ‘Piston’ refers to thefloating component on which mass is loaded in this and othernoted sections.
 OPERATION
To turn the PISTON head correction function ON and OFF (see Section 3.13.3,
PRINCIPLE), press [SPECIAL] and select <3head>, <4piston>.
Select <1on> to turn the PISTON head correction function ON so that a headcorrection for piston position IS automatically applied.
Select <2off> to turn the PISTON head correction function OFF so that a headcorrection for piston position IS NOT applied.

Note
The PISTON head is automatically turned OFF (has no effect) ingauge or differential measurement mode when the set pressure iszero (system vented or bypassed). When the system is vented or
bypassed, the piston position no longer affects the head.
Page 101© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3.13.4<4prefs>

 PURPOSE
To access a menu of PG9000 internal operational preferences and functions including screen
saver, sounds, time and date, instrument ID and user protection levels.
 OPERATION
To access the PREFS menu press [SPECIAL], andselect <4prefs>. The display is:

1ScrSvr 2sound 3time
4ID 5level

Prefs menu choices include:<1ScrSvr>: View and change the screen saver function (see Section 3.13.4.1).
<2sound>: View and change keypad press and piston position sound settings (see Section
3.13.4.2).
<3time>:View and edit the internal time and date settings (see Section 3.13.4.3).

<4ID>:

View and edit the PG9000 user ID (see Section 3.13.4.4).

<5level>:View and edit user protection levels and password (see Section 3.13.4.5).

3.13.4.1 <4prefs>, <1ScrSvr>
 PURPOSE
To adjust the time of inactivity after which PG9000’s SCREEN SAVER function
activates or to turn off the screen saver function.
 PRINCIPLE
PG9000 has a SCREEN SAVER function which causes the display to dim after afront panel key is NOT pressed for a certain amount of time. The default time
activates the screen saver after 10 minutes. The time can be adjusted by theuser or screen saving can be disabled.
 OPERATION
To access the SCREEN SAVER function, press [SPECIAL] and select<4prefs>, <1ScrSav>. Edit the time, in minutes, after which the screen saver will
activate to dim the screen. Set zero to disable the SCREEN SAVER function.

Note
Setting the screen saver time to zero disables the screen saver
function so that the display remains permanently at full brightness.

3.13.4.2 <4prefs>, <2sound> PURPOSE
To adjust the key press sounds and turn piston position sounds ON and OFF.
 PRINCIPLE
PG9000 provides audible feedback of valid and invalid key presses and of when
the piston leaves the high or low stop position (see Section 3.5). Key press
sounds can be adjusted in frequency or turned OFF completely. Piston position
sounds may be turned ON and OFF.
 OPERATION
To access the audible feedback adjustment function, press [SPECIAL] andselect <4prefs>, <2sound>.
Select <1keypad> to adjust keypad sounds. Select <2piston> to turn theposition sounds ON or OFF.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 102

3. GENERAL OPERATION

3.13.4.3 <4prefs>, <3time> PURPOSE
To view and edit the PG9000 internal time and date settings.
 OPERATION
To access the time function press[SPECIAL]
andselect<4prefs>,<3time>. The display is:

Edit: 1time 2date
08:32:11 am 20060101

Select <1time> to edit the time. Edit hours, then minutes, then am/pm by pressing[ENTER] at each entry. Seconds go to zero when minutes are entered.
Select <2date> to edit the date. The date must be specified in YYYYMMDD format.

Note
The PG9000 date and time are set to United States MountainStandard Time in the final test and inspection process at thefactory. If desired, use the date function to set your local timeand date.

3.13.4.4 <4prefs>, <4ID>
 PURPOSE
To view or edit the PG9000 user ID and to view the PG9000 serial number.
 PRINCIPLE
PG9000 has a factory programmed serial number that is included on the rear of
the platform and can be viewed in the introductory screen.
PG9000 also allows the user to store one unique, twelve character, alphanumeric ID number. This feature is frequently used to assign an organizational
control ID such as an asset number, tool number, standard number, etc. The ID
function allows the ID number to be viewed and edited. It also displays the
PG9000 factory serial number.
 OPERATION
To access the ID function press [SPECIAL] and select <4prefs>, <4ID>.
Select <1view> to view the current ID.
Select <2edit> to edit the ID.
The ID has twelve characters. When the edit screen is opened, the cursor is on thefirst character. Numerical values can be entered directly from the keypad.
In addition, the [←] and [→] keys can be used to toggle through a list of available
alpha numeric characters. Holding the key steps through the characters. Character
order going up ([→]) is: blank space, symbols, lower case letters, upper case letters,
numbers. Press [ENTER] to select a character and move to the next character.
When a character is selected the cursor moves to the next character. To leave a
blank character, press [ENTER] with the field for that character blank.
Press [ESCAPE] when all ID characters have been entered to access the<Save ID?> option. Select <1no> to abandon edits and exit or select <2yes> to savethe edited ID.

Note
The ID can be viewed and edited but it cannot be cleared or
reset by any reset functions (see Section 3.13.9).

Page 103© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3.13.4.5 <4prefs>, <5level>
 PURPOSE
To set user protection levels that restrict access to certain functions and to edit
the password required for changing User Levels.
 PRINCIPLE
PG9000’s front panel user interface provides the means to access all PG9000 user
defined data, settings and functions including calibration data. Inadvertent,
uninformed or unauthorized altering or deleting of data, settings and functions could
require extensive reconfiguration by the user and might cause invalid readings. For
these reasons, depending upon the application in which PG9000 is being used, it
may be desirable to restrict access to certain functions. The USER LEVEL function
provides a means of restricting access to certain functions. Four different levels of
security are available: none, low, medium and high.
Access to changing security levels can be left open, or be protected by apassword so that security levels can be used as a convenient way to avoid
accidental changing of data or as a secured means of preventing tampering with
PG9000 settings.
The security levels are structured to support typical operating environments asfollows:
None

This level is intended for use only by the system manager and/or calibration
facility. It allows access and editing in all areas including critical metrologicalinformation and other settings that affect measurement integrity.

Low

Low security is designed to protect the specific metrological information andsystem diagnostic and maintenance functions of the system against accidental
alteration. It is intended for an advanced operator performing many different
tasks. Low security is the default User Level setting.

MediumMedium security is designed to protect specific metrological information in the systemand to ensure that PG9000 is operated using consistent operational parameters.

High

High security protects all operating parameters. It is intended to minimize
operator choices (e.g., to perform repeated identical tests under consistent conditions).

 Caution•

PG9000 is delivered with the security level set to low to avoid
inadvertent altering of critical internal settings but withunrestricted access to changing security level setting. It is
recommended that the low security level be maintained at all
times and password protection be implemented if control oversetting of security levels is desired.

•If there is a risk of unauthorized changing of the security
level, changing authority should be password protected (seeOPERATION of this section).

•

The High security level disables remote communications andreturns an error message (“ERROR”) to all remote commands.
All other security levels have NO effect on remotecommunications.

The security levels are structured to support typical levels of operation.
Specifically, the security levels prevent execution of the functions in Table 17marked by “•”:© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 104

3. GENERAL OPERATION

Table 17. Security Levels - Functions NOT Executed Per Function/Level
FUNCTIONLOWMEDIUM

HIGH

[P-C]

•

[UNIT]•[MODE]•[SYSTEM]•[AMBIENT]••[HEAD]•[ROTATE]

•

[GEN]

•

[RES] (change setting)••[P OR M]••[SETUP], <1select>•••[SETUP], <2view>•[SETUP], <3edit>••[SPECIAL], <1PC/MS>, <any selection>, <1view>[SPECIAL], <1PC/MS>, <any selection>, <2edit>

•

•

•

[SPECIAL], <1PC/MS>, <any selection>, <3add>

•

•

•

[SPECIAL], <1PC/MS>, <any selection>, <4delete>

•

•

•
•

[SPECIAL], <1PC/MS>, <1PC>, <5select>[SPECIAL], <1PC/MS>, <2mass set>, <5select>••[SPECIAL], <1PC/MS>, <2mass bell>, <5select>••[SPECIAL], <2presU>••[SPECIAL], <3head>••[SPECIAL], <4prefs>••[SPECIAL], <4prefs>, <3time> (make changes)

•

•

•

[SPECIAL], <4prefs>, <4ID>, <2edit>

•

•

•
•

[SPECIAL], <6remote> (access)[SPECIAL], <6remote> (make changes)••[SPECIAL], <5prefs>, <3time> (make changes)

•

•

•

[SPECIAL], <6gl> (access)

•

•

•
•

[SPECIAL], <7cal>, (access)••[SPEICAL], <8AMH>, <any selection>••[SPECIAL], <9reset>••[SPECIAL], <7cal>, <any selection except 5Pposition>, <2cal>•[SPECIAL], <9reset>, <1sets>

•

•

•

[SPECIAL], <9reset>, <3com>

•

•

•

[SPECIAL], <9reset>, <4cal>

•

•

•

[SPECIAL], <9reset>, <5setups>

•

•

•

[SPECIAL], <9reset>, <6all>

•

•

•

Remote communications disabled

Page 105•© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALOPERATION

Note
PG9000 is delivered with NO active password so access to theUser Level menu is open. The User Level is set to <1Low>.
User Levels can be changed freely until a password has beencreated. Reset functions (see Section 3.13.9) do not affect the
password setting.
To access the User Level function, press [SPECIAL] and select <2level>.
If NO password yet exists or if thecorrect password has been entered, thedisplay is:

1change user level2edit password

Selecting <1change user level> brings
up the restriction menu:

Restriction: 1none
2low 3medium 4high

You can then select the current restriction level, or press [ESCAPE] to return tothe main run screen.
Selecting <2edit password> displays theuser password and allows it to be edited.
Passwords can be up to six numbers inlength and cannot start with a zero.

Password: pppppp
0 disables password

If 0 is entered as the password value, then the password is made inactive and apassword will NOT be required to access the User Level menu. This is thefactory default with a security level of <2low>.

CautionOnce a password has been entered, the User Level cannot bechanged without reentering the password.
If there is an active password, thePG9000 password entry screen appears.

PG9000 NS nnn-xx
Password: pppppp

The user must enter the user defined password or the factory secondary
password to proceed. When a password is entered correctly, operation proceeds
to the <1change user level 2edit password> screen.
The first field, <nnnn>, is the serial number of PG9000, followed by a second
field, <xx>. That counts the number of times that a secondary password has
been used. This second field increments each time a secondary password
is used. The third field, <pppppp>, is for standard password entry.
The factory secondary password is available in case the user’s password has
been misplaced or forgotten. It can be obtained by contacting a Fluke
Calibration Authorized Service Provider. The factory secondary password isdifferent for all PG9000’s and changes each time it is used.

3.13.5<5remote> PURPOSE
To configure the PG9000 COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4 and IEEE-488 communication ports.
To test COM1, COM2, COM3 and COM4 communications.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 106

3. GENERAL OPERATION PRINCIPLE
PG9000 has four RS232 communications ports referred to as COM1, COM2, COM3 andCOM4 and a single IEEE-488 port. COM1 and the IEEE-488 port are for communicating witha host computer (see Section 0). COM2 is for communicating with an external barometer
and/or vacuum gauge (see Section 3.13.5.4, 3.13.5.5) or for pass through commands to an
RS232 device. COM3 is reserved for communications with an automated pressure
generation/control component, COM4 is reserved for future use. The communication ports
can be set up from the PG9000 front panel.
PG9000 provides a self-test for its RS232 communication ports. The self-test allows
verification that the PG9000 RS232 ports (COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4) are operating
properly and that a valid interface cable is being used. (see Section 3.13.5.3)
 OPERATION
To access the port communications settings, press [SPECIAL] and select <5remote>.
Select <1COM1>, <2COM2>, <3COM3>, <4COM4> or <5IEEE-488> to view and edit thatport’s communications settings (see Section 4.2.1 for information on COM port settings).
Selecting <2COM2> includes the choice to set up external barometer communications aswell as the port’s communications settings. Select <1settings> to view and edit COM2
communications settings.
Select <2baro> to view and edit external barometer
communications settings (see Section 3.13.5.4).
To access the RS232 self-test press [SPECIAL], <5remote>, <5RS232test>.

3.13.5.1 COM1, COM2, COM3 and COM4 (RS232)
The COMx ports can be set for the specific settings required by the user.
The settings are baud rate, parity, data bits and stop bits. The available options
are found in Table 18. COM1, COM2, COM3 and COM4 Available Settings.
Table 18. COM1, COM2, COM3 and COM4 Available Settings
BAUD RATEPARITY

300, 600, 1 200, 2 400, 4 800, 9 600, 19 200
NONE, ODD or EVENDATA BITS

7 or 8STOP BITS

1 or 2TERMINATORS<CR><LF> or <LF><CR>

The default COMx settings are 2400, E, 7,1, <CR><LF> or <LF><CR> for all three
COM ports.
PG9000 appends a carriage return (<CR>) and a line feed (<LF>) or <LF><CR>
to all messages that are sent out of the COM1 port to the host. It looks for acarriage return to terminate incoming messages and ignores line feeds.

Note
The user MUST wait for a reply to each message sent to PG9000
before sending another message to it (see Section 4.3).

3.13.5.2 IEEE-488
The IEEE-488 port address can be defined from 1 to 31. The default address is 10.
PG9000 sends a line feed (<LF>) and asserts the EOI line at the end of alltransmitted messages. It looks for a line feed and/or assertion of the EOI line toterminate incoming messages.

Page 107© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3.13.5.3 RS232 Self Test
The RS232 self-test is provided to check the PG9000 COM ports and theinterface cable independently of an external device or computer.
If there is difficulty communicating with PG9000 from a host computer
using RS232, the RS232 self test can help establish that the PG9000 COM1
port and the interface cable are good.
To run a self test of a pair of RS232 ports (COM1 and COM2, COM1 and COM3
or COM1 and COM4), press [SPECIAL] and select <5remote>, <5RS232test>.
Then select <1COM2> to test COM1 and COM2 or <2COM3> to test COM1 andCOM3 or <3COM4> to test COM1 and COM4.
The display prompts you to connect COM1 to COM2, COM1 to COM3 or COM1
and COM4 using a standard pin-to-pin DB-9F to DB-9M RS232 cable (seeSection 4.2.1).
Once the cable has been installed, press [ENTER] to run the self-test. The test
is first executed in the COM1→COM2/3/4 direction and then in the
COM2/3/4→COM1 direction.
If the COM1→COM2 (or COM3/4) test passes: <PASSED> displays briefly
and the test proceeds to COM2/3/4 →COM1.
If COM2/3/4→COM1 passes: <PASSED> is displayed briefly followed by theconclusion, <PG9000 RS232 test has PASSED>.
If a test fails: Execution is suspended until [ENTER] is pressed.

Note
The PG9000 RS232 test can fail for two reasons:
1. The RS232 cable being used is incorrect (see Section 4.2.1,
for information on the correct cable). An incorrect or faulty
cable will fail on all of the ports when testing.
2. One of the COM ports is defective.
The reason for failed communications is almost always a cableor incorrect RS232 interface settings. Be sure that these arecorrect before concluding that a COM port is defective.

3.13.5.4 External Barometer (RPM) Communications (COM2)
 PURPOSE
To set up communications with an external barometer from which PG9000 will
read the value of atmospheric pressure used in its internal calculations. The external
device is also used for reading the static pressure when PG9000 is used indifferential mode (see Section 3.11.4.1).

Note
The source of the values of atmospheric pressure used by
PG9000 in its internal calculations is determined by the AtmP
setting in the current SETUP file (see Section 3.12). Setting up
communications with an external barometer does NOT set
PG9000 to utilize the external barometer.
 PRINCIPLE
PG9000 uses atmospheric pressure values in its calculations of defined pressure(see Section 7.2). The source of the value is determined by the AtmP setting in
the current SETUP file (see Section 3.10). One of the possible sources is
COM2, which allows an external barometer, connected to PG9000’s COM2
RS232 port to be read automatically to obtain the atmospheric pressure values
that are used. In order to communicate with an the external barometer PG9000’s© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 108

3. GENERAL OPERATIONCOM2 must be properly set up. This setup occurs by pressing [SPECIAL] andselecting <5remote>, <2COM2>, <2baro>.
 OPERATIONTo set up PG9000’s COM2 port to communicate with an external barometer,press [SPECIAL] and select <5remote>, <2COM2>, <2baro>. Select <1RPMx>
if the external barometer is a DH Intruments RPM. Select <2user> to set up
communications with a barometer other than a DH Intruments RPM.
Setting Up for User Barometer Communications

Note
For a remote barometer to be able to be used for automatedatmospheric pressure readings on PG9000 COM2, the following
requirements apply to the remote barometer’s communications:• Replies to a request to send string within 2 seconds.
• Accepts <CR, LF> terminators.
• Supplies <CR> or <CR, LF> terminators.
• Request to send string must be printable alphanumeric(no control modes or nulls).
After pressing [SPECIAL] and selecting<5remote>,<2COM2>,<2baro>,<2user>, the display is:COM2 meas req string

The string value is entered on the second line. It may have up to 20 characters.
When the string screen is opened, the cursor is on the first character.
Numerical values can be entered directly from the keypad. In addition, the [←] and[→] keys can be used to toggle through a list of available alpha numeric characters.
Holding the key steps through the characters. Character order going up ([→]) is:blank space, symbols, lower case letters, upper case letters, numbers.
Press [ENTER] to select a character and move to the next character. When acharacter is selected the cursor moves to the next character. To leave a characterblank, press [ENTER] with the field for that character blank. After the last characterhas been entered, press [ESCAPE]. This causes a <Save edits?> screen
to appear. Select <2yes> to save the edited string and move to the next screen.
th
Select <1no> abandon the edits. Also, if [ENTER] is pressed on the 20 character,the string is saved automatically and operation advances to the next screen.

Note
The
external
barometerparameters
includingthecommunication string can also be set by remote command,
which is more convenient than front panel entry (see Section
4.3.4.2, “UDD” command).
After the string value has been entered
the display is:

Reply conv coef:
1.000000 Pa/unit<conv coef> is the conversion coefficient that PG9000 will use to convert
readings from the external barometer to the pressure unit of measure
Pascal [Pa]. If the readings from the external barometer are NOT Pascal, edit
the conversion coefficient value as needed to convert the readings to Pascal.
When the conversion coefficient is entered
the next setup screen is opened. The
display is:

Leading characters toStrip: 0

This entry specifies the leading characters in the return string that precede thenumerical value of the pressure. PG9000 will strip the specified number ofPage 109© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

characters from the front of the return string and assume that the next characteris the first number defining the current value of atmospheric pressure.
To verify whether external barometer communications have been set up properly,
select a SETUP file that specifies COM2 under AtmP (see Section 3.12) and verify
that communications with the external barometer are achieved. Then view current
barometer readings in the AMBIENT run screen (see Section 3.11.6) and verify
that the readings are correct. Note that a fluid head correction should be set if theexternal barometer is not at the PG9000 reference level. This correction may
cause the reading of the external barometer and the value of ambient pressure
indicated by the PG9000 to not be identical (see Section 3.13.3.3).

Note
For communications with an external barometer on COM2 to beestablished properly, the inquiry string to send to the barometermust be defined following this section and the PG9000 COM2
port and barometer COM port must have the samecommunications settings.
Press [SPECIAL] and select<5remote>, <2COM2>, <1settings> to set up PG9000 COM2
communications settings.
When unable to establish
communications between COM2 and the external barometer,
consider using the PG9000 RS232 self test to verify COM2
operation (see Section 3.13.5.3).
If both a barometer and avacuum gauge are connected, the barometer must be an RPM3
or RPM4 and must always be the first device connected to the
PG9000 Platform COM2.

3.13.5.5 External Vacuum Gauge Communications (COM2)
 PURPOSE
To set up communications with an external vacuum gauge from which PG9000
will read the value of reference vacuum under the bell jar used in the calculation ofabsolute pressure in absolute by vacuum measurement mode (see Section 3.11.4).

Note
The source of the value of vacuum pressure used by PG9000 in
its internal calculations is determined by the Vac setting in thecurrent SETUP file (see Section 3.12.
Setting up
communications with an external vacuum gauge does NOT set
PG9000 to utilize the external vacuum gauge.
 PRINCIPLE
PG9000 uses a value of reference vacuum under the bell jar in its calculation of
the pressure defined by the PG in absolute by vacuum measurement mode (seeSection 7.2). The source of the value is determined by the Vac setting in thecurrent SETUP file (see Section 3.12). The standard souce of this value isCOM2, which allows an vacuum gauge connected to PG9000’s COM2 RS232
port to be read automatically to obtain the reference vacuum values that areused. In order to communicate with the external vacuum gauge, PG9000’s
COM2 must be properly set up. This setup occurs by pressing [SPECIAL] andselecting <5remote>, <2COM2>, <3vac>.

Note
If a DH Intruments RPM is being used on COM2 for externalmeasurement of barometric pressure, the vacuum gauge may
be connected to COM2 of the RPM. In this case, COM2 of the
RPM barometer must be set to have the same communication
settings as the external vacuum gauge. If both a barometerand a vacuum gauge are connected, the barometer must always
be the first device connected to the PG9000 Platform COM2.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 110

3. GENERAL OPERATION

 OPERATIONTo set up or verify PG9000’s COM2 port to communicate with an external vacuum
gauge, press [SPECIAL] and select <5remote>, <2COM2>, <3vac>. Select<1RPMx> if the external vacuum gauge is a DH Intruments RPM. Select <2user> to
set up communications with a vacuum gauge other than a DH Intruments RPM.
Select <3dflts> to set COM2 settings, measurement request string and conversion
coefficient to support the standard vacuum gauge supplied with the PG9000 vacuum
reference hardware (see Section 2.1.2.4 and below).
Setting Up for User Vacuum Gauge Communications

Note
For an external vacuum gauge to be able to be used forautomated reference vacuum readings on PG7601 COM2 or a
DH Intruments RPM’s COM2, the following requirements apply
to the remote vacuum gauge’s communications:• Replies to a request to send string within 2 seconds.
• Accepts <CR, LF> terminators.
• Supplies <CR> or <CR, LF> terminators.
• Request to send string must be printable alphanumeric(no control modes or nulls).
After pressing [SPECIAL] and selecting<5remote>, <2COM2>, <3vac>, <2user>,the display is:COM2 meas req string

The measurement request string value is entered on the second line. It may have up
to 20 characters.
When the string screen is opened, the cursor is on the first character.
Numerical values can be entered directly from the keypad. In addition, the [←] and[→] keys can be used to toggle through a list of available alpha numeric characters.
Holding the key steps through the characters. Character order going up ([→]) is:blank space, symbols, lower case letters, upper case letters, numbers.
Press [ENTER] to select a character and move to the next character. When acharacter is selected the cursor moves to the next character. To leave a characterblank, press [ENTER] with the field for that character blank. After the last characterhas been entered, press [ESCAPE]. This causes a <Save edits?> screen
to appear. Select <2yes> to save the edited string and move to the next screen.
th
Select <1no> abandon the edits. Also, if [ENTER] is pressed on the 20 character,the string is saved automatically and operation advances to the next screen.

Note
The external vacuum gauge parameters including thecommunication string can also be set by remote command
which is more convenient than front panel entry (see Section
4.3.4.2, “UDV” command). By default the external vacuum
gauge parameters are preset to match the standard external
vacuum gauge supplied with the PG9000 vacuum reference
hardware (see Section 2.1.2.4).
After the string value has been entered
the display is:

Reply conv coef:
1.000000 Pa/unit<conv coef> is the conversion coefficient that PG7600 will use to convert
readings from the external vacuum gauge to the pressure unit of measure
Pascal [Pa]. If the readings from the external vacuum gauge are NOT Pascal,
edit the conversion coefficient value as needed to convert the readings to Pascal.

Page 111© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

When the conversion coefficient is entered
the next setup screen is opened. The
display is:

Leading characters toStrip: 0

This entry specifies the leading characters in the return string that precede thenumerical value of the pressure. PG9000 will strip the specified number ofcharacters from the front of the return string and assume that the next character isthe first number defining the current value of reference vacuum.
To verify whether external vacuum gauge communications have been set up
properly, select a SETUP file that specifies COM2 under Vac (see Section 3.12) andverify that communications with the external vacuum gauge are achieved. Then view
current vacuum readings in the AMBIENT run screen (see Section 3.11.6) and verify
that the readings are correct. If the external vacuum gauge is not connected or not
responding, “-TO-” will be indicated in the AMBIENT run screen instead of a vacuum
measurement. If the reply is not as expected, then “INVD” will be indicated.

Note3.13.6•For communications with an external vacuum gauge on COM2
to be established properly, the inquiry string to send to thevacuum gauge must be defined following this section and the
PG9000 COM2 port and vacuum gauge COM port must havethe same communications settings (or if the vacuum gauge isconnected to COM2 of a DH Intruments RPM, the RPM COM2and vacuum gauge COM port must have the samecommunication settings. Press [SPECIAL] and select<5remote>, <2COM2>, <1settings> to set up PG9000 COM2
communications settings. When unable to establish
communications between COM2 and the external vacuum
gauge, consider using the PG9000 RS232 self test to verify
COM2 operation (see Section 3.13.5.3).

•

Selecting [SPECIAL], <5remote>, <2COM2>, <3vac>, <3dflts>
sets COM2 settings, measurement request string andconversion coefficient to support the standard vacuum gauge
supplied with the PG9000 vacuum reference hardware (seeSection 2.1.2.4).
COM2 settings: 9600, N,8,1
Measurement request string: p
Conversion coefficient: 1
Leading characters to strip: 0<6gl>

 PURPOSE
To view and set the value of local gravity used by PG9000 in reference pressure calculations(see Section 7.2) when gl is specified as the gravity value in SETTINGS (see Section 3.12).
 OPERATION
To access the PG9000 local gravity value (gl), press[SPECIAL] and select <6gl>. The display is:

Local gravity:
9.806650 m/s2

The value displayed is the PG9000 local gravity value. This value can be edited unless it is2
protected by the current security level. The default value is normal gravity of 9.806650 m/s .

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 112

3. GENERAL OPERATIONNote
The local gravity (gl) value may or may not be used by PG9000 in its
calculations of defined pressure. Whether gl or another value, such as
normal gravity, is used is determined by the current SETUP file (seeSection 3.12), not by what is entered by pressing [SPECIAL] andselecting <6gl>.

3.13.7<7cal>

 PURPOSE
To view the output of and adjust or calibrate PG9000’s internal sensors and measurement
systems including:Barometric pressure

Ambient relative humidity

Ambient temperature

Piston-cylinder module temperature

VacuumPiston position

Piston rotation rate

Note
In normal operation, the measurements made by PG9000s internal sensors
can be viewed in the SYSTEM and AMBIENT run screens by pressing[SYSTEM] or [AMBIENT] (see Sections 3.11.5 and 3.11.6).
 PRINCIPLE/OPERATION
PG9000 internal sensor adjustment functions are considered part of PG9000 maintenanceand are covered in the maintenance section of this manual (see Section 5).

3.13.8<8AMH>

 PURPOSE
Control optional AMH automated mass handling system directly and view its status (seeSection 3.7).
 PRINCIPLE
An optional automated mass handling system is available for PG9000 Platforms. AMH-100VAC operates in either atmospheric reference (gauge or absolute by ATM) or vacuum
reference (absolute by vac or differential) modes (see Section 3.11.4).
Operation of the AMH is integrated into PG9000 Platform operation so that mass handlingoccurs automatically when necessary. [SPECIAL], <8AMH> accesses functions to view thecurrent mass loading status, load all masses, unloaded all masses and load specific masses.
 OPERATION
To access the AMH status and control functions, an AMH automated mass handler mustalready be initialized by selecting an AMH type mass set (see Section 3.13.1.10). To accessthe AMH status and control functions, press [SPECIAL], <8AMH>.
Select <1status> for a display of the current loaded/not loaded status of AMH masses (theindication is the same as the discreet control function screen in Section 3.13.8.2).
Select <2control> to control AMH directly:
Select <1up/down> to move the AMH mass handler up or down (see Section
3.13.8.1).
Select <2discreet> to specify masses to be loaded and unloaded (see Section
3.13.8.2).
Select <3loadall> to load all the AMH masses onto the piston (see Section 3.13.8.3).
Select <4unloadall> to unload all the AMH masses from the piston (see Section
3.13.8.4).

Page 113© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3.13.8.1 <2control>, <1up/down> PURPOSE
To move the AMH mass load to the up or down position (see Section 3.7.1).
 OPERATION
To move the AMH mass handler to the up and down positions, press [SPECIAL],<8AMH>, <1up/down>.
The display indicates the current position. Press [ENTER] to change theposition.

 Warning
Do not put fingers or anything else under the AMH trim mass
tray. When the mass load is lowered, it will pinch or crush
anything under it.

3.13.8.2 <2control>, <2discreet> PURPOSE
To load and unload specific AMH masses.
 OPERATION
To load and unload specific AMH masses, press [SPECIAL], <8AMH>,<2control>, <2discreet>.
1* 2 4* 8
64 Main:1

The display is:

1632

The <1>, <2>, <4>, <8>, <16>, <32> and <64> indicate the 0.1, 0.2, 0.4, 0.8, 1.6,
3.2 and 6.4 kg masses. <*> indicates that the mass is loaded. Move the cursor
to a mass and press [+/-] or [.] to change its status.
<Main:> indicates the number of main masses that are loaded. Edit this number
to the desired value.
If any condition in the discreet display is changed the bottom right of the display
changes to <ENT loads>. Press [ENTER] to causes AMH to operate to load the
new mass configuration. Press [ESCAPE] to return to the AMH menu with nochange in mass load.

 Warning
Do not put fingers or anything else under the AMH trim mass
tray. When the mass load is lowered, it will pinch or crush
anything under it.

3.13.8.3 <2control>, <3loadall> PURPOSE
To clear the AMH mass handler and cause all the masses in the AMH mass set to
be loaded onto the piston. The function is used to remove all the masses from the
AMH mass handler and prepare it to be removed or installed on the PG9000
platform.
 OPERATION
To load all AMH masses, press [SPECIAL], <8AMH>, <3loadall>. Confirm theload all instruction and AMH proceeds to lower all the masses onto the piston.

 Warning
Do not put fingers or anything else under the AMH trim mass
tray. When the mass load is lowered, it will pinch or crush
anything under it.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 114

3. GENERAL OPERATION

3.13.8.4 <2control>, <4unloadall> PURPOSE
To clear the AMH mass handler and cause all the masses in the AMH mass set
to be unloaded from the piston (retained in the AMH automated mass hander).
 OPERATION
To unload all AMH masses, press [SPECIAL], <8AMH>, <4unloadall>. Confirm
the unload all instruction and AMH proceeds to raise all the masses off the piston.
When the mass handler lowers, the bell and mass lifting shaft are still loaded on thepiston.

 Warning
Do not put fingers or anything else under the AMH trim mass
tray. When the mass load is lowered, it will pinch or crush
anything under it.

3.13.9<9reset> PURPOSE
To reset various PG9000 settings to default or factory values.
PG9000 stores its user definable settings in non-volatile memory. The reset menu allows theuser to selectively or completely reset these settings to factory defaults. Resets clear
settings that the user may have made, and should be used only to restore the PG9000 to a
known state. PG9000 will go through its reboot routine after any type of reset is executed.
 OPERATION
To access the reset choices press [SPECIAL] andselect <9reset>. The display is:

1sets 2units 3com
4cal 5setups 6all

Select the desired reset. After confirmation, the reset occurs. A reset always puts PG9000
through its start up routine as if power had been turned OFF and back ON.
See Sections 3.11.9.1 through 3.11.9.6 for detailed information on the specific reset choices.

 Caution
Reset functions change user settings that affect pressure measurement. If
not used properly, resetting can cause out of tolerance measurements.
Reset functions should only be used by qualified personnel with reference
to this manual for information on the reset functions.

3.13.9.1 <9reset>, <1sets>
 PURPOSE/OPERATION
To access Reset - Sets, press [SPECIAL] and select <1reset>, <1sets>.
Reset - Sets clears and sets to default the user settings. This includes:•

Pressure unit of measure to pressure unit #1 of [UNIT] (see Section
3.11.3).

•

Measurement mode to gauge (see Section 3.11.4).

•

DUT head height to zero and ATM head height to default (see Sections
3.11.7, 3.13.3.3).

•

DUT head height units to centimeters (see Section 3.13.3.2).

•

PISTON head correction ON (see Section 3.13.3.4).

•

Set up file to #1 (see Section 3.12).

•

Active piston-cylinder module, mass set and mass loading bell to #1 (firstin list) (see Sections 3.13.1.5, 3.13.1.10, 3.13.1.15).

•

Mass loading resolution to 0.01 g (see Section 3.11.10).

Page 115© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL•

Automatic rotation off (see Section 3.11.8).

•

Automatic rotation pre-decel on (see Section 3.11.8.1).

•

Automatic pressure generation off (see Section 3.11.9).

•

Automatic pressure generation controller raise function to OFF (seeSection 3.11.9.2).

•

Automatic pressure generation controller tolerance to 0.05% of full scale(see Section 3.11.9.4).

•

Automatic pressure generation controller refloat function to ON (seeSection 3.11.9.5).

•

Mode to pressure to mass (see Section 3.11.12).

•

Screen saver to 10 minutes (see Section 3.13.4.1).

•

PC sounds to ON and keyboard sounds to medium frequency (seeSection 3.13.4.2).

3.13.9.2 <9reset>, <2units> PURPOSE/OPERATION
To access Reset - Units, press [SPECIAL] and select <1reset>, <2units>.
Reset - Units clears and sets to default all unit of measure functions. This includes:•[UNIT] pressure unit of measure selections to defaults and active unit to#1 (see Section 3.11.3).

•

Sets the user pressure unit coefficient to 1.00/Pa (see Section 3.11.3.1).

3.13.9.3 <9reset>, <3com>
 OPERATION/PURPOSE
To access Reset - Com, press [SPECIAL] and select <1reset>, <3com>.
Reset - Com clears and sets to default the PG9000 communications ports(see Section 3.11.5). This includes:
COM1, COM3 and COM4
Baud Rate
ParityData Bits
Stop Bits
Terminating Characters

2 400
Even
7
1
<CR>, <LF>

COM2
Baud Rate
ParityData Bits
Stop Bits
Terminating Characters

9 600
None
8
1
<CR>, <LF>

IEEE-488 (GPIB)
Address
Terminating Characters

10<CR>, <LF>

COM2 User Barometer Inquiry String and Characters

see Section 3.13.5.4

COM2 Vacuum Gauge Inquiry String and Characters

see Section 3.13.5.5

3.13.9.4 <9reset>, <4cal>

OPERATION/PURPOSE Caution
Use special caution with this reset as critical calibration data
may be altered.
© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 116

3. GENERAL OPERATION

To access Reset - Cal, press [SPECIAL] and select <1reset>, <4cal>.
Reset - Cal DOES NOT reset piston-cylinder module, mass set and mass bell files.
There is no user available reset for them.
Reset - Cal clears and sets to default the user calibration coefficients for PG9000
on-board sensors (see Section 5.2.1). This includes:
Barometric Sensor
Adder

0

Multiplier

1

Calibration Date

20000101

Humidity Sensor
Adder

0

Multiplier

1

Calibration Date

20000101

Ambient Temperature Sensor
Adder

0

Multiplier

1

Calibration Date

20000101

Piston-Cylinder Module Temperature Sensor
RZ
Slope
Calibration Date

100.000 Ω
0.389620000101

Vacuum Gauge
Adder

0

Multiplier

1

Calibration Date

20000101

Note
Reset - Cal has NO effect on the reference resistance values
used to calibrate PG9000s internal ohmic measurement system(see Section 5.2.1.5).

3.13.9.5 <9reset>, <5setups>
To access Reset - Setups, press [SPECIAL] and select <1reset>, <5setups>.
Reset - Setups deletes all SETUP files and selects SETUP file #1 as the active
SETUP file (see Section 3.12).

3.13.9.6 <9reset>, <6all>
 OPERATION/PURPOSE
To return PG9000 to the original, as delivered, factory condition.
To access Reset - All, press [SPECIAL] and select <1reset>, <6all>.
•

Performs the functions of the Sets, Units, Cal and Com resets(see Sections 3.13.9.1 to 3.13.9.5).

•

User security level to low, but does not affect the User Level password(see Section 3.13.4.5).

•

Local gravity to 9.80665 m/s (see Section 3.13.6)

2

Page 117© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Notes© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 118

4.

Remote Operation

4.1

Overview

Most of the PG9000 Terminal’s front panel functions can also be executed by commands froma remote computer. The host computer can communicate with PG9000 using the COM1 RS232 port
or the IEEE-488 port located on the PG9000 Remote Electronics Module (REM) rear panel. The command
syntax is the same for either port except when using the IEEE STD. 488.2 Common commands.

4.2

Interfacing

Sending a command to PG9000 places it in remote mode. The function keys on the front panel arelocked-out, except for the [SYSTEM] and [AMBIENT] keys which still respond to allow the user to change
the data displayed. Pressing the [ESC] key returns PG9000 to local mode unless the “REMOTE”
command was sent which locks out keypad operation until the “LOCAL” command is sent.
Most remote commands return a reply within 500 ms. The following commands may query external
devices connected to PG9000’s COM2 and/or COM3 ports and can take up to 5 to 10 seconds to reply:“MASS=” (possible communications with an external AMH mass handler)“PGEN=” (requires communications with an external pressure controller)“SETUP=” (possible communications with external barometer or vacuum gauge)“AMHLOAD=” (possible delay while AHM completes the action)
You must wait for this reply before issuing another command to PG9000. This ensures that PG9000 has
completed the command. An exception is the use of any of the IEEE STD. 488.2 Common Commands(see Section 4.3.4.1) via the IEEE-488 interface (common commands all start with an asterisk, “*”). The
common commands only generate a reply if using the COM1 port or if the query form of the common
command is used (command followed by a “?”).

4.2.1

RS232 interface

To establish RS232 communications a standard pin-to-pin DB-9F to DB-9M RS232 cablemust be used to connect the host COM port to PG9000 COM1. The interface settings of both
ports must be the same.

Note
PG9000 supports an independent RS232 self-test to verify that the PG9000
RS232 ports are operating correctly and the interface cable being used isvalid. Use this self-test to troubleshoot if you are having difficulty
establishing communications with any PG9000 COM1 (see Section
3.13.5.3).

4.2.1.1

COM1

The PG9000 COM1 RS232 interface is located on the PG9000 Remote
Electronics Module (REM) rear panel. It is a 9-pin female DB-9F connector
configured as a DCE device. Data is transmitted out of PG9000 using pin 2, andis received on pin 3. This allows a standard pin-to-pin DB-9M to DB-9F RS232
cable to be used to connect to a DTE host (see Table 19). Handshaking is NOT
required or supported.
COM1 RS232 commands must be terminated with at least a single carriage
return character, while line feed characters are ignored. All RS232 responses
from PG9000 are terminated with a carriage return character and a line feedcharacter (either <CR><LF> or <LF><CR> see Section 3.13.5.1).
Page 119© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Table 19. COM1 DB-9F Pin Designation
IBM PC/XT DB-9F CONNECTIONSIBM PC/XT DB-9M to PG9000 DB9F CONNECTIONS

DB-25M

DB-9F

DB-9M

DB-9F

2

3

3

3

3

2

2

2

7

5

5

5

4.2.1.2

COM2, COM3 and COM4

The PG9000 COM2, COM3 and COM4 RS232 interfaces are located on the
PG9000 Remote Electronics Module (REM) rear panel. They are 9-pin male DB9M connectors configured as a DTE device. Data is transmitted out of PG9000
using
pin
3
and
is
receivedonpin 2. This allows a standard pin-to-pin DB-9F to DB-9M RS232 cable to be
used to connect to a DCE slave (see Table 20). Handshaking is NOT required or
supported.
COM2, COM3 and COM4 are used by the PG9000 Platform to communicate withexternal devices. An external barometer and/or vacuum gauge can be connected to
COM2 (see Sections 3.13.5.4, 3.13.5.5. An automated pressure control component
can be connected to COM3. Almost any RS232 device that uses text commands
and a <CR> or <CR><LF> terminator can be connected to COM4 using the PG9000“PASSTHRU” command to pass commands from the host to the device.
Table 20. COM2, COM3 and COM4 DB-9M Pin DesignationPIN #FUNCTIONDESCRIPTION

2RxD

This pin accepts serial data from another PG9000 or anotherdevice.

3

TxD

This pin transmits serial data from the PG9000 to another
PG9000 or another device.

4

DTR

Data Terminal Ready. Held at 5 Volts.

5

Grn

This pin is the common return for the TxD and RxD signals.

IBM PC/XT DB-25F to DB-9M
CONNECTIONS

4.2.2

IBM PC/XT DB-9F to PG9000 DB9M CONNECTIONS

DB-25F

DB-9M

DB-9F

DB-9M

2

3

3

3

3

2

2

2

7

5

5

5

IEEE-488 (GPIB)

The PG9000 IEEE-488 interface is located on the PG9000 Remote Electronics Module(REM) rear panel. The physical and electrical interface conforms to IEEE Std 488.1-1987
Subset E2 and IEEE Std. 488.2-1992. Do NOT attempt to communicate with the IEEE-488
interface while using the COM1 interface. The IEEE-488 receive buffer is 250 bytes deep.
PG9000 will hold OFF release of the NRFD handshake line until it can service and empty thereceive buffer. This keeps the buffer from overflowing.
IEEE-488 commands must be terminated with a single line feed character along with theassertion of the EOI line. All IEEE-488 responses from PG9000 are terminated with a line
feed character along with the assertion of the EOI line. Replies are held in a buffer until thehost computer gets them, so it is possible to have old replies in this buffer while expecting
new replies from a just issued command.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 120

4. REMOTE OPERATION

4.3

Address

10

Terminating Characters<CR> and <LF> with EOI asserted with <LF>

IEEE Local Functions
Supported

SH1, AH1, T4, L2, RL2, DC2

Physical Interface

IEEE-488.2 with tri-state bus drivers

IEEE-488

To establish IEEE-488 communications the host computer musthave an IEEE-488 card and PG9000 must be correctly addressed.
PG9000’s IEEE-488 address can be set locally from the front panel
using [SPECIAL], <5Remote> (see Section 3.13.5.2). An IEEE-488
interface cable must be used.

Parallel poll mode is not supported

Commands
4.3.1

Command Syntax

All PG9000 commands are ASCII strings and are summarized in Table 21. The user must
wait for PG9000 to reply before sending another command. An exception to this is the use of
any of the IEEE Std. 488.2 Common Commands via the IEEE-488 interface (these Common
Commands are shown first in 4.3.4.1 and always start with an asterisk: “*”). The common
commands only generate a reply if using the COM1 port or if the query form of the common
command is used (command followed by a “?”).

4.3.2

Command Summary
Table 21. Command Summary
COMMANDDESCRIPTIONABORTInterrupt PG9000 activity and put it in an idle state

AMPHx(=)

Set or read the source for ambient humidity

AMBPx(=)

Set or read the source for ambient pressure

AMBTx(=)

Set or read the source for ambient temperature

AMB

Read back the current ambient conditions

AMHERR

Read error messages from AMH automated mass handler

AMHLOAD(=)

Load or unload all AMH masses

AMHMS(=)

Read or set the discreet AMH mass load

AROT(=)

Set or read the current automated motorized rotation status

ATMHEIGHT(=)

Set or read the ATM head height

BELL(=)

Read or select the mass loading bell to use

BELLx(=)

Read or set a mass loading bell’s information

CALx(=)

Set or read the calibration coefficients for an internal sensor*CLS

Clear the status registers and all queues

COMx(=)

Set or read the COMx port configuration

DATE(=)

Set or read the current date

DIFLOAD

Execute the mass load determined by the DIFSETUP command

DIFOFFSET(=)

Read or set the differential mode RPM offset value

DIFSETUP

Prepare PG7601 to determine the differential mode RPM offset

DUTHEIGHT(=)

Set or read the DUT head height*ESE(?)

Read or set the Event Status Enable Register

ERR

Read the last error message*ESR?

Read the Event Status Register*IDN?

Identify the product and software version

LOCALG(=)

Set or read the local gravity

LOCAL

Local operation

Page 121© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALCOMMANDDESCRIPTIONMASSSETx(=)

Set or read the mass set values

MASSx(=)

Set or read the mass set data

MASS(=)

Set or read the selected mass set

MEDIA(=)

Set or read the DUT head medium

MEM

Read the memory OK flag

MMODE(=)

Set or read the measurement mode

MRES(=)

Set or read the mass loading resolution

MROT(=)

Set or read the manual motorized rotation status

MR

Read the current mass load

MS=

Specify a new mass target, loading masses if AMH enabled

OHMS

Read the ambient PRT and piston-cylinder PRT resistance*OPC(?)

Read or set the Operation Complete register (not applicable to the PG9000)*OPT?

Read the PG9000 options installed

PCTx(=)

Set or read the source for the piston-cylinder temp

PGEN(=)

Set or read the automated pressure generation setting

PISTONRDYx(=)

Set or read piston rotation rate limits.

PISTONVARx(=)

Set or read additional piston variables

PISTONx(=)

Set or read the piston header information

PISTON(=)

Set or read the piston in use

PPC=

Send a command to an external pressure generation/control component.

PPCPR

Read the pressure measured by a PPC pressure controller connected to
PG9000’s COM3.

PPOS

Read the current piston position

PRTPCnSet or read the piston cylinder temperature PRT information

PR

Read the current PG9000 defined pressure and “ready” status

PS=

Specify a new PG9000 target pressure, loading masses if AMH enabled

READYx(=)

Set or read the ready criteria for a specific “Setup”

READYCK(=)

Set or read the ready check flag status

REMOTESet the PG9000 into local lockout condition

RESET

Set basic PG9000 operating conditions to default.
“Reset, Sets”.

RESUME

Resume the suspended process of setting a new pressure by remote command.

RESUME(=mode)

Set the resume mode, which determines whether a pressure setting process
initiated by remote command will pause after target entry and require the
RESUME command to continue .

*RSTReset user settings to factory defaults

SETUP(=)

Set or read the setup to use

SN

Read the PG9000 serial number

SPEED

Read the piston rotation speed*SRE(?)

Read or set the Service Request Register*STB?

Read the Status Byte

TIME(=)

Set or read the current time

*TST?

Read the system self test results

UCOEF

Read the current pressure units conversion coefficient

UDD(=)

Set or read the user defined external barometer settings

UDU(=)

Set or read the user defined pressure unit

UDV(=)

Set or read the user defined external vacuum gauge settings

UL(=)

Set or read the upper limit of an external pressure generation/control component.

UNIT(=)

Set or read the current pressure unit

VACPx(=)

Set or read the source for the vacuum measurement© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 122

Equivalent to front panel

4. REMOTE OPERATIONCOMMANDDESCRIPTIONVAC(=)

Set or read the vacuum reference flag

VENT(=)

To vent the test pressure to atmosphere if an automated pressure
generation/control component is being used for automatic pressure generation.

VER

Read version number of the internal software#

Send a command through PG9000 to an external RPM on COM2

4.3.3

Error Messages

The PG9000 always replies to a command. If the command is incorrect or contains invaliddata, an error number is returned in the form “ERR# n” where n is an integer number that
represents a specific error. This allows for easy error trapping by the host computer. Table
22 is a list of the possible error numbers and the error description for each.
Table 22. Error Messages
REPLY

DESCRIPTION

ERR #0OK

ERR #1First argument missing or out of range

ERR #2

Second argument missing or out of range

ERR #3

Third argument missing or out of range

ERR #4

Fourth argument missing or out of range

ERR #5

Fifth argument missing or out of range

ERR #6

Sixth argument missing or out of range

ERR #7

Seventh argument missing or out of range

ERR #8Eighth argument missing or out of range

ERR #9Unknown command

ERR #10Motorized rotation recovering from overload

ERR #11

Command missing argument

ERR #12System overpressured

ERR #13External RPM or PG9000 not detected

ERR #14User unit not defined

ERR #15

Range jumper setting invalid

ERR #16

Element not defined

ERR #17

UDD not defined

ERR #18

Command not yet available

ERR #19

Not available with gauge units

ERR #20

Not available with vacuum reference

ERR #21

Internal pointer error

ERR #22

Pressure must be below 20 psia

ERR #23

Option not available or installed

ERR #24

Not available with isolation on

ERR #25

Must be READY set

ERR #26

COM port failed to initialize

ERR #27

Internal device time out error

ERR #28

External device time out error

ERR #29File not opened

ERR #30

File end

ERR #35

PG9000 must first be setup for differential mode

ERR #36

Mass load invalid

ERR #37

External device invalid

ERR #38

External device configured incorrectly

Page 123© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALREPLYDESCRIPTION

ERR #39

External device reply invalid

ERR #40

Not readyERR #41

Measurement outside limits

ERR #42

Storage Fault

ERR #43

Storage verification error

4.3.3.1

AMH Errors

If the optional AMH mass handler is being used, it can generate it’s own error
message during operation. This usually occurs if the AMH is not properly setup,rdor has a mechanical failure. The 3 character of the “PR” query reply will be an‘E’ to indicate if the AMH has failed to operate as expected. If this occurs the“AMHERR” command may be used to get the specific AMH error message. See
Section 3.7.2.8 for more details.

4.3.4

Command descriptions

Each command description gives the full syntax showing usage. Ranges of parameters or
parameter types are indicated. There are two types of commands. The Common and Status
Commands support IEEE STD 488.2, while the PG9000 commands access all other functions.

4.3.4.1

IEEE Std. 488.2 Common And Status Commands

PG9000 supports a set of commands that are common to all instruments
conforming to IEEE Std. 488.2 protocol. Though defined by the IEEE-488.2
standard, they also apply to PG9000 RS232 (COM1) communications. These
commands make it easy to perform basic functions for any device that
supports them. These command also cover the status reporting commands.
Refer to Section 4.4 for details on the status registers mentioned in thesecommands. Query forms of these commands must be followed by a question
mark and IEEE-488.2 Common Commands always start with an asterisk (“*”).
Unlike the other PG9000 commands, they must have a space instead of an
equals sign (“=”) between the command and any arguments. Also unlike theother PG9000 commands, if using the IEEE-488 port, the query form (commandis immediately followed by a “?”) must be used to get a reply. If using the COM1
port and the command is not a query, “OK” will be returned.
∗CLS
Purpose
SyntaxRemarks

Example© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Clear all of the status and event structures.
“∗CLS”
This program message clears the following evens and status registers:
Standard Byte Register (STB)
Standard Event Status Register (ESR)
Error Queue
AMH error message
Pending OPC operations
Command:“*CLS”
Reply:“OK” (using COM1. No reply if IEEE-488 port)

Page 124

4. REMOTE OPERATION∗ESE(?)
Purpose
SyntaxParameters

Query Reply
Remarks

Example∗ESR?
Purpose
SyntaxQuery Reply
Remarks
Example∗IDN?
Purpose
SyntaxRemarks
Query Reply
Example∗OPC(?)
Purpose
SyntaxRemarks

Query Reply
Example∗OPT?
Purpose
SyntaxRemarks
Query Reply
Example∗RST
Purpose
SyntaxRemarks

ExampleSee Also:

Read or set the Standard Event Status Enable Register.
“∗ESE n”“∗ESE?”n:’0 to 255’ This is the decimal representation of the bit(s) toenable. To enable the PON and QYE bits, the argument would
be 128 + 4 = 132.
n (0 to 255)
The Standard Event Status Enable register determines which bits in the standard Event
Status Register are enabled and included in the Status Byte Register (ESB bit), and canassert the SRQ line. The reply is in decimal numeric form.
Command:“*ESE 132”
Reply:“OK” (using COM1. No reply if IEEE-488 port)
Command:“*ESE?”
Reply:“132”
Read the Standard Event Register.
“∗ESR?”n (0 to 255)
The Standard Event Register contents are cleared after reading. The reply is in decimal
numeric form.
Command:“*ESR?”
Reply:“4”
Identify the PG9000 model, and serial number.
“∗IDN?”The identification reply is made up of the manufacturer, the model, the serial number
and the software version. Each is separated by a comma.
The version string.
Command:“*IDN?”
Reply:“FLUKE, PG9607, 1001, Ver3.00a-Lib:nmcm
Sets the operation complete bit when all operations have completed.
“∗OPC”“∗OPC?”
This Command enables PG9000 to set the OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Registerwhen it has completed all pending functions. The Query replies with a “1” when all functions
are complete.
Since PG9000 does not support overlapping commands, this command has no practical use.
“0” or “1”Command:“*OPC”
Reply:“OK”(using COM1. No reply if IEEE-488 port)
Command:“*OPC?”
Reply:“1”
Reads the list of installed molbloc RFM options.
“∗OPT?”
This Query returns any registered option(s) installed in the PG.
separated by a comma.
A comma delimited text field of the installed options.
Command:“*OPT?”
Reply:“NONE” (no options installed)
Reply:“auto rotation” (auto rotation option)

Each option is

Resets the PG9000 settings to factory settings.
“∗RST”
This Command sets the PG9000 settings to factory settings which is equivalent to afront panel executed [SPECIAL], <5Reset>, 1sets.
This does not affect thecommunications settings.
Command:“*RST”
Reply:“OK” (using COM1. No reply if IEEE-488 port)
3.13.9.1

Page 125© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL∗SRE(?)
Purpose
SyntaxParameters

Remarks

Query Reply
Example∗STB?
Purpose
SyntaxRemarks
Query Reply
Example∗TST?
Purpose
SyntaxRemarks

Query Reply
ExampleSee Also

4.3.4.2#
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks

ExampleError
ABORT
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks

ExampleError
See Also© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Read or set the Service Request Enable Register.
“∗SRE n”“∗SRE?”n:’0 to 255’
This is the decimal representation of the bit(s) to enable. To allow the MAV and ESB
bits to assert the SRQ line, the argument would be 32 + 16 = 48. Bit 6 (64) is reservedand cannot be set.
The Service Request Enable Register determines which bits of the Status Byte can set
the MSS bit of the Status Byte and request service by asserting the SRQ line of theIEEE-488 interface.
n (0 to 255)
Command:“*SRE 48”
Reply:“OK” using COM1. No reply if IEEE-488 port)
Command:“*SRE?”
Reply:“48”
Read the Status Byte Register.
“∗STB?”The Status Byte Register reflects the general status of the PG. The ‘MSS’ bit state isrepresented by bit 6.
n (0 to 255)
Command:“*STB?”
Reply:“4”
Read the power on self test status.
“∗TST?””The PG9000 system memory stores the user settings (units, mode, resolution) andretains them when the unit is shut off. On power up, this memory is checked. If thismemory is corrupted, all user settings are reset to default (as if the “∗RST” program
message was executed), and the ∗TST query returns a ‘1’. If PG9000 passed the test
on power up OR if the ∗TST query was used at least once since the unit was powered
up the reply is ‘0’.
“0” or “1”Command:“*TST?”
Reply:“1”
3.13.9.1

PG9000 Commands
To send a command through PG9000 to an external device on COM2.
“#ddddd”
N/A
N/A
If PG9000 receives a command from the serial port (COM1) with a “#” as the leading
character, the character is stripped off and the command is sent out the secondary serial
port (COM2). The PG9000 will then wait for up to 4 seconds for a reply. Do not attempt
to communicate with a device that is currently being used by the PG9000 as a vacuum
sensor or barometer.
Typical command:“#*0100P3”
Typical reply:“*000114.503”
ERR# 27 Device is currently active
ERR# 28 Device did not reply within 4 seconds
Aborts any active process executing in the PG9000.
“ABORT”
N/A
N/A
The ABORT command places the PG9000 in an Idle state, halting the execution of any
active processes. This includes automated AMH mass loads, auto float and auto
rotation operations or any differential mode preparation sequence.
Typical command:“ABORT”
Typical reply:“ABORT”
None“PS=”, “MS=”, “AROT”, “DIFOFFSET”, “DIFSETUP”

Page 126

4. REMOTE OPERATIONAMBHx(=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument

Remarks

ExampleError

See Also
AMBPx(=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument

Remarks

ExampleError

See Also

Set or read the source for the ambient humidity measurement. Also optionally sets the
USER defined measurement.
“AMBHx=source, meas”“AMBHx=source”“AMBHx”
INTERNALx:
The setup number from 1 to 13. See the SETUP command.
Source:The measurement source. This can be INTERNAL, NORMAL
or USER.
Meas:
The current measurement used. This can only be set if thesource argument is USER. If specified, the limit for thisargument is 0 to 100 %.
PG9000 has an on-board humidity sensor that can be used as the source of ambient
humidity values in calculations. You may also request that another source be used forthis measurement.
The measurement source can be the internal sensor, a user defined fixed value, or anormal value. The SETUP function allows 13 separate source configurations for thevarious SETUP variables to be saved in 12 files. The SETUP command selects whichof the files to make active. Setup number 1 is restricted as INTERNAL only to serve asa manufacturer’s fixed Setup, and cannot be changed.
Typical command:“AMBH2=USER,50”
Typical reply:“USER, 50 %”Typical command:“AMBH9=INTERNAL”
Typical reply:“INTERNAL, 25 %”See 9.3.2 Error Messages
ERR #1The setup number x is invalid
ERR #2The source argument is invalid
ERR #3The meas argument is invalid
1.2.1.3, 3.1, 3.11.6, 3.12, “SETUP”
Set or read the source for the ambient pressure measurement. Also optionally sets the
USER defined measurement.
“AMBPx=source, meas”“AMBPx=source”“AMBPx”
INTERNALx:
The setup number from 1 to 13. See the SETUP command.
Source:The measurement source. This can be INTERNAL, NORMAL,
USER, RPM or the user defined barometer “label”.
Meas:
The current measurement used in kPaa. This can only be set if
the source argument is USER. If specified, the limit for thisargument is 70 to 110 kPaa.
PG9000 has an internal atmospheric pressure sensor that can be used as the source of
ambient pressure values in calculations. You may also request that another source beused for this measurement.
The measurement source can be the internal sensor, a user defined fixed value, thenormal value, an external RPM, or a user defined external barometer. If an external RPM
or a user defined external barometer is chosen, you must setup the COM2 port to theproper settings. It is also advised to set this up prior to selecting the setup to make thedevice active. If you specify “RPM” or the user defined barometer “label” , then all otherbarometer source setups set to “RPM” or the user defined barometer will change to thissource, as it is a global selection.
The SETUP function allows 13 separate source configurations for the various SETUP
variables to be saved in 12 files. The SETUP command selects which of the files to makeactive. Setup number 1 is the manufacturer’s preferred Setup, and cannot be changed.
The meas argument is used to allow the user to define a fixed value if the source is set to
USER. The reply will always include the source and the meas fields.
Typical command:“AMBP2=USER,101.90”
Typical reply:“USER, 101.90 kPaa”
Typical command:“AMBP9=INTERNAL”
Typical reply:“INTERNAL, 98.234kPaa”
See the “UDU” commandSee the “COM2” commandSee 9.3.2 Error Messages
ERR #1The setup number x is invalid
ERR #2The source argument is invalid
ERR #3The meas argument is invalid
1.2.1.3, 3.1, 3.11.6, 3.12, “SETUP”, “UDU”, “COM2”

Page 127© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AMBTx(=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument

Remarks

ExampleError

See Also
AMB
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks

Set or read the source for the ambient temperature measurement. Also optionally sets
the USER defined measurement.
“AMBTx=source, meas”“AMBTx=source”“AMBTx”
INTERNALx:
The setup number from 1 to 13. See the SETUP command.
Source:The measurement source. This can be INTERNAL, NORMAL
or USER.
Meas:
The current measurement used is degrees Celsius. This canonly be set if the source argument is USER. If specified, thelimit for this argument is 0 to 50 ° C.
PG9000 has an internal ambient temperature sensor that can be used as the source of
ambient temperature values in calculations. You may also request that another source beused for this measurement.
The measurement source can be the internal sensor, a user defined fixed value or thenormal value. The SETUP function allows 13 separate source configurations for thevarious SETUP variables to be saved in 12 files. The SETUP command selects which of
the files to make active. The SETUP command selects which of the 13 to use. Setup
number 1 is restricted as INTERNAL only to serve as a manufacturer’s fixed Setup, andcannot be changed.
The meas argument is used to allow the user to define a fixed value if the source is set to
USER. The reply will always include the source and the meas fields.
Typical command:“AMBT2=USER,22.00”
Typical reply:“USER, 22.0 dC”
Typical command:“AMBT9=INTERNAL”
Typical reply:“INTERNAL, 23.2 dC”
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1The setup number x is invalid
ERR #2The source argument is invalid
ERR #3The meas argument is invalid
1.2.1.3, 3.1, 3.11.6, 3.12, “SETUP”
To read all of the ambient conditions from the sources defined by the current setup.
“AMB”
N/A
None
PG calculations uses ambient conditions to calculate the current pressure. The sourceof these ambient conditions is defined by the current setup (see the SETUP command).
These ambient values can be read at once using this command. They are returnedalong with the measurement units, and are separated by commas. The units andresolution of the measurement fields are fixed. The format returned depends on the PG
model:
PG9607 has two piston-cylinder PRT measurements:“xxx.xxxx kPaa, xxx.x Paa, xxx %, xx.xx dC, xx.xx dC, xx.xx dC, xx.xx dC”
The first field is the atmospheric pressure.
The second field is the vacuum under the bell jar (Abs by Vac only).
The third field is the relative humidity.
The fourth field is the ambient temperature.
The fifth field is the average of the piston-cylinder temperatures (PRT1 & PRT2).
The sixth field is the first piston-cylinder temperature (PRT1).
The seventh field is the second piston-cylinder temperature (PRT2).
Other PG9000 models have one piston-cylinder PRT measurement:“xxx.xxxx kPaa, xxx.x Paa, xxx %, xx.xx dC, xx.xx dC”
The first field is the atmospheric pressure.
The second field is the vacuum under the bell jar (Abs by Vac only).
The third field is the relative humidity.
The fourth field is the ambient temperature.
The fifth field is the piston-cylinder temperature (PRT1).

ExampleError
See Also© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Typical cmd:
“AMB”
Typical reply: “98,4594 kPaa,18.3 Paa,24%,23.45 dC,22.55 dC,22.53 dC, 22.57 dC
None
1.2.1.3, 3.1, 3.11.6, 3.12, “SETUP”

Page 128

4. REMOTE OPERATIONAMHERR
Purpose
SyntaxRemarks

ExampleSee Also
AMHLOAD=
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks

ExampleError

See Also
AMHMS(=)
Purpose
SyntaxArgument

Remarks

ExampleSee Also
Error

To read the last known error message from an active external AMH automated mass
handler.
“AMHERR”
If an optional AMH automated mass handler is being used, it can generate its own error
message during operation. This usually occurs if the AMH is not properly setup, forexample the drive air pressure is inadequate, or it has a mechanical failure. If the AMH
fails to operate at expected., the 3rd character of the “PR” command reply is an “E”. If
this occurs, the “AMHERR” command can be used to get the specific AMH error
message, and refer to Section 3.7.2.8. It is not recommended to routinely poll the PG
with the AMHERR command as the response may contain a previous error that isrecoverable by the PG. It is instead recommended to use the “PR” command to detectan AMH error first.
The AMH error message is cleared by the next successful AMH operation or by sending
the “*CLS” command. If there is no error, “OK” is returned.
Typical command:“AMHERR”
Typical reply:“ERR#122” (Section 3.7.2.8)“OK”(no AMH errors or AHM not active)
Typical reply:
Section 3.7.2.8, “”PR”
Load or unload all the AMH’s masses (used with optional AMH automated mass
handling system).
“AMHLOAD=action”
N/A
action::‘0’ Unloads masses
Loads all masses
The optional AMH automated mass handling system can load and unload masses on
the PG9000 piston-cylinder automatically. The masses can all be loaded onto the piston
or unloaded and held in the mass handling by a single command. Setting ‘1’ causes the
AMH to operate to load all the masses. Setting ‘0’ causes the AMH to operate to unload
all the masses. This command can only be executed when the an AMH mass set isselected and the AMH is idle. The operation can take several seconds to complete
before the PG replies to this command. The PG uses the resulting mass load for its
current pressure target. The AMHERR command should be used to check for AMH
errors after the load
Typical command:“AMHLOAD=1”
Typical reply:“AMHLOAD=1”
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1 Invalid or missing argument
ERR# 13 AMH is not enabled
ERR# 37 AMH load / unload operation error
ERR# 40 AMH is not idle
3.13.8, 3.13.8.3, 3.13.8.4, 3.7

Read or set the discrete AMH mass load.
“AMHMS=main, binary”“AMHMS”
main:
The number of main masses to loadbin:
The binary mass load. This is a sum of the binary masses to load:
1:
0.1 kg mass
2:
0.2 kg mass
4:
0.4 kg mass
8:
0.8 kg mass
16:
1.6 kg mass32:
3.2 kg mass
64:
6.4 kg mass
An AMH mass set must be active and an AMH automated mass handler must alreadybe initialized to use this command. The PG9000 will reflect the requested mass load in
the displayed pressure measurements. The RESUME command is not required toinitiate the auto float sequence when automatic pressure generation is enabled.
Typical command:“AMH=3,19” (3 main masses plus 1.9 kg binary mass load)
Typical reply:“3, 19”2.4.10, 3.7.1, “MASS=”, “”MASSn”
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1 Invalid mass load or AMH not active.

Page 129© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

AROT(=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks

ExampleError
See Also
ATMHEIGHT(=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument

Remarks

ExampleError
See Also
BELL(=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks

ExampleError
See Also
BELLx(=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument

To set or read the automated motorized rotation status.
“AROT=x”“AROT”
AROT=0x:
The status to set.
PG9000 can rotate and brake the piston automatically when appropriate. This function
can be enabled by setting the status to ‘1’. Setting the status to ‘0’ disables the auto
rotate function. Enabling auto rotate will also restart a suspended or aborted rotation if
the piston is floating..
Typical command:“AROT=0”
Typical reply:“AROT=0”
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1
The argument was not a ‘0’ or a ‘1’
3.11.8, 3.11.13
To set or read the height of an external barometer relative to the reference level on the
PG9000 mounting post (ATM head).
“ATMHEIGHT=height”“ATMHEIGHT”“ATMHEIGHT= 0.00 cm
height:
The position of the barometer relative to the PG9000 mounting
post reference level. This value will be negative if the sensor is
below the reference level, and positive if the sensor is above
the mark.
PG9000 uses this height difference to apply a head correction to the atmosphericmeasurement (ATM head). For the internal sensor, this value is -10 cm. This value canbe set from –1 000 to 1 000 cm.
Typical command:“ATMHEIGHT=-20”
Typical reply:“-20.00 cm”
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1
The argument was <-1000 or >1000
3.11.7 PRINCIPLE, 3.13.3.3
Read or select the mass loading bell to use.
“BELL=x”“BELL”
1x:
The mass bell number 1, 2, or 3.
You may define up to three different loading mass bells to use with PG9000 using theBELLx command. You can then use the “BELL=x” command to select one of the three
to use.
Typical command:“BELL=2”
Typical reply:“2”
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1
Invalid or specifies a mass bell that is not defined
3.13.1 PRINCIPLE, 3.13.1.15
Read or set a mass loading bell’s information.
“BELLx=Sn, Dens, Mass, Report#, CalDate, EditDate”“BELLx”
N/Ax:
The mass bell number 1, 2, or 3
Sn:
The mass bell serial number (4 digits max)
Dens:
The mass bell density
Mass:
The bell mass (kg)Cert#:
CalDate:
EditDate:

Remarks
ExampleError
See Also© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

The Calibration report number (10 digits max)
The date that the mass set was last calibrated (YYYYMMDD)
The
date
that
the
mass
information
waslast
edited.(YYYYMMDD)
You may define up to three different mass bells to use with the PG9000 using the BELLx
command. You can then use the “BELL=x” command to select one of the three to use.
Typical command:“BELL1”
Typical reply:“BELL1=101,5058.0
kg/m3,0.500010
kg,
1001,
20060415,20060415”
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1..7
Invalid or specifies a mass set that is not defined
3.13.1 PRINCIPLE, 3.13.1.13

Page 130

4. REMOTE OPERATION

CALx(=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument

Remarks

ExampleError
See Also
COMx(=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault

Argument

Remarks

ExampleError
See Also
DATE(=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument

Remarks
ExampleError
See Also

To set or read the calibration adder and multiplier for PG9000 Platform internal measurement
sensors.
“CALx=adder, mult”“CALx”
CALx=0, 1
x:“1” for the ambient temperature sensor (degrees Celsius).
“2” for the ambient pressure sensor (Paa).
“3” for the vacuum sensor (Paa).
“4” for the relative humidity sensor (%RH).
adder:
The calibration adder.
mult:
The calibration multiplier.
The internal sensors can be calibrated by the user if needed. This is possible by specifying
an adder or a multiplier, or both if needed.
The ambient sensor measurement is adjusted using the user calibration adder and multiplier:Adjusted Ambient measurement = (measurement x multiplier) + adderThis calibration information should be changed with care, as it affects the ambient value. It
does not affect the normal value or a user defined value.
Use the PRTPCn command to access the piston cylinder temperature PRT calibration(s).
Typical command:“CAL2=100.0, 1”
Typical reply:“100.0 Paa, 1.000000”
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
5.2.1
To set or retrieve the configuration of the COM ports.
“COMx=baud,parity,data,stop”“COMx”“COM1=2400,E,7,1”“COM2=9600,N,8,1”“COM3=2400,E,7,1”“COM4=2400,E,7,1”
x:“1” for COM1 port
“2” for COM2 port
“3” for COM3 port
“4” for COM4 port
The available parameters are listed below. Once the port is configured, the configuration isstored in permanent memory and becomes active on power up.
When the configuration of the primary port (COM1) is changed, the returned reply is sent at theoriginal COM1 settings but all subsequent replies will be sent at the new configuration settings.
COM2 is used for an external barometer and/or external vacuum gauge.
COM3 is used for control of an external PPC pressure controller. COM4 is used for general
purpose device communications using the PASSTHRU command.
Serial Parameters:
Baud rates:
300,1200,2400,4800,9600,19200, 28800, 38400
Parity:O – Odd, E – Even, N – None
Data bits:
7 8
Stop bits:
1 2
Typical command:“COM1=9600,E,7,1”
Typical reply:“9600,E,7,1”
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1
Missing or wrong COM setting
3.13.5, “PASSTHRU”
To read or set the internal calendar.
“DATE=YYYYMMDD”“DATE”
N/A
The date in the YYYYMMDD format.
YYYY:
The year from 2000 to 2079.
MM:
The month 1 to 12.
DD:
The day of the month 1 to (up to) 31 depending on the monthand year.
The internal calendar is used to date stamp changes made to the internal sensor
calibrations and the piston-cylinder module, mass set and mass loading bell files.
Typical command:“DATE=20081231”
Typical reply:” 20081231”
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1
If invalid date argument
3.13.4.3

Page 131© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALDIFLOAD
Purpose
SyntaxRemarks

ExampleError

See Also
DIFOFFSET (=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument

Remarks

ExampleError

See Also© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Executes the mass load determined by the DIFSETUP command.
“DIFLOAD”
This command must be preceded by the DIFSETUP command. The DIFSETUP
command sets up the PG9000 and determines the proper mass load for offset
determination.
The DIFLOAD command executes the mass load determined by the DIFSETUP
command and places the PG9000 into the offset determination mode. When in thismode, use the DIFOFFSET command to query the PG for the calculated differential
offset. The DIFOFFSET command is also used to save the offset as the new differential
mode RPM offset value, and to exit the offset determination mode. The ABORTcommand can also be used to exit the offset determination mode.
The reply is the same nominal mass values returned by the DIFSETUP command that is
expected to be loaded.
Typical command:“”DIFLOAD”
Typical reply:“9.7 kg, 28.05 g”
See the “DIFSETUP” and “DIFOFFSET” commands.
ERR #1
Argument is invalid.
ERR #23
Vacuum reference not supported by this PG9000.
ERR #35
The “DIFSETUP” was not used prior to this command.
3.11.4.1, “DIFLOAD”, “DIFSETUP”
Set or read the differential offset value.
“DIFOFFSET=offset, pressure”“DIFOFFSET”
Offset:0 Pa
Pressure:101325.0 Paa
Offset:“NEW” Saves the current calculation of RPM offset if PG9000 iscurrently in the offset determination mode, else set thedifferential offset value in Pa.
Pressure:
The PG9000 defined pressure when the previously determineddifferential offset was saved or if Offset is “NEW”, this argument
is ignored and should not be used.
The DIFOFFSET commands have two types of operation.
If PG9000 is in the offset determination mode, the calculated offset of the externalmeasurement device from the PG9000 defined pressure is returned along with thecurrent PG9000 pressure. If the “NEW” arguments is given with this command, thecalculated offset and PG9000 pressure are saved as the new RPM offset and pressure,and PG9000 exits the offset determination mode returning to normal operation, withdifferential measurement mode enabled.
If the PG9000 is not in the offset determination mode, this command reads back only
the RPM offset and pressure as determined previously. The command can also be
used set them to another value.
Typical command:“DIFOFFSET=7.1,97.100”
Typical reply:“7.10 Pa, 97.10 000 Paa”
If PG7601 is in the offset determination mode:
Typical command:“DIFOFFSET=NEW”
Typical reply:“4.13 Pa, 96.14321 Paa”
See the “DIFSETUP” and “DIFLOAD” commands.
The Offset field is invalid or missing.
ERR #1The Pressure field is invalid or missing.
ERR #2
Offset was “NEW” but the PG is not in the offset determination
ERR #35
mode.
3.11.4.1, “DIFLOAD”, “DIFSETUP”

Page 132

4. REMOTE OPERATIONDIFSETUP
Purpose
SyntaxRemarks

ExampleError

See Also
DUTHEIGHT(=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument

Remarks
ExampleError
See Also
ERR
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks

ExampleError
See Also

Prepare PG9000 to determine the differential RPM mode offset.
“DIFSETUP”
The differential mode of operation requires that an RPM offset be determined. This
command sets up PG9000 to determine the RPM offset. The PG measurement mode ischanged to absolute by vacuum, the mass load resolution is set to 0.01g, and the headcorrection is disabled.
PG9000 must be setup to use an external pressure
measurement device (RPM) connected to COM2 to execute this command. The reply
to this command is the external device measurement; the true and the nominal massload needed to generate the pressure indicated by the external device. After using thiscommand to setup PG9000 for offset determination, use the “DIFLOAD” command to
execute the mass load determined by this command.
The external device (RPM) measurement, the actual true mass value, the main mass
nominal value, and trim mass values that need to be loaded are returned by thiscommand. It is provided in the following comma delimited format:
bb.bbbbb Paa, aa.aaaaaa Kg, mm.m Kg, t.ttt g
bb.bbbbb Paa:
The barometer measurement.
aa.aaaaaa kg:
The actual total true mass value.
mm.m kg:
The total of the main mass's nominal values.
t.tttg:
The trim mass loaded.
Typical command:“”DIFSETUP”
Typical reply:“97.23238 Paa, 9.728002 kg, 9.7 ,g, 28.05 g”
See the “DIFLOAD” and “DIFOFFSET” commands
ERR #1The barometer measurement resulted in an invalid mass load
ERR #23
Vacuum reference not supported by this PG9000
ERR #28
An external measurement device has not been SETUP
3.11.4.1, “DIFLOAD”, “DIFOSSET(=)”
To set or read the height of an external Device Under Test (DUT) relative to thereference level on the PG9000 mounting post (DUT head).
“DUTHEIGHT=height”“DUTHEIGHT”“ATMHEIGHT=0.00cm”
height:
The position of the device under test relative to the PG9000
mounting post reference mark. This value will be negative if the
DUT is below the reference level, and positive if the DUT is
above the reference level.
PG9000 uses this height difference to apply a head correction to the pressure
calculation. This value can be set from –1 000 to 1 000 cm.
Typical command:“DUTHEIGHT=20”
Typical reply:“20.00cm”
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1
The argument was <-1000 or >1000
3.11.7, 3.11.3
To read the error messages of the last command.
“ERR”
ERR#=OK
N/A
If the last response returned from PG9000 was an error (ERR#xx), then the error
message that corresponds to that error can be read. If an error is received and a valid
command is sent to PG9000 before the “ERR” command has been sent, the error
pointer is reset and an “ERR# 0 = OK” will be returned with the next “ERR” command.
The *CLS command clears any pending error messages.
See Error Message Summary List Section 4.3.3.
Typical command:“ERR”
Typical reply:“Unknown command” (previous invalid command)
Typical reply:“OK” (no error)
None
4.3.3, “AMHERR”

Page 133© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALLOCALG(=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks

ExampleError
See Also
LOCAL
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks
ExampleError
See Also
MASS(=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks

ExampleError

See Also
MASSx(=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument

Remarks

ExampleError
See Also© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Set or read the PG9000 local gravity.
“LOCALG=x”“LOCALG”“LOCALG=9.80665”
X:
The current local gravity.
The local gravity is used in the mass to pressure calculation. The Setup determines if
the local gravity, the normal gravity or a user defined gravity will be used for thiscalculation.
Typical command:“LOCALG=9.805”
Typical reply:“9.80500”
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1
If x is <8 or >11
2.4.3, 3.12, 3.13.6
Place the device in the LOCAL mode.
“LOCAL”
N/A
N/A
In LOCAL mode all front panel operations are available.
deactivates REMOTE mode.
Typical command:“”LOCAL”
Typical reply:“LOCAL”
None“REMOTE”

The LOCAL command

Read or set the current mass set.
“MASS=n”“MASS”N/A
N:
The mass set number 1, 2, or 3.
You may define up to three different mass sets to use with PG9000 using the MASSx
and MASSSETx commands. The MASS(=) command is then used to select the current
active mass set. A mass set must be defined before selecting it. If an AMH mass set is
specified, the AMH automated mass handler is initialized.
Typical command:“”MASS”
Typical reply:“MASS=1”
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1n invalid or specifies a mass set that is not defined
ERR #13
AMH mass set was specified but an AMH automated mass
handler was not detected.
3.13.1.10, 3.13.1 PRINCIPLE
Read or set a mass set’s general information.
“Massx=Sn,Dens,extra1,extra2,extra3,Cert#,CalDate,EditDate, AMH”
“Massx”
N/Ax:
The mass set number 1, 2, or 3.
Sn:
The mass set serial number (4 digits max).
Dens:
The main mass density.
extra1/2/3:
These are placeholders for data fields that are obsolete and arealways ‘0’.
Cert#:
The calibration report number (10 digits max).
CalDate:The date that the mass set was last calibrated (YYYYMMDD).
EditDate:
The date that the mass information was last edited(YYYYMMDD).
AMH:‘0’ for a manual mass set ‘1’ for an AMH mass set.
You may define up to three different mass sets to use with PG9000 using the MASSx
and MASSSETx command. The MASSSETx command must be used first. The MASSxcommand is then used to edit the mass set general information. If the “AMH” flag is set,the mass set defined must correspond exactly to the AMH’s mass set.
Typical command:“MASS1”
Typical reply:“MASS1=101,8000.0
kg/m3,0,0,0,1002, 20060415, 20060415, 0”
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1..9
Invalid arguments
3.6, 3.13.1.6, 3.13.1 PRINCIPLE, “MASSSETx”

Page 134

4. REMOTE OPERATIONMASSSETx(=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument

ReturnRemarks

Read and define the masses included in mass sets.
“MASSSETX”“MASSSET=nominal,true (, AMHtype)”“MASSSET”
N/Ax:
The mass set number 1, 2, or 3.
0
To “close” a mass set.
nominal:The nominal mass value.
true:
The true mass value.
AMHtype:
Optional AMH mass type specifier.
‘1’ indicates that this mass is an AMH ‘main’ mass
‘0’ indicates that this mass is an AMH ‘binary’ mass
nominal mass, true mass, mass ID, AMH Typenominal:The nominal mass value (kg)true:
The true mass value (kg)ID:
The mass sequential ID (1..10)
AMHtype:
The AMH mass type. Only valid if the mass set is defined as an
AMH mass set (see the “MASSx command).
The PG9000 supports setup of up to three mass sets. A valid mass includes a nominal
and a true mass value. The MASSSETx command accesses masses sequentiallystarting from the first defined mass. As a result, it is not possible to view or edit a
specific mass in the mass set with a single command. All masses in the mass set must
be edited or viewed in order to view or modify a single mass in the mass set.
To read the mass set contents, send the “MASSSETx” command substituting 1,2 or 3
for “x” to specify a specific mass set. This “opens” the mass set for reading and returns
the data for the first mass in the set. For a non AMH mass set, the first mass returned isalways the makeup mass. Then send the “MASSSET” command without a mass set
number repeatedly to retrieve the additional masses in the set one at a time. Masses
are returned in their mass sequence order. When the end of the mass set is reached,“ERR #30” is returned. Always send “MASSSET0” to close a mass set that was opened
using the MASSSETx command.
Use the MASSx command to create a new mass set prior to using the MASSSETx
command to add masses to the set. To define the mass set contents, send the“MASSSETx=nominal, true,[AMHType]” command to specify the mass set (1, 2, or 3)
and to set the nominal and true mass values for the first mass in the set. This erases
the current mass set and “opens” the mass set for writing.
Then send“MASSSET=nominal,true,” one at a time for each mass in the mass set. The
commands must be sent in the mass loading order. With a manual mass set, the firstmass in the set is always the special case “make up” mass that is always loaded first,
when the requested mass exceeds its mass value. For an AMH mass set, always
define the main mass set group first. In this case the first mass sent with the
MASSSETx command will be the first main mass of the AMH mass set. Make sure touse “1” as the third argument for AMH mass set main masses.ie.
“MASSSET1=10.2,10.200475,1”

Example(non AMH set)

Example (AMH
Mass Set)

The mass ID returned by the MASSSETx command is auto determined by the PG9000
based on the order of mass entry. The ID orders masses that have the same nominal
mass. If there are five (5) 10 kg masses, then they are identified as #1 through #5, andare loaded in this order when defining a pressure.
Typical command:“”MASSSET1”
Typical reply:“4.00, 4.0000012, 1, 0”
Typical command:“”MASSSET”
Typical reply:“5.00, 5.0000008, 1, 0”
Typical command:“”MASSSET”
Typical reply:“5.00, 5.0000014, 2, 0”
Typical command:“”MASSSET”
Typical reply:“5.00, 5.0000011, 3, 0”
Typical command:“”MASSSET0”
Typical reply:“MASSSET0”
Typical command:
Typical reply:
Typical command:
Typical reply:
Typical command:
Typical reply:
Typical command:
Typical reply:
Typical command:
Typical reply:“”MASSSET1=10.2,10.201446,1”“10.2,10.201446,1,1”“”MASSSET=10.2,10.200029,1”“10.2, 10.200029,2,1””MASSSET=0.1,0.100086,0”“0.1, 0.100086,1,0””MASSSET=0.2,0.200062,0”“0.2, 0.200062,1,0”“”MASSSET0”“MASSSET0”

Page 135© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Error

See Also
Error
MEDIA(=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks

ExampleError
See Also
MEM
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks

ExampleError
See Also
MMODE
Purpose
SyntaxArgument

Remarks

ExampleError

See Also© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1x mass set # is invalid
ERR #2The nominal mass value given is invalid
ERR #3
The true mass value not within 10% of the nominal mass
ERR #29
The mass set has not been “opened” yet
ERR #30
You are at the end of the mass set
2.3.1.3, 3.6, “MASS”, “MASSx”
ERR #1 Invalid mass load or AMH not active.
Read or set the PG9000 pressurized medium type for DUT head corrections.
“MEDIA=mediaType”“MEDIA=density”“MEDIA”“MEDIA=N2
mediaType:“N2”, “He”, “Air”, “Oil”, “H2O” or user set density value.
Select one of five (5) available media for use with the PG or specify a user defined
density. This allows PG9000 to utilize the correct internal calculations for headcorrections.
Typical command:“MEDIA=Air”
Typical reply:“Air”
Typical command:“MEDIA=920”
Typical reply:“920.000”
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1
Media type is invalid
3.11.7 PRINCIPLE, 3.13.3.1
Read the status of the internal data RAM since the last power up.
“MEM”
N/A
N/A
On power up a memory test is run to check the integrity of the internal data RAM. If thememory has been corrupted then “FATAL MEMORY LOSS” will be displayed to alert theuser. The status memory can be read from a remote computer.
Typical causes of memory fault:
Upgrade of PG9000 software
Connection of a cable to PG9000 when PG9000 is on
Failure of internal memory
Return string:“MEM=0”
System is OK“MEM=1”
System memory has been corrupted or manually reset and thedefault operating parameters were loaded into memory
Typical command:“”MEM”
Typical reply:“MEM=1”None“RESET”, “RST”
Get or set the PG measurement mode and reference.
“MMODE”“MMODE=mode”
Mode:"AATM" Absolute mode with atmospheric reference"AVAC Absolute mode with vacuum reference"G" Gauge mode with atmospheric reference"D" Differential modeThis command sets both the unit mode and the measurement reference. This can also
be accomplished using the UNIT and the VAC commands. Differential mode is a
special case and requires special conditions to run.
Typical command:“MMODE”
Typical reply:“AATM”ERR #1
Invalid mode specified
ERR #23
Vacuum reference disabled on this PG9000 platform
ERR #32
Altitude or airspeed unit not allowed with atmospheric reference.
3.11.4, 3.11.3, “UNIT”, “VAC”

Page 136

4. REMOTE OPERATIONMRES(=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks

ExampleError
See Also
MROT(=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument

Remarks

ExampleError
See Also
MR
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks

ExampleError
See Also

Read or set the PG9000 mass loading resolution.
“MRES=massResolution”“MRES”“MRES=0.01g
MassResolution:
The mass loading resolution in grams.
You must set the resolution that PG9000 uses to convert user provided pressure
requests into mass loads. PG9000 will calculate the required mass load to the precision
defined by the mass loading resolution. The maximum resolution is 0.001 gram, and theminimum is 100 g. The mass resolution is automatically set to 100 g whenever an AMH
mass set is made active or AMH is initialized.
Typical command:“”MRES=.01”
Typical reply:“MRES=0.010g”
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1
The resolution given is greater that 100g of less than 0.001 g
3.11.10
Read or set the manual motorized piston rotation status.
“MROT=rotationStatus”“MROT”“MROT=0”
Rotation Status:“ 1” Accelerates the piston rotation.
“-1” Decelerates (brakes) the piston rotation.
“ 0” Aborts current acceleration or deceleration
The rotation of the PG9000 piston (with bell installed) may be controlled manuallyinstead of using the auto rotate function (see the “AROT” command). The PG9000 will
only rotate the piston if the bell is installed and the piston position is not close or against
the top or bottom of the piston travel. This command is not typically used when theauto-rotate feature is enabled.
Typical command:“MROT=1”
Typical reply:“MROT=1”
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1
The argument given is not “-1”, “0” or a “1”
3.11.13, 3.11.8, “AROT”
Read the current mass load variables.
“MR”
N/A
N/A
The actual true mass value, main mass nominal value, and trim mass values of themass currently loaded are retrieved with this command. The data is provided in thefollowing comma delimited format:
aa.aaaaaaa kg, mm.m kg, t.ttt g
aa.aaaaaaa kg:
The actual total true mass value.
mm.m kg:
The total of the main masses nominal values (mass > 0.1 kg).
t.tttg:
The trim mass loaded.
These values are the result of a user provided pressure request or mass request. Since
the actual total true mass value is a result of the true mass values, it’s resolution is notcontrolled by the “MRES” command.
Typical command:“”MR”
Typical reply:“20.687002 kg, 20.6 Kg, 77.000 g”
None
3.6

Page 137© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

MS=
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks

ExampleError

See Also
OHMS
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks

ExampleError
See Also© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

To set the nominal main (mass > 0.1 kg) and trim mass to be loaded on PG9000. The
actual mass value used is determined by the true mass values of the selected mass set.
“MS=mm.m Kg, t.ttt g”
N/A
mm.m kg:
The total of the main masses nominal values to be loaded.
t.ttt g:
The trim mass to be loaded.
The user may specify a target for PG9000 in mass or pressure. When a mass target isgiven, the selected mass set is used to determine the masses available for loading.
PG9000 starts at the largest value smallest numbered main mass until enough mass
has been found to satisfy the main mass request. The trim mass is then added to thetotal of the required true mass values. Then a series of actions may occur:1.

If auto rotate feature is enabled, the masses are decelerated to a stop.

2.

If the auto generation piston raise feature is enabled, the piston is be lifted.

3.

If an AMH mass handler is active, the appropriate mass is loaded.

4.

If the auto generation is enabled, the external PPC attempts to float the piston.

5.

If the automatic rotation is enabled, the masses are rotated when floating.

6.

The PG9000 achieves a Ready condition at the requested mass load.

This command replies before execution of the steps actually starts. The “PR” command
can be used to monitor the status of these events and determine when the PG9000
measurement is Ready. The “ABORT” command or changing to local front panel
operation using the [ESC] key, the LOCAL command or a GPIB go to local function
stops the operation.
Typical command:“”MS=5, 50”
Typical reply:“5.0 kg, 50.000 g”
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1
If the first argument is invalid
ERR #2
If the second argument is invalid
3.11.12, 3.6, 3.11.11, 3.11.11.1, “PR” , “PS=” , “ABORT” , “AROT” , “PGEN”
Read the mounting post PRT resistance(s).
“OHMS”N/A
N/A
The mounting post temperature is measured and used for internal calculations. This
command always returns the last measured value using the internal PRTs. If the current
Setup does not specify “INTERNAL” as the measurement source, this measurement is
not made, and the value returned is a measurement made when the unit was powered
up. The PG9000 uses two PRTs to independently measure the mounting posttemperature (“PRT1” and “PRT2”) while all other models use a single PRT (“PRT1”).
Typical command:“OHMS”
Typical reply:“109.519 ohms, 110.995 ohms” (PG9607)“109.520 ohms
(Other models)None
5.2.1.5

Page 138

4. REMOTE OPERATIONPASSTHRUx
Purpose
SyntaxArguments
Remarks

ExampleError

See Also
PCTx(=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument

Remarks

ExampleError

See Also

To allow the host PC to communicate with a device connected to the PG9000 COM
ports.
“PASSTHRUx = cmd”
“PASSTHRUx”
x:
2, 3 or 4 to access the COM2, COM3 or COM4 ports.
cmd:
The command to send to the external device
The COM2, COM3 and COM4 ports are used by the PG9000 to communicate with external
devices. The PASSTHRU command allows direct communications with a device connected
to one of these ports as long as the device is not actively being used by the PG (such as anactive barometer or vacuum sensor on COM2 or a PPC pressure controller on COM3). The
device must be set to the same port settings as the PG and accept a carriage return followed
by a line feed as a terminator.
When the PASSTHRU command is used to send a command to a device, any replies fromthe device will be passed back as a reply. This pass back function continues until any othercommand is sent to the PG9000. If the device does not reply, then no reply will be generated
from the PASSTHRUx= command.
The Query format (no argument) will allow the external device to pass replies back thru the
PG9000 without issuing a command first. This continues until any other command is sent to
the PG9000.
Cmd sent:“PASSTHRU3=VER”
Query reply:“FLUKE PPC4 VER1.01a” (device is a PPC4 on COM3)
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1
Invalid port ‘x’
ERR#27The device on the port is currently active“COMx”

Set or read the source for the piston-cylinder temperature measurement. Also optionallysets the USER defined measurement.
“PCTx=source, meas”“PCTx=source”“PCTx”
20 °C if the source is DEFAULTx:
The setup number from 1 to 13. See the SETUP command.
Setup is reserved for remote command use only.
Source:The measurement source. This can be INTERNAL, NORMAL,
or USER.
Meas:
The current measurement used. This can only be set if thesource argument is USER. If specified, the limit for thisargument is 0 to 40 °C
PG9000 has two internal piston-cylinder mounting post PRT sensors, using the averageof the two values for piston-cylinder temperature in calculations. Optionally anothersource may be used for this measurement. The measurement source can be theinternal sensors, a user defined fixed value, or the normal value. The Setup number
allows 13 separate configurations for each sensor. The SETUP command selects whichof the 13 to use. Setup number 1 is restricted as INTERNAL only to serve as
manufacturer’s fixed Setup, and cannot be changed.
The meas argument is used to allow the user to define a fixed value if the source is set
to USER. The reply will always include the source and the meas fields.
Typical command:“PCT2=USER,25”
Typical reply:“USER,25dC”
Typical command:“PRT9=INTERNAL”
Typical reply:“INTERNAL, 21.34 dC”
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1The setup number x is invalid
ERR #2The source argument is invalid
ERR #3The meas argument is invalid
3.12, 1.2.1.3, “SETUP”

Page 139© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALPGEN(=)
Purpose

SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks

ExampleError
See Also

Set or read the piston float target for automatic piston floating (using an externalpressure generation/control component). Also can turn the automated pressure
generation function OFF and ON.
“PGEN=m.m”“PGEN”
PGEN=0.0 (off)N/AAn external pressure generation/control component can be used to automatically float
the PG9000 piston. This command specifies the piston position to which the automatedpressure generation function sets the piston when floating or refloating it. The auto
generation stops pressure control once the piston passes the piston float target and thendoes not control again until the piston falls outside of the piston position "Ready" limits(see PISTONRDY cmd). Setting PGEN to 0 turns OFF automated pressure generationin the same manner as turning it OFF locally from the PG Terminal.
The pressure generation/control component should be “configured” (see pressure
generation/control component Operation and Maintenance Manual) and the “PGEN”
command should be issued whenever the Device Under Test is changed or the piston ischanged.
Typical command:“PGEN=1.5”
Typical reply:“PGEN=1.5mm”
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1
The argument is invalid
3.11.9, “PPC”, “READYx”

PISTONRDYx(=)
PurposeRead or set a piston-cylinder module’s rotation rate limits.
Syntax“PISTONRDYx=MinRPM, MaxRPM“PISTONRDYx”
Default
N/A
Argument
MinRPM:
The minimum allowed rotation speed at which the measurement
becomes Ready [rpm]. If autorotate is enabled, this is also thepoint at which the rotation system will engage. This does not
apply if the bell is not loaded.
MaxRPM:
The target maximum rotation rate when automated rotation
engages to rotate the piston. This does not apply if the bell is
not loaded.
Remarks
There are a number of conditions to allow the PG9000 measurement to become Ready.
These two piston-cylinder module dependent limits determine when the rotation rate isin the correct limits.
ExampleTypical command:“PISTONRDY1”
Typical reply:“10, 50”
Error
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1..2
x invalid first or second argument
See Also
3.4, 3.4.2, 3.13.1.1, “READYx”
PISTONVARx(=)
PurposeRead or set a piston-cylinder module’s characteristics.
Syntax“PISTONVARx=Sn,PCalpha,CylAlpha,DefCoef,Tension,Offset, k (P)”“PISTONVARx”
Default
N/A
Argumentx:
The piston-cylinder number 1, 2, or 3
Sn:
The piston-cylinder serial number (4 digits max)
Pcalpha:The piston temperature coefficient
CylAlpha:
The cylinder temperature coefficient
DefCoef:
The piston-cylinder Ae pressure coefficient
Tension:The surface tension
Offset:
The reference level offset from the mounting post referencemarkRemarks
You may define up to seventeen different piston-cylinder sets to use with PG9000 using
the PISTONx, and the PISTONVARx command is then used to edit the piston-cylinder
set physical information.
ExampleTypical command:“PISTONVAR1”
Typical reply:
225, 5.5000 E-6/dC, 4.5000 E-6/dC, 5.3800 E-6/MPa,
0.0000000, 32.4600mm , 0.000 E-6
Error
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1..7
x invalid first through seventh argument
See Also
3.13.1.1© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 140

4. REMOTE OPERATIONPISTONx(=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument

Remarks

ExampleError
See Also
PISTON(=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks

ExampleError
See Also
PPC(=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks

ExampleSee Also
PPCPR
Purpose
SyntaxRemarks

ExampleError
See Also

Read or set a piston-cylinder module’s general information.
“PISTONx=Sn,Area,Mass,Density,CalCert#,CertDate; EditDate”“PISTONx”
n/ax:
The piston-cylinder module number 1 through 17
Sn:
The piston-cylinder module serial number
Area:
The piston-cylinder module effective area (mm2)Mass:
The piston assembly mass (kg)Density:
The piston assembly apparent density (kg/m3)
CalCert#:The calibration report number (10 digits max)
CertDate:
The calibration report date (YYYYMMDD)
EditDate:
The date that this data was last edited
You may define up to seventeen different piston-cylinder sets to use with the PG9000
using the PISTONx, and PISTONVARx commands. The PISTONx command is used toedit the piston-cylinder set general information.
Typical command:“PISTON1”
Typical reply:“225, 196.110000 mm2, 0.200000kg, 4233.0Kg/m3, 100,
20080115, 20080120
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1..7
x invalid first through seventh argument
3.13.1, 3.13.1.1, “PISTONVARX (=)”
Read or set the current piston-cylinder module.
“PISTON=n”“PISTON”
N/An:
The piston-cylinder module number 1 through 17.
You may define up to seventeen different piston-cylinder modules to use with PG9000
using the PISTONx and PISTONVARx commands. The PISTON(=) commands arethen used to select the currently active piston-cylinder module. A piston-cylinder module
must be defined before selecting it.
Typical command:“PISTON”
Typical reply:“PISTON=1”
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1n invalid or specifies a piston-cylinder set that is not defined
3.11.2, 3.13.1.5
Send a command to an external pressure generation/control component connected toCOM3 of the PG9000.
“PPC=xxx”
N/A
N/A
This command allows communications to an external pressure generation/control
component through COM3 of PG9000. COM3 must be previously set up to the correct
settings to match the pressure generation/control component R2323 interface. The
PG9000 auto pressure generation should be disabled before using the PPC(=)
command (see the “PGEN” command) to prevent interference with the PPC’s auto
generation functions. Any reply from the component will be returned until anothercommand is sent to the PG9000.
Typical command:“PPC=PR”
Typical reply:“R
561.0 psi a”
3.11.9, “PGEN”, “PPCPR”
Read the most recent pressure measurement from an external PPC pressure controller.
“PPCPR”
The PPCPR command can be used when PG9000’s automated pressure generationand control function is active or inactive. The external PPC’s COM1 port must beconnected into the PG9000’s COM3 port, and the PPC’s COM1 settings and the
PG9000’s COM3 settings must match.
If the PG9000 has a previous PPC measurement that is less than 5 seconds old, it will
be replied. Otherwise, a current measurement will be obtained from the PPC for the
reply. The reply is in the active pressure unit of measure.
Typical command:“PPCPR
Typical reply:“10.030210”
ERR #13 PPC did not respond.
3.11.9, “COM3”, “PPC=”

Page 141© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALPPOS
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks

ExampleError
See Also
PR
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks

ExampleError
See Also© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Read the current piston position and rate of vertical movement.
“PPOS”N/A
N/A
The PG9000 piston position has a total travel of 9 mm. This piston position isrepresented from -4.5 mm (all the way down, LSTOP) to 4.5 mm (all the way up,
HSTOP). This measurement is updated every 200 milliseconds, along with the piston
drop rate which is updated when the system is stable. These two fields are commadelimited.
Typical command:“PPOS”
Typical reply:“-3.44 mm, 0.5 mm/min”
None
3.5, 3.11.5, 3.11.5.1
Read the current calculated pressure value and Ready/Not Ready status.
“PR”
N/A
N/A
The current pressure resulting from the mass loaded is calculated every 2 seconds. It isdisplayed in the current pressure units. The data string also contains ready information.
The string is in the format “ssx dddddddd uuuum”.
“ss”: The first two characters indicate the ready status. This is determined by thepiston position, rotation speed, AMH automated mass handler status, and thepressure generation status:“R ”
for Ready,“NR” for Not Ready.
“x”:
This 3rd character indicates any ongoing activity by the PG9000 to reach a
Ready condition. Any character except a “ ” (whitespace) will keep the PG
ready status Not Ready (“NR”):“”
no activity.
“A”
the auto rotate feature is accelerating mass rotation.
“D”
the auto rotate feature is decelerating mass rotation before a mass load
occurs.
“R”
the piston is being raised by a pressure controller before a mass load
occurs.
“L”
AMH automated mass handler is busy loading the required mass load.
“W”
AMH has completed a mass load and is waiting for a “RESUME”
command to continue operations.
“E”
an AMH error has occurred. You can use the “AMHERR” command to
get further AMH error information.
“V”
the PG is in absolute by vacuum mode and waiting to reach therequired vacuum limit before continuing. Current residual pressure
exceeds the vacuum limit.
“dddddddd”: This 8 digit numeric field indicates the current calculated pressure in thecurrent pressure units. It has 3 leading spaces before it.
“uuuu”:
This 4 character field indicates the current pressure unit.(see “UNIT” )“m”:
This character indicates the measurement mode. (see “MMODE” ).
Typical command:“PR”
Typical reply:“NR 7.003647 kPa g” (not ready)“R
7.003647 kPa g” (ready)“NRL 7.003647 kPa g” (not ready, busy loading mass)None
3.4, 3.11.8, 3.11.9, 3.11.11, “MS=”, “PS=”, “RESUME”, “AMHERR”

Page 142

4. REMOTE OPERATIONPRTPCnPurpose
SyntaxSuffixDefault
Argument

Remarks

ExampleError

See Also
PS=
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks

ExampleError
See Also

Set or read the mounting post PRT temperature sensor calibration data.
“PRTPCn=Sn, slope, zero, report number, cal date”“PRTPC=Sn, slope, zero, report number, cal date”“PRTPCn”“PRTPC”
n: ‘1’ to access PRT1, ‘2’ to access PRT2. Optional (defaults to ‘1’)
1, 0.3896, 100.00, 1, 19880101
Sn:
The serial number from 0 to 9999
slope:The PRT slope (Ohms/0 °C)
zero:
The PRT resistance at 0 °C
cert number:
The calibration report number
cal date
The calibration date (yyyymmdd)
The mounting post PRT data can be read or set using this command. Care must be
taken to ensure that this data is not overwritten.
PG9607 has two piston-cylinder mounting post PRTs. All other PG9000 models haveone piston-cylinder mounting post PRT.
Typical command:“PRTPC1”
Typical reply:“103, 0.3896 ohms/dC, 99.999500 ohms, 1001, 20080115
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1..5
If the arguments are missing or invalid
ERR #7The date is invalid
5.2.1, 5.2.1.5
To set a new PG9000 target pressure.
“PS=targ”
N/A
N/A
The pressure command is interpreted in the current pressure unit of measure. If apressure is requested that is not in the range of operation, the pressure request is not
implemented and an error message is returned. The mass load needed to set thepressure is calculated using the current mass loading resolution and the measured
pressure resulting from this mass is calculated.
. Then a series of actions can occur:1.

If the auto rotate feature is enabled, the masses are decelerated to a stop.

2.

If the auto generation piston raise feature is enabled, the piston is lifted.

3.

If an AMH automated mass handler is active, the appropriate mass is loaded.

4.

If an AMH is active and the mass resolution is set to less than 100g, thePG9000 waits for the “RESUME” command to be sent before proceeding.
This gives the host program the opportunity to instruct the operator to load
trim mass before pressure generation and piston rotation proceed.

5.

If auto generation is enabled, the external PPC attempts to float the piston.

6.

If the automatic rotation is enabled, the masses are rotated when floating.

This command replies before these actions actually start. The “PR” command can beused to monitor the status of these events and determine when the PG9000
measurement is actually Ready. The “ABORT” command or changing to local front
panel operation using the [ESCAPE] key, the LOCAL command or a GPIB go to local
function will stop the operation.
Typical command:“PS=100”
Typical reply:“100.0000 kPa g”
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1
If target results in an invalid mass load
3.11.11, 3.11.12, 3.11.10, 3.11.3, “MS=”, “PR”, “UNIT=”, “RESUME”

Page 143© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALREADYx(=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument

Remarks

ExampleError
See Also
READYCK(=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks

ExampleError
See Also
REMOTE
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks

ExampleError
See Also© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Set or read the ready criteria for a specific “Setup”“READYx=USER, RdyBand, RdyVac”“READYx=”DEFAULT” (specifies to use fixed defaults)“READYx”“READYx=USER, 2.5mm, 5Paa”
x:
The setup number whose ready criteria are to be accessed(1 to 13)
RdyBand:
Piston position “ready band” (±mm)
VacLim:The vacuum ready limit (Paa)The PG9000 uses the piston position and the vacuum measurement (in absolute by vacmode) to determine if the Ready/Not Ready condition. Other factors can also keep the
PG9000 measurement from being Ready (such as an active external pressure
controller, active rotation system, active AMH automated mass handler). The piston
position must be within the ready band (“RdyBand”) to allow a ready condition. In
absolute by vacuum measurement mode, the vacuum measurement must also be below
the Vacuum Limit (“VacLim”). Each “Setup” defined for the PG9000 can have a different
set of Ready/Not Ready criteria. If DEFAULT settings are specified, then the values are
fixed and cannot be changed.
The piston position ready limits define the piston position beyond which the GENfunction refloats the piston when GEN is ON.
Piston rotation rate limits are in the individual piston-cylinder file.
Typical command:“READY2=USER, 3, 10”
Typical reply:“USER, 3.0mm, 10Paa”
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1,2,3,4
Invalid arguments
3.4, 3.13.1.1, “SETUP”, “VACP”, “PISTONRDYx(=)”, “READYCK(=)”
To set or check the ready check flag, or, used to determine if a Not Ready condition has
occurred.
“READYCK=1”“READYCK”
READYCK=0
N/A
The internal ready check flag is cleared whenever PG9000 reaches a Not Ready (NR)condition. The “READYCK” command will return the status of this flag. This flag can be
set only by sending the “READYCK=1” command while PG9000 is in a Ready condition.
If you send the “READYCK=1” command when PG9000 is in a Not Ready (NR)condition, the reply will be “READYCK=0”.
If you set READYCK=1 when PG9000 achieves a Ready (R) condition, you can use
READYCK later to determine if a Not Ready (NR) condition has occurred. If NR has
occurred READYCK returns “0”. If NR has not occurred READYCK returns “1”.
Typical command:“READYCK=1”
Typical reply:“READYCK=1” (If PG9000 condition is Ready)Typical reply:“READYCK=0” (if PG9000 condition is Not Ready)See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1
If n is not a 1
3.4
To place PG9000 into a remote lock-out mode.
“REMOTE”
N/A
N/A
A REMOTE command deactivates the front panel. All front panel controls will be disabled.
The REMOTE command can only be canceled by a LOCAL command or by turning off
PG9000 power then reapplying it.
Typical command:“REMOTE”
Typical reply:“REMOTE”
None
LOCAL

Page 144

4. REMOTE OPERATIONRESET
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks
ExampleError
See Also

To reset all operating parameters to factory default settings.
“RESET”
N/A
N/A
The reset command can be given to return the PG9000 to a known state.
This command is the same as locally executing a “Reset Sets”.
Typical command:“RESET”
Typical reply:“RESET”
None
3.13.9.1

RESUME(=mode)
PurposeSets the resume “mode”.
Syntax“RESUME=mode”
Default“RESUME=1”
ArgumentMode:‘0’ “RESUME” command is not needed to complete a remote pressure
set operation .
‘1’ “RESUME” command is needed to complete any remote pressure
set operation
Remarks“RESUME=1” is needed only if it is necessary for PG9000 operation to pause after apressure target has been given to allow the operator to load mass. This is the casewhen using a manual mass set or when using AMH automated mass handling andmanually loading trim masses.
ExampleTypical command:“RESUME=1”
Typical reply:“RESUME=1”
Error
None
See Also
3.11.11, 3.4, “PS=”, “RESUME”
RESUME
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks

ExampleError
See Also
SETUP(=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks

ExampleError

See Also

Resume the suspended process of setting a pressure.
“RESUME”
N/A
N/A
When “RESUME=1” using RESUME(=mode), after setting a new target pressure using
the “PS=” command, the process of setting the pressure is suspended after the PG9000
calculates the new target mass load (and loads the if an AMH automatic mass handler isactive). The pause is too allow a host program to instruct the operator to load trim mass
if desired. The RESUME command ends the pause, allowing the auto-rotate and autogenerate functions to execute is enabled. The activity status field of the “PR” field canbe used to determine when the PG9000 has suspended operation and is waiting for the“RESUME” command.
Typical command:“RESUME”
Typical reply:“RESUME”
None
3.11.11, 3.4, “PS=”, “PR=”, “RESUME(=mode)”
To change or read the current SETUP to be used.
“SETUP=n”“SETUP”“SETUP=1”
N/A
Up to 13 SETUP files can be created by the user to allow quick change from one
configuration of pressure calculation sources to another. Each configuration can specify
the source of the ambient measurements, the gravity, and the Ready/Not Ready criteria.
The “AMBHx”, “AMBPx”, “AMBTx”, “READYx”, “VACP” and “PCTX” commands
reference the SETUP command. The first setup (“SETUP=1”) is reserved for the factory
default setup, and cannot be changed. Selecting a setup that references an external
device (barometer or vacuum gauge) can take up to 5 seconds to reply.
Typical command:“SETUP=2”
Typical reply:“2”
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1
If setup is invalid
ERR #13
Setup requires use of external device which is not responding.
3.12, “AMBHx”, “AMBPx”, “AMBTx”, “READYx”, “VACP”, “PCT”

Page 145© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

SN
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks
ExampleError
SPEED
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks

ExampleError
See Also
TIME(=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument

Remarks
ExampleError
See Also
UCOEF
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks

ExampleError
See Also© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

To read the PG9000 serial number.
“SN”
N/A
N/A
Each PG9000 is assigned a serial number. This command reads this number back.
Typical command:“SN”
Typical reply:
“201”
None
To read the current piston rotation speed and rotation decay (deceleration).
“SPEED”
N/A
N/A
The current piston rotation speed and decay rate are returned separated by a comma.
The decay rate is returned as ‘0’ if there is not enough valid data to calculate the rate.
The speed will also be returned as ‘0’ if the bell is not installed.
Typical command:“SPEED”
Typical reply:“44.2 rpm, 2.3 rpm/min
None
3.11.5To read or set the internal real time clock.
“TIME=HH:MMxp”“TIME”
N/A
The time is in the HH:MMxp format.
HH:
The hour 1 to 12
MM:
The minute 00 to 59
xp:“am” or “pm”
The internal time clock is part of the internal calendar. The seconds are always set to“00” when setting the time.
Typical command:“TIME=8:31PM”
Typical reply:“8:31pm”
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1
If invalid time argument
3.13.4.3
To read the conversion coefficient used to convert Pascal to the current pressure unit ofmeasure.
“UCOEF”
N/A
N/A
Use this command to read the pressure conversion coefficient used to convert pressure
in Pascal to the displayed pressure units. Pressure in Pascal multiplied by thiscoefficient yields the pressure in the PG9000 units.
Typical command:“UCOEF” (current units are “kPa”)
Typical reply:“1.000000e-003”
None
7.1.1, 3.11.3, “UNIT”

Page 146

4. REMOTE OPERATIONUDD(=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument

Remarks

ExampleError

See Also
UDU(=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks

ExampleError

See Also

To set or retrieve the settings for the user defined external barometer.
“UDD=label,reqstr,skip,coef”
“UDD”
N/A
label:
A user defined barometer label to identify this setup (1 to 3
ASCII char).
Reqstr:
The text string to be sent to the external barometer every
2 seconds to query it for a pressure measurement. It must
consist of up to 20 printable ASCII characters only.
skip:
The number of leading characters to ignore from the externalbarometer’s reply.
coef:
The pressure conversion coefficient that PG9000 will multiply
the external barometer reply by to result in a measurement inPascal.
An external barometer must be defined first by the user before being selected to be
used as source for atmospheric pressure values instead of the PG9000 internalbarometer. The external barometer must accept the carriage return/line feed terminatedrequest string every 2 seconds, and reply with a carriage return or carriage return/line
feed terminated reply within the 2 second cycle. The COM2 port must also be setup
properly according to the barometer’s communications settings. After setting up theCOM2 port and defining the device, use the “AMBPx” and “SETUP” commands to direct
PG9000 to use the external barometer to use the device as the source of atmosphericpressure values.
Typical command:“UDD=DEV, PR, 4, 1000” (ext barometer is in kPa)
Typical reply:“DEV, PR, 4, 1000.000”
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1label must not exceed 3 characters
ERR #2
request string must not exceed 20 characters
ERR #3# of char to ignore must be 1 to 80
ERR #4user defined coefficient cannot be 0
3.13.5.4, 3.12, “AMBPx”, “SETUP”
To set or retrieve the user defined unit (use defined pressure unit of measure).
“UDU=uuuuu,cccccc”“UDU”
UDU not defined
uuuuu=
User unit label (five characters maximum)
ccccc=
User coefficient (cannot be <=0)
The user coefficient (UCOEF) is a value that is used to convert the current pressure
units to Pascal. Up to 4 characters may be assigned for the unit label. When selecting
the unit to choose using the “UNIT” command, add a trailing ‘a’ to specify an absoluteunit, else the unit will be a gauge unit.
Typical command:“UDU=MyUn,.0015”
Typical reply:“MyUn,.0015”
Pressure in Pa = pressure in units/UCOEF
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1
uuuuu must not exceed 4 characters
ERR #2user defined coefficient cannot be 0
3.11.3.1, 7.1.1, “UNIT”, “UCOEF”

Page 147© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

UDV(=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument

Remarks

ExampleError

See Also
UL(=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks

ExampleError
See Also© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

To set or retrieve the settings for the user defined external vacuum gauge.
“UDV=label,reqstr,skip,coef”
“UDV”
N/A
label:
A user defined vacuum gauge label to identify this setup (1 to 3
ASCII char).
Reqstr:
The text string to be sent to the external vacuum gauge every
2 seconds to query it for a pressure measurement. It must
consist of up to 20 printable ASCII characters only.
skip:
The number of leading characters to ignore from the external
vacuum gauge’s reply.
coef:
The pressure conversion coefficient that PG9000 will multiply
the external vacuum sensor’s reply by to result in ameasurement in Pascal.
An external vacuum gauge must be defined before being selected as a source of
vacuum pressure under the PG9000 bell jar. The external vacuum gauge must accept
the carriage return/line feed terminated request string every 2 seconds, and reply with acarriage return or carriage return/line feed terminated reply within the 2 second cycle.
The COM2 port must also be setup properly according to the vacuum gauge’s
communications settings. After setting up the COM2 port and defining the device, use
the “VACPx” and “SETUP” commands.
It is possible to read both an external barometer and an external vacuum sensor with the
PG COM2 port. The barometer must be an RPM3 or RPM4 plugged into the PG COM2
port, and selected as an active external barometer. The vacuum sensor is then plugged
into the RPM3/RPM4’s COM2 port. The RPM3/RPM4’s COM2 port must be set to thesame settings as the vacuum sensor.
Typical command:“UDV=DEV, PR, 4, 100” (ext vacuum sensor is in mbar)
Typical reply:“DEV, PR, 4, 100.0000”
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1label must not exceed 3 characters
ERR #2
request string must not exceed 20 characters
ERR #3# of char to ignore must be 1 to 80
ERR #4user defined coefficient cannot be 0
3.13.5.5, 3.12, “VACPx”, “SETUP”, “COM2”

Set or read the upper limit of an external pressure generation/control component.
“UL=xxxx”“UL”
Default N/A.
xxxx=
Controller’s upper limit in the controller’s pressure units
An external pressure controller can have an upper limit set to prevent accidental
overpressure conditions. The controller must be properly initialized prior to using thiscommand. The reply will be in the controller’s format. Please consult the controller’s
Operation and Maintenance Manual, UL Section, for details about its upper limit and“UL” reply.
Typical command:“UL=1000”
Typical reply:“1000.00 kPa g”
See the controller’s manual for details about its “UL” command.
ERR #13 External controller not detected
3.11.9.3 “PGEN”

Page 148

4. REMOTE OPERATION

UNIT(=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks

ExampleError

See Also
VACPx(=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument

Remarks

ExampleError

See Also

Set or change the current pressure unit of measure and pressure measurement mode.
“UNIT=xxxxx”“UNIT”“UNIT=MPa g”“UNIT=kPa g”
N/AThe units in which PG9000 interprets and executes commands can be changed. The
available units are:
psi g
psi a
psi d
psf g
psf a
psf d
bar g
bar a
bar d
mbarg
mbara
mbard
Pa g
Pa a
Pa d
kPa g
kPa a
kPa d
MPa g
MPa a
MPa d
MmHgg
mmHga
mmHgd
InHgg
inHga
inHgd
InWag
inWaa
inWad
MmWag
mmWaa
mmWad
kcm2g
kcm2a
kcm2d
Torrg
Torra
Torrd
mTorg
mTora
mTord
Mm
(altitude available only with a vac reference)Ft(altitude available only with a vac reference)
Xxxxg
xxxxa
Xxxxd
The gauge/absolute/differential trailing designator ‘g’, ‘a’ or ‘d’, always appears in the 5th
character position. The gauge unit trailing designator ‘g’ does not have to be given to
specify a gauge unit.
Typical command:“UNIT=mbar”
Typical reply:“mbarg”
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1
Invalid unit specified
ERR #20
Vacuum must be enabled with absolute unit
3.11.3, 3.11.4, “UDU”, “UCOEF”, “MMODE”
Set or read the source for the vacuum pressure measurement. Also optionally sets the
USER defined measurement.
“VACPx=source, meas”“VACPx=source”“VACPx
INTERNALx:
The Setup number from 1 to 13. See the SETUP command.
source:The measurement source.
This can be DFLT, COM2,NORMAL, USER, RPM or the user defined vacuum “label”
meas:
The current measurement used in Paa. This can only be set if
the source argument is USER. If specified, the limit for thisargument is 0 to 99 Paa.
The PG9000 optional vacuum reference hardware includes an vacuum pressure gauge,
designated “DFLT”, as the source of the bell jar vacuum reference values. Alternately, adifferent source may be used for this measurement. The range of the standard vacuum gauge
supplied with the vacuum reference hardware (DFLT) is 0 to 13.3 Pa absolute.
The vacuum pressure measurement source can be the standard gauge (DFLT), a user
defined fixed value, the fixed normal value, an external DH Intruments RPM or a user
defined external vacuum gauge. If an external RPM or a user defined external vacuum ischosen, the COM2 port must be set up. Set up COM2 before selecting the PG9000
SETUP to activate the device. If “RPM” or the user defined barometer “label” is specified
then all other source setups set to “RPM” will change to this source, as it is a global
selection.
The SETUP function allows 13 separate source configurations for the various SETUP
variables to be saved in 13 files. The SETUP command selects which of the files tomake active. The SETUP command selects which of the 13 to use. Setup number 1 isrestricted as INTERNAL only to serve as a manufacturer’s fixed Setup, and cannot be changed.
Typical command:“VACP2=USER,10”
Typical reply:
USER, 10.0 Paa”
Typical command:“VACP9=DFLT”
Typical reply:“DFLT, 3.200 Paa”
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1The setup number x is invalid
ERR #2The source argument is invalid
ERR #3The meas argument is invalid
3.12, 3.13.5.5, “SETUP”, “COM2”, “UDV”

Page 149© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALVAC(=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks

ExampleError
See Also
VENT(=)
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument

Remarks
ExampleError
See Also
VER
Purpose
SyntaxDefault
Argument
Remarks
ExampleError© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

To set or read PG9000 reference mode.
“VAC=n”“VAC”
VAC=0
n = 1:
PG9000 is being operated with a bell jar and vacuumn = 0:
PG9000 is being operated at atmospheric pressure
It is recommended to set the reference mode with the MMODE command instead of
VAC(=) and to use VAC(=) for query only .
The PG9000 reports measured vacuum only when operation with a vacuum is specified,with the VAC command or by mode (absolute by vac or differential).
Typical command:“VAC=1”
Typical reply:“VAC=1”See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1
If n not set to 1 or 0
3.11.4, “MMODE”
To vent the test pressure to atmosphere if an automated pressure generation/control
component is being used for automatic pressure generation.
“VENT=n”
VENT=0n = 1:
Activates the vent procedure on an automated pressuren = 0:
generation/control component
Closes exhaust valve on an automated pressure
generation/control component
When n = 1 the external automated pressure generation/control component test
pressure will quickly decrease to atmospheric.
Typical command:“VENT=1”
Typical reply:“VENT=1”
See Section 4.3.3 Error Messages
ERR #1
If n not set to 1 or 0
3.11.9, “PPC”, “PGEN”
Read the version number of the internal software.
“VER”
N/A
N/A
The version of the software installed in the PG9000 FLASH can be read.
Typical command:“VER”
Typical reply:“FLUKE PG9607 Ver3.00”
None

Page 150

4. REMOTE OPERATION

4.4

Status System

The status system includes the status reporting system which reports general PG9000 events. The user
can select which PG9000 events will cause a status change event. These events are then reported to thestatus system (bit7 and bit3 of the status byte register), which also must be configured for the STATus
subsystem to generate the service requests described in Section 4.4.1, Status Reporting System.
There are two 16 bit event registers that make up the top layer of the status subsystem. The OPERation
status register handles conditions that are normal for PG9000. The QUEStionable status register handles
events that could cause measurements to be made under questionable conditions.
Other registers layered below these two registers provide the structure necessary to handle the two RPT
channels and to enable the events and event transitions. Bit15 of all of these registers is not usedbecause Bit15 represents a sign bit on some computer systems.

4.4.1

Status Reporting System

The PG9000 status reporting system is used to track and report system status and errors.
The status subsystem is layered under and reports to the status reporting system. It follows
the model of the IEEE Std 488.2 and works for the COM1 and the IEEE-488 port withslight differences. PG9000 can be programmed to respond to various status conditions byasserting the SRQ of the IEEE-488 interface. The COM1 port cannot be supported in thismanner, so polling must be used.

4.4.1.1

Status Byte Register

PG9000 contains an 8 bit status byte register that reflects the general status of PG9000.
Table 23. Status Byte Register
OPER
(128)

RQS/MSS
(64)

ESB
(32)

MAV
(16)

N/A
(8)

ERROR
(4)

N/A
(2)

RSR
(1)

This register is affected by the PG9000 reply output queue, the error queue, theStandard Event Status register, the Ready Event Status register, and the
STATus subsystem.
(“∗STB?” or “∗SRE n”)
OPERation
Bit7 (128)

OPERation summary bit

RQS/MSS
Bit6 (64)Standard Event Status Register(“∗ESR?” or “∗ESE n”)

ESB
Bit5 (32)

PON
Bit7

MAV
Bit4 (16)

URQ
Bit6

CMD
Bit5

EXE
Bit4

DDE
Bit3

QYE
Bit2

RQC
Bit1

OPC
Bit0

OUTPUT
QUEUE

N/A
Bit3 (8)ERROR
Bit2 (4)

ERROR
QUEUE

N/A
Bit1 (2)N/A
Bit0 (1)Figure 16. Status Byte Register

Page 151© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALThe status byte register can be read using the “*STB?” query, or by performing a
serial poll on the IEEE-488 bus. If you read this using a serial poll then bit 6 isthe RQS. If the “∗STB?” query is used, then bit 6 is the MSS bit. All of the otherbits are common to both types of query.
Each of these status bits can cause an SRQ to occur. The Service Request
Enable Register (“∗SRE” program message) determines which of these flags areable to assert the SRQ line. This enabled register has a matching set of bits thateach will enable the designated bit to cause an SRQ, except for the RQS/MSS
bit(s) which cannot cause an SRQ. If you set this register to 20 ($14 hex), an
SRQ will occur if the MAV or the ERROR bit are set. The description of thesebits are given as:© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration•

OPER: OPERational event register summary bit (Bit 7)
This bit is not supported by PG9000.

•

RQS: Requested Service (Bit 6)
Indicates that the SRQ line of the IEEE-488 interface has beenasserted by PG9000. This bit is cleared when a serial poll is performed
on PG9000, and is a part of the status byte register when read using
a serial poll. This bit does not apply if the COM1 port is being used.

•

MSS: Master Summary Status (Bit 6)
Indicates that an event or events occurred that caused PG9000 torequest service from the Host, much like the RQS bit. Unlike the
RQS bit, it is READ ONLY and can be only cleared when theevent(s) that caused the service request are cleared.

•

ESB: Event Summary Bit (Bit 5)
Indicates if an enabled bit in the Standard Event Status Registerbecame set. (See the section below.)•

MAV: Message Available Bit (Bit 4)
Indicates that at least one reply message is waiting in the PG9000
IEEE-488 output queue.

•

ERR: Error Queue not empty (Bit 2)
Indicates that at least one command error message is waiting in the
PG9000 IEEE-488 error message queue. Use the “SYSTem:ERRor?”query to get this message.

Page 152

4. REMOTE OPERATION

4.4.1.2

Standard Event Register

PG9000 contains an 8 bit Standard Event Register that reflects specific PG9000
events. Enabled events in this register will set or clear the ESB bit of the statusbyte register.
Table 24. Standard Event Register
PON
(128)

URQ
(64)

CMD
(32)

EXE
(16)

DDE
(8)

QYE
(4)

RQC
(2)

OPC
(1)

This register can be read using the “*ESR?” query. Each of these status bits can
set the ESB bit of the status byte register, causing a SRQ to occur IF the ESB bit
is enabled to do so. The Standard Event Status Enable Register (“∗ESE”
program message) determines which of these flags are able to assert the
ESB bit. The description of these bits are given as:•

PON: Power On (Bit 7)
Indicates that the PG9000 power has been cycled since the last time
this bit was read or cleared.

•

URQ: User Request (Bit 6)
Indicates that PG9000 was set to local operation manually from thefront panel by the user (pressing the ESC key).

•

CMD: Command Error (Bit 5)
Indicates that a remote command error has occurred. A command error
is typically a syntax error in the use of a correct program message.

•

EXE: Execution Error (Bit 4)
Indicates if a remote program message cannot be processed due todevice related condition.

•

DDE: Device Dependent Error (Bit 3)
Indicates that an internal error has occurred in PG9000 such as atransducer time-out.

•

QYE: Query Error (Bit 2)
Indicates that an error has occurred in the protocol for program
message communications. This is typically caused by a program
message being sent to PG9000 without reading a waiting reply.

•

RQC: Request Control (Bit 1)
This bit is not supported as PG9000 cannot become the active
controller in charge.

•

OPC: Operation Complete (Bit 0)
Indicates that PG9000 has completed all requested functions.

Page 153© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Notes© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 154

5.

Maintenance, Adjustments And
Calibration

5.1

Introduction

PG9000 was designed for very low maintenance operation. No maintenance is required other than:•

Adjustment of piston position measurement system (see Section 5.2.2)•

Cleaning piston-cylinders (see Sections 5.3.2 and 5.3.3)•

Lubricating piston-cylinder modules (see Section 5.3.1.2)•

Cleaning masses (see Section 5.4.1)•

Adjustment/calibration of on-board ambient conditions sensors (see Sections 5.2.1.2 - 5.2.1.4 )•Calibration of piston-cylinder temperature platinum resistance thermometer(s) (PRT) (see Section
5.2.1.5)•

Calibration of reference vacuum sensor (see Section 5.2.1.6)•

Calibration of piston-cylinder modules and mass set (see Sections 5.3.4, 5.4.2)•

Drive belt replacement (see Section 5.2.3)

This section provides information on maintenance, adjustment and calibration procedures and certain
repair procedures.

Note
Calibration, maintenance and repair services for PG9000 are offered by authorized
Fluke Calibration Authorized Service Providers (see Table 28).

 Caution•

PG9000 is a sophisticated measuring instrument with advanced on-board
features and functions. Before assuming that unexpected behavior iscaused by a system defect or breakdown, use this manual and othertraining facilities to become thoroughly familiar with PG9000 operation.
For rapid assistance in specific situations, see Section 6, Troubleshooting.

•

PG9000 is covered by a limited 1 year warranty (see Section 7.4).
Unauthorized service or repair during the warranty period is undertaken at
the owner's risk and may cause damage that is NOT covered under productwarranty and/or may void the product warranty.

 Warning•

Use only specified replacement fuses (see Section 1.2.1).

•

PG9000 should only be repaired by an approved technician.

Page 155© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

5.2

Platform

The PG9000 Platform consists of the PG9000 Base, The PG Terminal and the PG9000 Remote
Electronics Module (REM). Local user interface is through the keypad and display on the terminal.
Remote communications and all on board (built in) sensors are located inside or are connected to the
Remote Electronics Module.

5.2.1

Calibration/Adjustment Of On-board Measurement
Functions5.2.1.1

Principles

The PG9000 Platform includes sensors and systems to measure ambient andinstrument conditions. These sensors and systems may need calibration or
adjustment. The calibration and/or adjustments are performed using functions
accessed by pressing [SPECIAL] and selecting <7cal>.
The on-board measurement functions that can be adjusted or calibrated include:•

Barometric pressure sensor – internal to REM•

Relative humidity sensor – TH Probe external to REM (Hart 2626-S)•

Ambient temperature sensor – TH Probe external to REM (Hart 2626-S)•

Piston-cylinder module temperature sensor(s) – Internal to Base•

Piston position measurement system – Internal to Base

• Reference vacuum gauge (optional) – External to bell jar
The measurement uncertainty specification of the on-board sensor should betaken into consideration when selecting a reference relative to which to adjust
them (see Section 1.2.1.3). The ambient pressure, temperature and relative
humidity sensors, in particular, do not require a high level reference.
The PG9000 CAL function supports a user defined adder and multiplier that areused to offset and, if necessary, adjust the slope of the sensors output. The adderand multiplier adjust the sensor output as follows:
Corrected Output = (Measured Output X Multiplier) + Adder
Where:•

Corrected output, measured output and adder are in the current unit ofmeasure of the sensor• Multiplier is dimensionless[SPECIAL], <7cal> provides capabilities to view internal sensor outputs and edit
their Adders and Multipliers. The CAL view function provides an additional digitof resolution relative to other displays of internal sensor outputs. To calibrateor adjust the on-board sensors, compare their outputs to a reference andadjust the corresponding Adder and/or Multiplier as needed to arrive at
acceptable agreement.

5.2.1.2

Barometric Pressure Sensor

 PURPOSE
To view and adjust the output of the on-board barometric sensor.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 156

5. MAINTENANCE, ADJUSTMENTS AND CALIBRATION

 OPERATION
To view the output of the barometric pressure sensor, press [SPECIAL] andselect <1atmp>, <1view>. The display is:1.

Current reading of the barometric sensor incurrent pressure unit of measure.

2.

Indication that this is a barometric pressure
sensor display.

3.

Current value of the Pressure Multiplierapplied to the barometric pressure sensor
reading.

4.

Current value of the Pressure Adder (always
in Pascal [Pa]) applied to the barometricpressure sensor reading.

100.0031 kPa
atmP
PA 101 Pa PM0.99999

To adjust the values of PA and/or PM press [SPECIAL] and select <1atmP>,<2cal> to access a screen in which the values of PA and PM can be edited.
From here, press [ESCAPE] and select <1atmP>, <1view> to view thebarometric sensor reading with the edited calibration coefficients applied.

Note
See Section 5.2.1.1 for an explanation of Adders and Multipliers
and their use in adjusting internal sensors.

5.2.1.3

Ambient Temperature sensor

 PURPOSE
To view and adjust the output of the on-board ambient temperature sensor.

Note
The ambient temperature sensor is housed in the temperature humidity (TH) Probe along with the humidity sensor. Eachsensor maintains its own calibration. See Section 5.2.1.4.
 OPERATION
To view the output of the ambient temperature sensor, press [SPECIAL] andselect <2ambT>, <1view>. The display is:1.

Current reading of the ambient temperature sensor.

2.

Indication that this is an ambient temperature
display.

3.

Current value of the Temperature Multiplier applied
to the ambient temperature sensor reading.

4.

Current value of the Temperature Adder (always in°C) applied to the ambient temperature sensor
reading.

20.51 °C
ambT
TA 0.1 °C PM 0.99997

To adjust the values of TA and/or TM press [SPECIAL] and select <2ambT>,<2cal> to access a screen in which the values of TA and TM can be edited.
From here, press [ESCAPE] and select <2ambT>, <1view> to view the ambient
temperature sensor reading with the edited calibration coefficients applied.

Note
See Section 5.2.1.1 for an explanation of Adders and Multipliers
and their use in adjusting internal sensors.

Page 157© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

5.2.1.4

Relative Humidity Sensor

 PURPOSE
To view and adjust the output of the on-board relative humidity sensor.

Note
The relative humidity sensor is housed in the temperature humidity (TH) Probe along with the ambient temperature sensor.
Each sensor maintains its own calibration. See Section 5.2.1.3.
 OPERATION
To view the output of the relative humidity sensor, press [SPECIAL] and select<3%RH>, <1view>. The display is:1.

Current reading of the relative humidity
sensor.

2.

Indication that this is a relative humidity
display.

3.

Current value of the Humidity Multiplier applied
to the relative humidity sensor reading.

4.

Current value of the Humidity Adder (always in %RH) applied to the relative humidity sensor
reading.

43.2 %RH
HA 5 %RH HM

amb%RH
0.99984

To adjust the values of HA and/or HM press [SPECIAL] and select <3%RH>,<2cal> to access a screen in which the values of HA and HM can be edited.
From here, press [ESCAPE] and select <3%RH>, <1view> to view the relative
humidity sensor reading with the edited calibration coefficients applied.

Note
See Section 5.2.1.1 for an explanation of Adders and Multipliers
and their use in adjusting internal sensors.

5.2.1.5

Piston-Cylinder Module Temperature Sensors

 PURPOSE
To view and adjust the output of the on-board piston-cylinder moduletemperature sensors.
 PRINCIPLE
In PG9607, the piston-cylinder module temperature is measured by two platinum
resistance thermometers (PRTs) built into the PG9000 mounting post. The two
PRT values are averaged to determine the piston-cylinder module temperature.
The resistances of the PRTs are read by PG9000's internal ohmic measurement
system and temperature is calculated as follows:
Temperature = (Measured resistance - resistance at 0 °C)/slope
The PRTs are 10052 4-pole type following DIN Norm 43760. The current
supplied to the PRTs is 1 mA and the slope of resistance relative to temperature
over the valid temperature range of 0 to 40 °C is 0.3896 Ω/°C. The uncertainty
specification is ± 0.1 °C (± 0.04 Ω) with a resolution of 0.01 °C.
The ohmic measurement system in PG9000 is self-calibrated using on-board
100 and 107 Ω reference resistors.
The normal calibration procedure of the PRTs is to remove them from the
PG9000 mounting post and determine the offsets (actual resistances at 0 °C) by
calibration. To remove the PRTs from the PG9000 mounting post, follow the
instructions provided in Section 5.2.1.5, Mounting Post PRT Removal.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 158

5. MAINTENANCE, ADJUSTMENTS AND CALIBRATION

The values of resistances at 0 °C and the slopes, if desired, can be edited toreflect the new calibration by pressing [SPECIAL], [7cal] and selecting <4PCT1>for the first PRT, or <5PCT2> for the second PRT.
 OPERATION
To view the output of the piston-cylinder module temperature sensors, press[SPECIAL], <7cal>, <4PCT1>, <1view> or [SPECIAL], <7cal>, <4PCT2>,<1view>. The display is:1.

Current reading of the selected pistoncylinder module temperature sensor indegrees Centigrade.

2.

Indication that this is a piston-cylinder
module temperature display.

3.

Current value of the resistance slope relative
to temperature.

4.

Current value of the offset at 0 °C in ohm.

19.951 °C
RZ100.003 Ω

PCT1
S0.389To adjust the values of RZ and/or S, press [SPECIAL] , <7cal> and select either<4PCT1>, <2cal> or <4PCT2>, <2cal> to access a screen in which the values of
RZ and S can be edited. From here, press [ESCAPE] and select <1view> to viewthe individual piston-cylinder module temperature sensor reading with the edited
calibration coefficients applied.
Mounting Post PRT Removal
To remove the mounting post PRTs:
 Remove the piston-cylinder module from the mounting post and replace with
the ORANGE storage plug.
 Disconnect the PG9000 Platform from the PG9000 Terminal.
 Invert the PG9000 Platform so that the bottom of the platform is up.
Support the platform so that it does not tip over. A simple solution is to place
the platform upside down on a sturdy box which is smaller than the outside
platform dimensions and is also tall enough to allow the mounting post to
be suspended.
 Remove the two socket head screws (2.5 mm Allen tool), securing the small
circular AMH DRIVE connector bulkhead plate to the platform rear panel.
 Loosen - but do not remove - the four socket head screws (3 mm) located on
the PRT/cable pass through plate. The plate is located on the underside of theplatform. Make sure to note the location of PRT1 and PRT2: PRT1 has longer
leads than PRT2. PRT1 installs in the mounting post hole that is furthest fromthe circular connector location on the rear panel. Maintaining orientation of
PRT1 and PRT2 assures consistency of piston-cylinder temperature
measurement.
The PRTs are able to be removed by gently grasping the shafts (not thewires) and sliding out in a straight motion.
 Slide the PRTs out of the mounting post.

Note
Once the PRTs are removed from the Base it is recommended
that they be reconnected to the REM for temperature readout.
The REM includes 100 and 107 ohm reference resistors .
Reading resistance on the PRTs in combination with the REM
includes any errors contributed by the reference resistors andthe ohmic measurement circuit.

Page 159© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL After reinstalling the PRTs in their correct position (see step 5) and tightening
the four socket head screws, reassemble in the reverse order. Thermal
grease may be applied lightly to the PRTs, if available.
 Reconnect the PG9000 terminal to the PG9000 Platform using thecable supplied.
 Power up PG9000 and verify proper operation of all on-board sensors.

5.2.1.6

Reference Vacuum Sensor (Optional)

 PURPOSE
To view and adjust the output of the (COM2) reference vacuum gauge.
 OPERATION
To view the output of the reference vacuum gauge, press [SPECIAL] and select<7cal>, <6vac>, <1view>. The display is:1.

Current reading of the vacuum gauge inPascal. Reads < > 13 > whenever thecurrent reading is greater than 13 Pa.

2.

Indication that this is a vacuum display.

3.

Current value of the Vacuum Multiplierapplied to the vacuum gauge reading.

4.

Current value of the Vacuum Adder (always
in Pa) applied to the vacuum gauge reading.

6.52 Pa
VA 0.5vac
VM 0.99984

To adjust the values of VA and/or VM press [SPECIAL] and select <6vac>,<2cal> to access a screen in which the values of VA and VM can be edited.
From here, press [ESCAPE] and select <6vac>, <1view> to view the vacuum
gauge reading with the edited calibration coefficients applied.

Note
See Section 5.2.1.1 for an explanation of Adders and Multipliers
and their use in adjusting internal sensors.

5.2.2

Piston Position Detection Adjustment

 PURPOSE
To adjust the piston position measurement system.
 PRINCIPLE
The PG9000 piston position measurement operates on the LVDT principle. There are coils
mounted on either side of the piston-cylinder module mounting post and a ring on the insideof the mass loading bell acts as the sensor element. As the bell moves, the LVDT signal
changes proportionally to bell position, and therefore piston position. The signal is translated
into relative position in the ± 4.5 mm stroke of the piston (see Section 3.5). The piston
position and fall rate can be viewed in the first [SYSTEM] run screen (see Section 3.11.5.1).
The piston position indication system can be realigned by an automated on-board routine.
This routine sets and records the LVDT output at the piston HI and LO stop positions.

Note
When an AMH mass set is used, it is important to follow a specificprocedure to adjust the piston position detection system. See Special
Considerations When Using an AMH Mass Set in the  OPERATION
Section below.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 160

5. MAINTENANCE, ADJUSTMENTS AND CALIBRATION

 OPERATION

Note•

Refer to piston stroke schematic Figure 9.

•

If the PG9000 Platform is equipped with an AMH mass set, see Special
Considerations When Using an AMH Mass Set.

To automatically adjust the PG9000 piston position indication system, load the mass bell only
on the piston. Then press [SPECIAL], <7cal>, <5Pposition>, <2cal>.
The prompt <Hold piston at max down stop> appears. Place the piston in the fully down
position (be sure to compress the springs so that the piston is truly at the low stop position by
venting the PG9000 TEST connection and loading at least 5 kg of mass and/or pressing
down firmly on the piston. Press [ENTER].
The prompt <Hold piston at max up stop> appears. Increasing pressure on the PG9000
TEST connection, raise the piston in the fully up position (be sure to compress the springs sothat the piston is truly at the high stop position by applying pressure underneath the pistonthat is the equivalent to at least 5 kg greater than the pressure required to float the piston withthe current load). Press [ENTER].
Pressing [SPECIAL] and select <7cal>, <5Pposition>, <1view> allows current piston
position and fall rate (see Section 3.11.5.1) to be viewed on the bottom line of the display.
Position is on the left and fall rate is on the right.
Special Considerations When Using an AMH Mass Set
The tubular binary masses of an AMH mass set have some influence on the piston position
detection system so it is important to adjust the piston position detection system with all thebinary masses loaded.
To adjust the PG9000 piston position system when an AMH mass set is being used, proceed
as follows: Vent pressure.
 Select [SPECIAL], <8AMH>, .<2control>, <2discreet> and load all of the binary masses
and none of the main masses (see Section 3.13.8.2).
 Press [SPECIAL], <7cal>, <5Pposition>, <2cal>.
 The prompt <Hold piston at max down stop> appears. Check that the pressure under
the piston is really vented and press [ENTER].
 The prompt <Hold piston at max up stop> appears. Without changing the mass load,
generate a pressure under the piston great enough to insure that the piston will gocompletely to the top stop. This requires a pressure equivalent to a mass load of 18 kg.
For example, if the piston is a 5 kPa/kg, generate at least 90 kPa. Press [ENTER].
 Process is complete. Use [SPECIAL], select <7cal>, <5Pposition>, <1view> to verify
that piston position is <+4.5 mm> when fully up and <-4.5 mm> when fully down.

5.2.3

Drive Belt Replacement

Periodic replacement of the drive system belts may be necessary to retain maximum
performance of the rotational engagement system. Due to specific material properties of thedrive belts, it is important that only genuine DH Intruments replacement parts be used.

Note
A set of spare drive belts is included in the accessories delivered with the
PG9000 Platform.

Page 161© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

To remove the drive belts:
 Using a 3 mm Allen tool, remove the three screws on the outer diameter of thepulley plate. Do not remove the screws on the inner diameter. The pulley plate is
located directly around the mounting post.
 Remove the two drive belts and replace them with the new ones. Take care to clean the
new belts with soap and water to remove any remaining mold release to ensure good
contact with the mass bell. It is suggested to wear gloves when handling the drive belts
to avoid transferring oils to the drive belt surfaces.
 Realign the notched pulley with the pins on the drive motor.
 Replace the pulley plate and three screws.
 Engage the drive system to ensure proper operation.

5.3

Piston-Cylinder Disassembly, Cleaning and
Maintenance PURPOSE
To disassemble and reassemble piston-cylinder modules and clean the piston-cylinder
elements when necessary.
 PRINCIPLE
PG9000 piston-cylinders are high precision metrological assemblies. The annular gap
between the piston and the cylinder is adjusted to be less than 1 micron, and in some cases,
less than 0.5 micron. In normal operation, this space is lubricated by the pressurized medium
If the space becomes contaminated, usually due to foreign matter carried by the pressurized
medium, PG9000 performance can be affected. Symptoms of contamination of the space (adirty piston-cylinder) include:•

Difficulty rotating piston:piston rotation.

•

Decay in rotation rate is more rapid than normal: Piston rotation slows down too
quickly, especially at low mass loads.

•

Poor sensitivity: Very small mass changes do not have usual effect.

The motorized rotation system is unable to start•

Noisy pressure: The pressure defined when the piston is floating is not a stable as it
usually is.
If any of these symptoms are present, they may be caused by a dirty piston-cylinder.
The piston-cylinder module should be disassembled and the piston-cylinder cleaned.

Note
Gas lubricated piston-cylinders are highly sensitive to contamination.
When using gas lubricated piston-cylinders, if symptoms of contamination
develop rapidly with operation after cleaning, there is almost certainly asource of contamination within the PG9000 system. This source must be
identified and eliminated to reduce piston-cylinder cleaning frequency.
Very often, the source of contamination is the test gas supply itself (whichcontains humidity or lubricating oil) or it is the return from unclean gas
operated DUTs that are connected to the PG9000 system.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 162

5. MAINTENANCE, ADJUSTMENTS AND CALIBRATION

5.3.1

Disassembly of the PG9607 Piston Retaining
Assembly Caution•

Cleaning the piston-cylinder requires disassembly of the pistoncylinder assembly and exposure of the piston-cylinder to possible
damage. These risks include damage to the critical working surfaces
for all piston-cylinder sizes and chipping or breaking. Only qualified
personnel should undertake piston-cylinder disassembly andreassembly and the instructions and recommendations contained inthis manual should be followed carefully throughout the operation.

•

NEVER touch the lapped surfaces (polished appearance) of the piston
or cylinder with your bare hands. Body oils and acids can permanently
etch the surfaces.

The piston retaining assembly (see Figure 17) does not need to be disassembled as part ofroutine maintenance. However, the piston retaining assembly captivates the cylinder stroke
limiter that is part of the of cylinder assembly whose mass must be determined whenrecalibrating the cylinder. For routine installing and removing of PG9607 piston-cylinder see
Section 2.3.2.

5.3.1.1

Disassembly Procedure

To remove the cylinder stroke limiter from the piston retaining assembly follow
the procedure below. To reassemble, follow the reassembly procedure in
Section 5.3.1.2. Numerical references in this procedure refer to Figure 17.
 (See Section 2.3.2, Figure 6 for this step.) With the piston NOT installed,install the piston retaining assembly (5) onto the mounting post (7).
 Using circlip pliers, remove the spring retaining circlip (1) from the top of theassembly. As the circlip is removed, the spring washer (2) will lift slightly as
the springs (3, 5) decompress.
 Lift off spring washer (2).
 Gently lift out the spring carrier (4) along with the four high stop springs (3) it
carries. This leaves behind, in the piston retaining nut (7), the cylinder stroke
limiter (6) and the four low stop springs (5). Take care that the springs do notdrop down into the measured pressure opening in the center of the mountingpost.
 Using tweezers, carefully remove the four low stop springs (5). Then lift out
the cylinder stroke limiter (6).

 Caution
The cylinder stroke limiter (6) floats with the cylinder and isthus part of the cylinder assembly mass. Take care not to
contaminate this part when handling it. It is preferable to avoid
contacting this part with bare hands.

Page 163© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL Spring Retaining Circlip
 Spring Washer(4) High Stop Springs

 Spring Carrier(4) Low Stop Springs

 Cylinder Stroke Limiter Piston Retaining Nut Upper Piston Sealing O-ring (Brown, Viton, 2-026)
 Mounting Post O-ring (Brown, Viton, 2-019)

Figure 17. Piston Retainer Assembly

5.3.1.2

Reassembly Procedure

To reassemble the cylinder stroke limiter into the piston retaining assembly,
follow the procedure below. Numerical references in this procedure refer toFigure 17.
 Remove the piston retaining nut (7) from the mounting post and set aside.
 Flip over the spring carrier (4) and place the four low stop springs (5) into thefour holes on the bottom of the spring carrier (4) (the bottom of the spring
carrier is the side WITHOUT the white plastic ring).
 Place the cylinder stroke limiter (6) into the center section of the spring
carrier (4). Be sure to orient the cylinder stroke limiter correctly: pointed end
facing out in the direction of the springs.

 Caution
The cylinder stroke limiter floats with the cylinder and is thuspart of the cylinder assembly mass.
Take care not to
contaminate this part when handling it. Avoid contacting thispart with bare hands.
 Carefully slip the piston retaining nut (7) over the spring carrier (4), low stop
springs (5) and piston stroke limiter (6). Take care so that the springs do notcome out of the holes and so the piston retaining nut (7) does not cock on
the spring carrier (4).
 Verify that no springs have fallen out of place by pressing the spring carrier (4)into the piston retaining nut (7) and compressing the springs. There should be
about 3 to 4 mm of movement. If there is less, one or several of the springs isprobably sideways in the space and the process should be repeated from Step
 above.
 Place the four high stop springs (3) into the holes on the spring carrier (4).
© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 164

5. MAINTENANCE, ADJUSTMENTS AND CALIBRATION

 Place the spring washer (2) on top of the high stop springs (3).
 Install the spring retaining circlip (1). The spring washer (2) needs to bepressed down compressing the springs slightly to allow the circlip (1) toengage in its seat in the retaining nut (7).

Figure 18. Gas Operated, Gas Lubricated Piston-Cylinder Module Lubrication Chart

5.3.2

Cleaning (Other Than PG9607)

Water/detergent method

Note
Of the two cleaning methods, the water/detergent method is more time
consuming but it is also more thorough.

 Caution
DO NOT undertake piston-cylinder module disassembly withoutfamiliarizing yourself with Section 5.3 of this manual.
Incorrect
disassembly may damage or destroy the piston-cylinder element.
 Disassemble the piston-cylinder module following the instructions given in Section 5.3.
 Reinsert the piston (with cap installed) into the cylinder.

Page 165© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

 Create a bath of water and mild liquid dishwashing detergent. Distilled water is
acceptable. De-ionized water is best. Detergent must be free of additives (i.e., lotions
or softening agents which may leave a residue after cleaning). To avoid undesired
thermal effects, bring the bath to room temperature.
 Holding the piston-cylinder assembly by the outside of the cylinder and the piston cap,
submerge the assembly in the bath. Using a rotating motion, thoroughly work thedetergent into the piston-cylinder assembly.
 With the piston-cylinder still assembled, thoroughly rinse the assembly in a bath ofwater only. Use the same rotating motion as in the previous step.
 Remove the piston from the cylinder and thoroughly dry all areas of the assembly using
a lint free towel. DO NOT touch the critical lapped surfaces of the piston or the cylinder
with anything other than the drying towel. Only use one side of the towel during thisprocess as the other side will become contaminated by contact with the operator’s
hands. Dry thoroughly.
 Reassemble the metrological assembly in reverse order.
 If the assembly temperature was elevated during cleaning, it may be necessary to wait
to allow the temperature of the assembly to return to ambient temperature before theassembly will operate normally.
Quick method

Note
Of the two cleaning methods, the quick method is less demanding but it isless thorough.

 Caution
DO NOT undertake piston-cylinder module disassembly withoutfamiliarizing yourself with Section 5.3 of this manual.
Incorrect
disassembly may damage or destroy the piston-cylinder.
 Disassemble the piston-cylinder module following the instructions given in Section 5.3.1.1.
 If you have not already done so, reinstall the cap on the piston.
 Apply a small amount of Dow Corning® OS-20 or glass cleaner to a lint free wipe. If
glass cleaner is used, slightly dilute the cleaner using distilled or de-ionized water to help
ensure that no residue will be left behind. Wipe the lapped surfaces (polishedappearance) of both the piston and cylinder.
 Using a separate, clean, lint free wipe, wipe the surfaces again to remove any remaining
moisture. If canned air is available, blow the surfaces off with a slow flow of air.
 Reassemble the piston-cylinder assembly in reverse order.

5.3.3

Cleaning (PG9607)

To clean the PG9607 piston-cylinder the cleaning methods described in Section 5.3.2 should
be used with the following exceptions/comments:
Water/detergent method: Due to the piston-cylinder’s large diameter and very small
annular gap, it is very difficult to insert the piston into the cylinder when the piston is notinstalled on the PG9607 mounting post. Without the alignment mechanism provided by themounting post arrangement (see Figure 6) there is a substantial risk of cocking the cylinder
on the piston. When using the water/detergent method to clean a PG9607 piston-cylinder,wash the cylinder and the piston separately and do not attempt to put the piston into thecylinder until the piston is installed on the PG9607 platform mounting post.
Quick method: As it is difficult to hold the piston without making contact with its criticalworking surface, install the piston onto the PG9607 platform mounting post to clean it (seeSection 2.3.2).

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 166

5. MAINTENANCE, ADJUSTMENTS AND CALIBRATION

5.3.4

Recalibration

 PRINCIPLE
Piston-cylinders and mass sets are recalibrated by redetermining the effective area of thepiston-cylinder and the true mass values of the masses. It is recommended that
piston-cylinders and mass sets be recalibrated or verified at the end of their first and second
years of operation. Then, based on their observed stability, a longer calibration interval canusually be assigned. Though other organizations may be able to perform these calibrations,
it is recommended that a Fluke Calibration Service be used, if possible.
The recalibration process may find values for piston-cylinder effective area, pressure
coefficient and mass values that are different from the previous values. The PG9000
piston-cylinder and/or mass set files must be changed to reflect the new values (seeSections 5.3.4.1 and 5.3.4.2).

5.3.4.1

Updating Piston-Cylinder Module Files

See Section 3.13.1.2 for information on editing a piston-cylinder module file toreflect new calibration data.

5.3.4.2

Updating Mass Set Files

See Sections 3.13.1.7 and 3.13.1.12 for information on editing mass set andmass loading bell files to reflect new calibration data. The mass of the piston
assembly is included in the piston-cylinder module file (see Section 3.13.1.2).

5.4

Mass Sets
5.4.1

Cleaning

Care should always be taken with all PG9000 masses, including the piston assembly and themass loading bell, to avoid contaminating them with liquids or particles. They should never
be handled with bare hands.
Over time, or by an accidental incident, masses may become soiled. In these cases, they
can be cleaned.
Masses should be cleaned with a non-abrasive general purpose cleaner (such as glasscleaner) and wiped dry with lint free paper towels.

Note
Cleaning masses can change mass values. If knowledge of as received
condition of the masses is required then masses should be cleaned afteras received mass determination is taken and before as left mass
determination.

5.4.2

Recalibration

See Section 5.3.4.

5.5

Reloading Embedded Software Into PG9000 Flash
MemoryPG9000 uses FLASH memory. This allows the embedded software that controls PG9000 operations andfunctions to be loaded into PG9000 over its COM1 port from a computer with a simple FLASH loading
utility program.
To replace corrupted software or upgrade your software, access the Fluke Calibration worldwide website at www.dhinstruments.com and go to embedded located under software. A Flash loading utility
and the latest PPC4 software are available for download at no charge. If you do not have access to the

Page 167© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

web or have difficulty downloading or loading software, contact your Fluke Calibration representative ora Fluke Calibration Authorized Service Provider for assistance.
If you believe you have discovered an error or “bug” in PG9000 software, please report it with complete
details by email to cal.repair@dhinstruments.com or submit an on-line Quality Feedback Report atwww.dhinstruments.com.

Note

5.6

•

Do not power down the PG9000 while upgrading the software. Only
upgrade software to a newer version. Never load an earlier version unlessexplicitly instructed to do so. After the upgrade, a message on the PG9000
terminal may indicate “PL REPROGRAMMING! TAKES 30 SEC”. Do not
power down while this message is displayed. A message will follow
instructing when programming is complete to cycle the PG9000 power.

•

The DH Intruments flash software loading utility and PG9000 embedded
software are available for download from the SOFTWARE section of FLUKECALIBRATION’s worldwide web site at www.dhinstruments.com.

Disassembly And Reassembly Of PG9000
5.6.1

Platform

See Section 5.2.1.5, Piston-Cylinder Module Temperature Sensors.

5.6.2

Terminal

To open the PG9000 Terminal proceed as follows: Disconnect power.
 Remove the pop-off screw covers on the bottom of the case.
 Remove the four case screws.
 Lift OFF the cover. Be careful not to over stress the ribbon cables connecting the display
and keypad in the cover to the printed circuit board in the base.
 Disconnect the cover to base ribbon cables at the connectors on the base printed
circuit board. Be aware that the connectors are locking connectors.
 To reassemble, proceed in reverse order.

5.6.3

AMH Automated Mass Handler Removal

To remove the AMH-100-VAC from the PG9000 Platform, see Section 3.7.2.2.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 168

6.

Troubleshooting

6.1

Overview

PG9000 is a sophisticated pressure measuring instrument with advanced on-board featuresand functions. Before assuming that unexpected behavior is caused by a system defect or breakdown,
the operator should use this manual and other training facilities to become thoroughly familiar with
PG9000 operation. This troubleshooting guide is intended as an aid in identifying the cause of
unexpected PG9000 behavior and determining whether the behavior is due to normal operation or aninternal or external problem.
Identify the symptom or unexpected behavior you are observing from the SYMPTOM list below.
A PROBABLE CAUSE is provided and a SOLUTION is proposed including references to manual
sections that provide information that may be of assistance.
Table 25. PG9000 Troubleshooting Checklist
SYMPTOMPROBABLE CAUSESOLUTION

Will NOT power up.

Blown fuse.

Replace fuse in PG9000 Terminal.

Front panel keys seem to be disabled.

“REMOTE” command has been sent from Send “LOCAL” command from hosta host computer.
computer or cycle PG9000 power. 4.3.4.2

Front panel display is dim.

Screen saver option has been activated.

Press any key to resume full screen power,
adjust activation time if desired. 3.13.4.1

Keypad presses makesounds or no sounds.

undesired Keypad sound settings are incorrect.

Cannot accessDisplay shows:functions. User Level setting restricts access to Change User Level or consult systemthose functions.
manager. 3.13.4.5

certain

Use sounds function to set keypad sounds
as desired. 3.13.4.2<ACCESS RESTRICTED>.
Cannot establish communication over Computer and/or PG9000 interface not Check and correct interface configurations
interface.
correctly configured; incorrect or bad and cables if necessary. Run COM port test.
3.13.5, 3.13.5.3, 4.2
interface cable.
Displays<FATAL<FATAL FAULT>.

ERROR>or Encountered unresolved internal software Cycle power to clear.
Please record
conflict.
conditions leading up to the event, including
the numbers displayed when enter ispressed and report the information to a Fluke
Calibration Authorized Service Provider.

Display <TOUT>, <TIME-OUT> or

PG9000 is having a communications Check setup and communications withproblem with an external barometer or externalbarometerorpressurepressure generation/control component.
generation/control component. 3.13.5.4,
3.13.5.5<-TO->

Displays <******> or <OVERFLOW> Number to be displayed is too large for Check settings that may be causing an out of
where a numerical value should be.
allocated space.
Usually due to an limit high measurement and adjust if
erroneoussettingor measurement necessary. 3.11.3
causing an out of limit high value to be
calculated.
The PG Terminal constantly displays The PG Terminal is unable to establish Check that the PG Terminal to Platform<Searching …. >.
communications
withthe
PG9000 cable is installed correctly. If still unable toPlatform.
get beyond <Searching …. >, contact a
Fluke
Calibration
Authorized
Service
Provider. 2.3.1.1
The run screen is not the normal MAIN You are in the SYSTEM or AMBIENT run Operation
run screen.
screen.
3.9

Page 169isnormal.

Press[ESCAPE]© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALSYMPTOMPROBABLE CAUSESOLUTION

Displays of ambient conditions values The reference to which the ambient Check the specifications and operation of theare not accurate.
condition values are being compared is reference being used for ambient conditions.
not accurate or the specifications of the Consider the specifications of the ambient
ambient conditions sensors are not being conditions measurements. 1.2.1.3
evaluated correctly.
On power up, PG Terminal displays TH Probe is not connected<RH Sensor ERR#xx> or PRT or RH
field displays flashing <ERR>
Piston drop rate is excessive.
Piston rotation rate decay
excessive.

Turn power off.
Check THconnection. Turn power on. 2.3.1.1

Probe

There is a leak in the pressurized system Correct leak.
or the device under test itself.
rate is Piston position detection is out of Adjust piston position detection. 5.2.2
adjustment is piston is in spring zone, notfloating freely.

Motorized rotation will not engage.

Motorized rotation system recovering from Wait 25 seconds for system to recover.
overload or measurement made is 3.11.13, 3.11.8
absolute by vacuum and reference
vacuum is not under ready limit.

Automated motorized rotation is not Automated motorized rotation is OFF.
operating.

Press [ROTATE]. 3.11.8

Manually activated motorized rotation Motorized rotation has overloaded or Operation is normal. Wait 25 seconds for
system to recover from overload or wait until
cutoff while the [] was still pressed. maximum rotation rate was reached.
rotation rate is below maximum. 3.11.8
Automated motorized rotation is not Current mass
engaging even though rotation rate is load of 3 kg.
less than minimum Ready rotation
rate.

load

is

under

Motorized rotation unable to start Piston-cylinder dirty.
piston rotation.

cutoff Operation is normal. 3.4.2

Clean piston-cylinder. 5.3.1

The piston deceleration function starts Operation is normal but can be modified Turn off the PRE-DECEL function. 3.11.8.1
immediately when [ENTER/SET P] is so that deceleration does not occur if it is
not needed.
pressed.
piston-cylinder,level
PG9000
Piston-cylinder dirty, PG9000 Platform not Cleanlevel, PG9000 subjected to excessive Platform, adjust piston position indication,
Piston rotation rate slows down too vibration.
remove sources of vibration. 2.3.1.1, 5.3.2
quickly; motorized rotation engages
Piston position indication is not properly Calibrate piston position indication system.
too frequently.
calibrated and piston is not floating when 5.2.2
rotation engages.
The mass value loading instruction Mass entries are in nominal mass and Operation is normal. Review PG9000 mass
resulting from a pressure entry and the MAIN run screen displays actual mass.
protocol. 3.6
mass value displayed in the MAIN run
screen are not the same.
The resolution of mass loading The mass loading resolution setting is set Use [RES] to set mass loading resolution as
instructions doesn’t seem correct.
incorrectly.
desired. 3.11.10
Pistonpositionincorrect.

readings

seem Piston position reading system needs to Execute piston position reading adjustment
be adjusted; mass bell is not loaded so procedure, load mass bell. 5.2.2
piston position indication is not operating.

Pressure defined by PG9000 is grossly Active piston-cylinder module and/or mass Select correct piston-cylinder module andincorrect.
set are not those that are in use, the mass set; check mass load accounting. 3.6,
3.11.2, 3.13.1.10
correct mass value is not loaded.
Pressure defined by PG9000 is PG9000 is in absolute measurement mode Use [MODE] to select correct measurement
incorrect by roughly 100 kPa (14.5 psi).
when it should be in gauge measurement mode. 3.11.4
mode or vice-versa.
Pressure defined by PG9000 is A pressure head is applied incorrectly or Check and correct if necessary. 3.11.7, 3.12,
incorrect by relatively small amounts.
inadvertently, the value of gravity used by 3.13.1.8, 3.13.1.3
the SETUP file is incorrect, the PG9000
Platform is not level, information in thepiston-cylinder module and/or mass set fileis incorrect.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 170

6. TROUBLESHOOTINGSYMPTOM
Pressure
incorrect.

definedby

PROBABLE CAUSE
PG9000SOLUTION

is Piston is in spring zone although piston Adjust piston position measurement system.
position indicates it is floating freely.
5.2.2

When using automated pressure Pressure
control pressure generation stopped LIMIT.
and the controller is beeping.

reachedcontroller’s

UPPER Check [GEN] UL and adjust if desired.
3.11.9.3

When using AMH automated mass Mass loading resolution is set to finer than Adjust mass loading resolution to 0.1 kg,
handler, PG9000 still prompts for 0.1 kg and prompts are to load trim mass, initialize AMH mass set by selecting it.
AMH mass handler did not initialize.
manual mass loads.
3.11.10, 3.13.1.10
The pressure controller TOLERANCE Adjust the tolerance setting. 3.11.9.4
Automated pressure control (GEN) is function setting is too small.
overshooting the pressure at which the Piston position detection system is not Calibrate piston position indication system.
piston floats.
properly calibrated and piston is not 5.2.2
floating as expected.
Automated pressure control (GEN) is Pressure or vacuum supply on
not increasing or decreasing pressure pressure controller is not adequate.
as expected.
Automated pressure control (GEN) is
not starting after setting a target andloading mass AND measurementmode is absolute by vacuum.

the Provide correct pressure and vacuum
supplies to pressure controller. See thepressurecontroller
Operation
andMaintenance Manual.

In absolute by vacuum measurement Wait for vacuum to reach less than 13 Pa,
mode,
beforeautomatedpressure check and correct vacuum supply if
generation begins, the reference vacuum inadequate. 3.11.4, 3.11.9
must be below 13 Pa.

Page 171© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Notes© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 172

7.

Appendix

7.1

Conversion Of Numerical Values

PG9000 performs all internal calculations in SI units. Numerical values input or output in other units areconverted to SI immediately after entry and back to other units just before output as needed.
Table 26 provides the conversion coefficients used by PG9000 to convert numerical values expressed in
SI units to corresponding values expressed in other units.

7.1.1

Pressure
Table 26. Pressure Unit of Measure Conversions
To convert from Pa toPa

Pascal1.0

mbar

millibar

1.0 E-02

kPa

kilo Pascal

1.0 E-03

barBar

1.0 E-05mmWa @ 4°C

millimeter of water

1.019716 E-01

mmHg @ 0°C

millimeter of mercury

7.50063 E-03

psi

pound per square inch

1.450377 E-04

psf

pound per square foot1.007206 E-06

inWa @ 4°C

inch of water

4.014649 E-03

inWa @ 20°C

inch of water

4.021732 E-03

inWa @ 60°F

inch of water

4.018429 E-03

inHg @ 0°C

inch of mercury

2.953 E-04

kilogram force per centimeter square

1.019716 E-05

Torr

Torr (mmHg @ 0°C)

7.50063 E-03

mTor

milli Torr (micron Hg @ 0°C)

7.50063

user

User

User defined coefficient

kcm

7.2

Multiply by

2Defined Pressure Calculations

Sections 7.2.1 and 7.2.2 document the calculations used by PG9000 piston gauges to obtain the definedpressure.
Table 27 defines the pressure calculation variables used in Sections 7.2.1 and 7.2.2.

Page 173© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Table 27. PG9000 Defined Pressure Calculation Variables
VARIABLE

DEFINITION

UNITSΑθ , P /πPiston radius at temperature θ andpressure PmCalculated.

A20,0

Piston effective area at 20°C, Patm

Aθ,P

Piston effective area at temperature θ,
pressure P
Local gravity

mm2
m2

Piston-cylinder module file (3.13.1.3).
Calculated from A20,0 in piston-cylinder
module file (3.13.1.3).

m/s2Local, standard or user as specified incurrent SETUP file (3.12, 3.13.6).
Calculated from A20,0 and standard
conditions.
Current mass loading instruction (3.6,
3.11.11).
Calculated.
Internal measurement, user entered value
or standard as specified by SETUP file (3.12).

G

SOURCE OF VALUE

KN

Nominal mass to pressure conversion
coefficient for a given piston-cylinder size

M

Mass load

kg

PA
Patm

Absolute pressure
Atmospheric (ambient) pressure

Paa
Paa

PG
PHA

Gauge pressure
Fluid head correction in absolute mode

Pa
Pa

PHG

Fluid head correction in gauge mode

Pa

Pnom

Nominal pressure

Pa

PoffsetDifference between PG9000 and RPM at
the static pressure of differential mode

Pa

PRPM

Current static pressure reading fromreference pressure monitor

Paa

∆PD

Differential pressurePaΓ

Surface tension coefficient

N/mCalculated.
Calculated using device heights andmedium (7.2.2, 3.11.7, 3.13.3).
Calculated using device heights andmedium (7.2.2, 3.11.7, 3.13.3).
In pressure to mass mode Pnom=Preq
In mass to pressure mode Pnom=M·KN
Determined experimentally in PG9000
differential mode operation (see Section
3.11.4.1, Selecting Differential Mode,
Setting Static Pressure, Finding RPM
Offset (<1run>).
Read automatically from external atm Psource specified by SETUP file. Used indifferential mode only (3.12, 3.11.4.1).
Calculated. Differential mode only
(3.11.4.1).
Piston-cylinder module file (3.13.1.3).

αC

Cylinder linear thermal expansion coefficient°C-1

Piston-cylinder module file (3.13.1.3).

αP

Piston linear thermal expansion coefficient-1°C

Piston-cylinder module file (3.13.1.3).

λθ

Piston-cylinder pressure coefficient

Pa-1

Piston-cylinder module file (3.13.1.3).

Temperature of piston-cylinder°Cρa

Air density

kg/m3

ρm

Mass density

kg/m3Internal measurement, user entered value
or standard as specified by SETUP file (3.12).
Calculated from standard air density
corrected for actual atmospheric pressure,ambient temperature and relative humidity(atm p, humidity and temp source are
specified by SETUP file) (3.12).
Mass set file (3.13.1.8).

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 174

Pa/kg

7. APPENDIX

7.2.1

Calculations

PG9000 performs pressure to mass and mass to pressure calculations as follows:•

Gauge mode:ρ 
Mg 1 − a  + 2πΓ
ρm 

PG =
Aθ ,P

Αθ,P
π

+ PΗG

Aθ,P = A20, 0 ⋅ 10 −6 ⋅ [1 + (θ − 20 )(α P + α C )](1 + λPnom )•Absolute pressure by adding atmospheric pressure:Aρ 
Mg 1 − a  + 2πΓ θ,Pπ ρm PA =+ PHA + Patm
Aθ,PAθ,P = A20, 0 ⋅ 10 −6 ⋅ [1 + (θ − 20 )(α P + α C )](1 + λPnom )•Absolute pressure with vacuum reference:
PA =

Aθ,P

Mg + 2πΓπAθ,P+ PHA + Pvac

Aθ,P = A20, 0 ⋅ 10 −6 ⋅ [1 + (θ − 20 )(α P + α C )](1 + λPnom )•Differential pressure (differential mode):∆PD =Mg + 2πΓ

Aθ,P
π

Aθ,P

+ PHA + Pvac − PRPM − Poffset

Aθ,P = A20, 0 ⋅ 10 −6 ⋅ [1 + (θ − 20 )(α P + α C )](1 + λPnom )Page 175© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

7.2.2

Fluid Heads
7.2.2.1

Fluid Head Components

PG9000supports
three
different
fluid
head
components(seeSections 3.13.3, 3.11.7): DUT head, ATM head and Piston head. The threecomponents are combined to create the overall head correction for each PG9000
measurement mode (see Section 7.2.2.2).
DUT head: Calculates and applies a fluid head correction to predict the definedpressure at a level other than the PG9000’s reference level (see Section 3.11.7).
The DUT head is calculated following:

PH DUT = (ρ f − ρ a )gh D

Where:PH DUT , DUT head [Pa]=ρ f, fluid density [kg/m ]=ρ a, air density [kg/m3]

=

3

2

g, gravity [m/s ]=hD, DUT height [m]=fluid head correction applied to the defined pressure
calculated at the PG9000 reference level.
3
density of the pressurized medium (oil density = 916 kg/m ,3water density = 998.2321 kg/m , gas densities are calculated
for N2, He or air dependent on current pressure andtemperature).
density of ambient air calculated using current ambientpressure, temperature and relative humidity (values as
specified in the active SETUP file, see Section 3.12).
Assumed to be zero when operating in absolute with avacuum reference mode. Calculated using static pressure
density measured by RPM in differential mode.
acceleration due to gravity (value as specified in the active
SETUP file, see Section 3.12).
Height of DUT above PG9000 reference level. Value isnegative if below reference level.

ATM head: Calculates and applies a fluid head correction to internal or externalbarometer readings to correct the atmospheric pressure value to the PG9000’sreference level if the barometer is reading at a different level (see Section 3.13.3).
The ATM head is calculated following:

PH atm = ρas gh B
Where:

PH atm , ATM head [Pa]=fluid head correction applied to the internal or externalbarometer reading.

ρas, air density [kg/m ]=standard air density of 1.2 kg/m .

g, gravity [m/s2]=

acceleration due to gravity (value as specified in the active
SETUP file, see Section 3.12).

hB, barometer height [m]=Height of the internal or external barometer above the
PG9000 reference level. Value is negative if below
reference level.

3© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

3

Page 176

7. APPENDIXPISTON head: Calculates and applies a fluid head correction to compensate forthe difference between the current piston position and the PG9000’s reference
level (see Section 3.13.3.4).
The Piston head is calculated following:

PH P = (ρ f − ρ a )g (hP + hrlo )Where:PH P , Piston head [Pa]=fluid head correction applied to calculate definedpressure.

ρ f, fluid density [kg/m ]=Density of test fluid at current pressure.

ρ a, air density [kg/m ]=density of ambient air calculated using current
ambient pressure, temperature and relative
humidity (values as specified in the active
SETUP file, see Section 3.12). Assumed to be
zero when operating in absolute with a vacuum
reference mode.
Calculated using staticpressure density measured by RPM in differential
mode.

g, gravity [m/s2]=

acceleration due to gravity (value as specified in
the active SETUP file, see Section 3.12).

hP, piston height [m]=Height of the current piston position above
PG9000 reference level.

hrlo,reference level offset [m]=Reference level offset of the piston (see Section
3.11.7).

3

3

7.2.2.2

Overall Fluid Head Correction

The overall fluid head correction for each PG9000 mode results from combining
the three head components. In general, overall head correction is given by:
PH = − PH DUT − PH atm + PH P

Gauge mode:

PHG = −(ρ f − ρ a )gh D +(ρ f − ρ a )g (hP + hrlo )Absolute mode by adding atmospheric pressure: Air density is zero for allcomponents except for the ATM head which is used to compensate forbarometer height.

PHA = − ρ f gh D − ρ as ghB + ρ f g (hP + hrlo )Absolute mode with vacuum reference: Air density is zero for all terms and nobarometer is used.

PHA = − ρ f gh D + ρ f g (hP + hrlo )Differential mode: Head correction is the same as for absolute mode withvacuum reference. Head correction for the height of the RPM is unnecessary
through the use of the RPM offset.

PHA = − ρ f gh D + ρ f g (hP + hrlo )Page 177© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

7.3

Glossary

Absolute

As in absolute pressure. Pressure expressed relative to vacuum.

Absolute by vacuum,
avac

Absolute pressure determined by defining pressure relative to vacuum in an evacuated bell jar.

Absolute byatmosphere, aatm

Absolute pressure determined by adding atmospheric pressure to gauge pressure.

Adder

A value added to internal sensor readings to offset the readings (pressure adder, temperatureadder, humidity adder, vacuum adder) for calibration adjustment.

Ae

Piston-cylinder effective area.

AMH

Optional automated mass handling system.

ATM Head

Pressure head correction to the barometer measurement to take into consideration the
difference between the actual barometer level and the PG9000 reference level.

Crossfloat

Process of comparison of two piston cylinders in which they are connected together underpressure and the mass of one is adjusted so that both pistons float together at a commonpressure.

Default

The initial value of a quantity in the PG9000 that may be changed by the user. A value enteredor created for a standard configuration or on power up.

Differential

As in differential pressure. Pressure expressed relative to atmospheric or another staticpressure determined by subtracting the static pressure from absolute by vacuum (differential
measurement mode).

DUT (Device Under
Test)

The device being tested or calibrated.

DUT Head

Fluid head correction to the pressure defined by PG9000 to predict the pressure at the level ofthe DUT, which may be different from the PG9000 reference level.

FS (Full Scale)

The full scale value is the maximum value or the span of a measurement range. Limits andspecifications are often expressed as % FS.

g, glAcceleration due to gravity (g). Acceleration due to gravity at location of use (gl).

Gauge

As in gauge pressure. Pressure expressed relative to atmospheric pressure.

He

Helium gas.

Head

Fluid head, a pressure difference due to a difference in height. See also ATM head, DUT head
and PISTON head.

HSTOP, LSTOPHigh stop and low stop, piston maximum end of stroke positions.

InHg

Pressure unit of measure, inches of mercury.

InWa

Pressure unit of measure, inches of water.

kcm

2

Pressure unit of measure, kilogram per centimeter square.

Measurement Mode

Mode in which PG9000 is defining pressures. These include gauge (pressure relative toatmospheric pressure), absolute by atmosphere (pressure relative to vacuum determined byadding atmospheric pressure to gauge pressure), absolute by vacuum (pressure relative to
vacuum determined by establishing a vacuum around the mass load), differential (pressure
relative to atmospheric or another static pressure determined by subtracting the static pressure
from absolute by vacuum).

MS (Mass Set)

A group of masses composed for use with a PG9000 piston gauge.

Mass BellThe sleeve loaded onto the piston to carry other masses.

Mass Entry Mode(mass to pressure)

Operating mode in which the user enters the mass loaded on the piston and the PG9000
calculates the defined pressure. See also Pressure Entry Mode.

Medium, pressurized

The pressurized fluid.

Multiplier

A value by which internal sensor readings are multiplied to change their slope (pressure multiplier,temperature multiplier, humidity multiplier, vacuum multiplier) for calibration adjustment.

N2

Nitrogen gas.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 178

7. APPENDIX

Nominal Mass

The mass loaded on the piston in terms of the nominal values written on the individual masses.
See also True Mass.

NormalA conventional or standard value.

PC, P-C

Piston-cylinder, piston-cylinder module.

Pressure Entry Mode(pressure to mass)

Operating mode in which the user enters the pressure to be defined and PG9000 calculates themass to load. See also Mass entry mode.

PISTON head

Fluid head correction based on the difference between the piston’s current position and thereference level.

PRT

Platinum Resistance Thermometer. The element used in the piston-cylinder mounting post tomeasure temperature.

Ready/Not Ready

Indication of when conditions are present to make in tolerance pressure definitions based on
specific criteria for each condition.

Reference Level

Height at which pressures are defined. PG9000 defines pressures at its reference level. Fluid headcorrections correct the pressure relative to the reference level.

SETUP file

File specifying the source of values for the variables used by PG9000 to calculate defined pressure.

Static Pressure

Pressure on the low side in PG9000 differential mode.

True Mass

The actual mass loaded on the piston using the measured value of each mass. See also
Nominal Mass.

User Level

Level of security that can be set to limit access to certain PG9000 functions

Page 179© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

7.4

Limited Warranty and Limitation of Liability

Each Fluke product is warranted to be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service.
The warranty period is one year and begins on the date of shipment. Parts, product repairs and services are
warranted for 90 days. This warranty extends only to the original buyer or end-user customer of a Fluke authorized
reseller, and does not apply to fuses, disposable batteries or to any product which, in Fluke's opinion, has been
misused, altered, neglected, contaminated, or damaged by accident or abnormal conditions of operation or handling.
Fluke warrants that software will operate substantially in accordance with its functional specifications for 90 days andthat it has been properly recorded on non-defective media. Fluke does not warrant that software will be error free oroperate without interruption.
Fluke authorized resellers shall extend this warranty on new and unused products to end-user customers only but
have no authority to extend a greater or different warranty on behalf of Fluke. Warranty support is available only if
product is purchased through a Fluke authorized sales outlet or Buyer has paid the applicable international price.
Fluke reserves the right to invoice Buyer for importation costs of repair/replacement parts when product purchased in
one country is submitted for repair in another country.
Fluke's warranty obligation is limited, at Fluke's option, to refund of the purchase price, free of charge repair, or
replacement of a defective product which is returned to a Fluke authorized service center within the warranty period.
To obtain warranty service, contact your nearest Fluke authorized service center to obtain return authorization
information, then send the product to that service center, with a description of the difficulty, postage and insurance
prepaid (FOB Destination). Fluke assumes no risk for damage in transit. Following warranty repair, the product will
be returned to Buyer, transportation prepaid (FOB Destination). If Fluke determines that failure was caused byneglect, misuse, contamination, alteration, accident or abnormal condition of operation or handling, including
overvoltage failures caused by use outside the product’s specified rating, or normal wear and tear of mechanicalcomponents, Fluke will provide an estimate of repair costs and obtain authorization before commencing the work.
Following repair, the product will be returned to the Buyer transportation prepaid and the Buyer will be billed for the
repair and return transportation charges (FOB Shipping Point).
THIS WARRANTY IS BUYER'S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY
OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. FLUKE SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, INCLUDING LOSS OF DATA, ARISING FROM ANY
CAUSE OR THEORY.
Since some countries or states do not allow limitation of the term of an implied warranty, or exclusion or limitation ofincidental or consequential damages, the limitations and exclusions of this warranty may not apply to every buyer. If
any provision of this Warranty is held invalid or unenforceable by a court or other decision-maker of competentjurisdiction, such holding will not affect the validity or enforceability of any other provision.
Fluke Corporation
P.O. Box 9090
Everett, WA 98206-9090
U.S.A.

© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Fluke Europe B.V.
P.O. Box 1186
5602 BD Eindhoven
The Netherlands

Page 180

7. APPENDIX

Table 28. Fluke Calibration Authorized Service Providers
FLUKE CALIBRATIONAUTHORIZED SERVICE PROVIDERS – PRESSURE CALIBRATION PRODUCTS
COMPANYTELEPHONE,
FAX & EMAILADDRESSNORMAL SUPPORTREGION

Fluke Calibration

4765 East Beautiful Lane
Phoenix AZ 85044-5318
USA

Tel 602.431.9100
Fax 602.431.9559
cal.repair@dhinstruments.com

Worldwide

Minerva Meettechniek B.V.

Chrysantstraat 1
3812 WX Amersfoort
The Netherlands

Tel 31 33 46 22 000
Fax 31 33 46 22 218
info@minervaipm.com

European Union

europascal GmbHAn der Wiesenhecke 10
D-63456 Hanau
Germany

Tel: +49 61 81 42 309 0
Fax: +49 61 81 42 309 22
service@europascal.deEuropean Union

Ohte Giken Inc
Technology Center

258-1, Nakadai
Kasumigaura-machi,
Niihari-Gun,
Ibaraki 300-0133
Japan

Tel 81/29.840.9111

Japan/Asia

Rm. 401, SCITEC Tower,
N0. 22, Jianguomenwai Dajie,
Beijing 100004, PRC

Hot Line: 400.810.3435-3
Fax:(8610) 65286307
serviceinfo@fluke.com.cn

Fluke Beijing Service
CenterFax 81/29.840.9100
tech@ohtegiken.co.jp

Page 181

Peoples Republic of China© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

PG9000™ OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Notes© 1998-2010 Fluke Calibration

Page 182